manualshive.com logo in svg

Avaya G450 Manager, Cli Reference Manual

The Avaya G450 Manager is a versatile telecommunications product designed to streamline your communication system. This comprehensive manual provides an overview and specifications, offering valuable insights into optimizing its performance. Download your free user manual from our website manualshive.com, empowering you to master this product effortlessly.

Share
Download
background image

RADIUS authentication

Issue 1 January 2008

843

 

CURRENT STATE

---------------------------------------------------------

In Use     : 20 of  100 channels, 240of 1200 points (0.0% used)

VoIP -DSPs PARAMETERS 

VoIP   Child   CODE  SUFFIX     HW      FW          Chan      Admin     Oper     Fault

Slot   Board                 VINTAGE  VINTAGE       InUse     State     State    Status

----   -----   ----  ------  -------  --------      -------   -----     -----    ------

1      VOIP    8122    A       3       235          20/80     Release    InUse  No Error

2      VOIP    7119    A       5       215          0/20      Busyout    Idle   No Error

3      -- Not Installed --

4      SYNC

Related Commands - VoIP

busyout voip-dsp

, 

campon-busyout voip-dsp

, 

release voip-dsp

, 

reset voip-dsp

, 

show voip-dsp

, 

test voip-dsp

Related Commands - QoS

set qos bearer

, 

set qos control

, 

set qos signal

, 

show qos-rtcp

RADIUS authentication

clear radius authentication server 

Use the 

clear radius authentication server 

command to clear the primary or 

secondary RADIUS server IP address.

Syntax

clear radius authentication server {primary|secondary}

Parameters

Parameter

Description

Possible 
Values

Default 
Value

primary

Keyword specifying to clear the primary 
RADIUS server

secondary

Keyword specifying to clear the secondary 
RADIUS server

Summary of Contents for G450 Manager

Page 1: ...Avaya G450 CLI Reference 03 602056 Issue 1 January 2008 ...

Page 2: ...extent made by the Customer or End User Link disclaimer Avaya Inc is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced elsewhere within this documentation and Avaya does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and we have no control over the availabi...

Page 3: ...face contexts 40 Entering an interface 41 Command line prompts 41 Available contexts 42 Chapter 2 Roadmap 45 Announcement files 45 ARP table 46 ASG authentication 46 Auxiliary files 48 Backing up the gateway to a USB device 48 Backup interfaces 49 Broadcast relay 49 CAM table 50 CDR file 50 CLI sessions 51 CNA test plugs 51 Configuration files 52 Connectivity 54 Contact closure 54 Counters 54 CSU ...

Page 4: ...77 IP unnumbered 79 IPHC header compression 79 License file of CM 80 License file of gateway 81 Link status 82 LLDP 82 Logging 83 Master key configuration 84 MGC Media Gateway Controller configuration 84 Modem configuration Console port 85 Modem configuration USB modem port 86 MSS notifications 526 87 Object tracking 88 OSPF 90 Packet sniffing 91 Platform information 94 PMI 95 Policy access contro...

Page 5: ...tion 136 SYN cookies 137 Syslog files 137 System identification 138 Telnet access 138 TFTP server 139 Traffic shaping 139 USB mass storage device 140 Users 141 USP configuration 141 Van Jacobson header compression 142 VLAN configuration 143 VoIP 144 VoIP testing 144 VPN 145 VRRP 151 WAN configuration verifying 152 WAN Ethernet port configuration 152 WFVQ Weighted Fair VoIP Queuing 153 Chapter 3 CL...

Page 6: ...auth file scp 176 copy auth file tftp 177 copy auth file usb 178 copy ftp auth file 179 copy scp auth file 180 copy tftp auth file 181 copy usb auth file 182 erase auth file 183 login authentication lockout 184 login authentication local craft password 185 login authentication response time 186 login authentication services login 187 ppp authentication 188 show auth file info 189 show download aut...

Page 7: ...ers CNA test plugs 215 control port 216 rtp echo port 216 rtp test port 217 scheduler 218 shutdown CNA test plugs 219 test rate limit 220 cna testplug service 221 show cna testplug 221 Configuration files 225 copy ftp startup config 225 copy running config ftp 226 copy running config scp 227 copy running config startup config 228 copy running config tftp 229 copy scp startup config 230 copy startu...

Page 8: ...51 show csu loopbacks 251 show csu status 252 Date and time setting 253 set date 253 set time 254 Default gateway 255 ip default gateway 255 Default settings 257 zeroize 257 Device status 258 clear utilization cpu 258 set utilization cpu 258 show download 259 show faults 260 show mg list_config 261 show mgc 262 show mm 263 show module 264 show recovery 265 show restart log 266 show system 267 show...

Page 9: ...e dhcp 286 renew dhcp 287 show ip dhcp client 288 show ip dhcp client statistics 292 DHCP server 294 clear ip dhcp server binding 294 clear ip dhcp server statistics 295 ip dhcp activate pool 295 ip dhcp ping packets 296 ip dhcp ping timeout 297 ip dhcp pool 298 bootfile 299 client identifier 300 default router 301 dns server 301 domain name 302 end ip addr 303 lease 304 name 305 next server 306 o...

Page 10: ...stname 335 line 336 show banner login 337 show banner post login 337 terminal length 338 terminal width 339 DNS resolver 340 clear ip domain statistics 340 ip domain list 340 ip domain lookup 341 ip domain name server list 342 description DNS resolver 343 name server 343 ip domain retry 344 ip domain timeout 345 nslookup 346 ppp ipcp dns request 347 show ip domain 347 show ip domain statistics 349...

Page 11: ...ort enable disable 378 set port flowcontrol 379 set port level 381 set port name 382 set port negotiation 383 set port point to point admin status 384 set port speed 385 show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement 386 show port edge state 387 show port flowcontrol 388 ETR 390 set etr 390 show etr 391 Fans 392 show platform fans 392 Firmware management 393 copy ftp EW_archive 393 copy ftp ...

Page 12: ...392dte 420 frame relay lmi n393dte 421 frame relay lmi type 422 frame relay priority dlci group 423 frame relay traffic shaping 424 ip address 425 map class frame relay 426 bc out 427 be out 428 cir out 429 fragment 430 show frame relay map 431 show frame relay pvc brief 432 show interfaces 432 show map class frame relay 435 show traffic shape 436 show traffic shape queue 438 show traffic shape st...

Page 13: ...ce fastethernet 465 interface loopback 466 interface serial 467 interface tunnel 468 interface USB modem 469 interface vlan 470 description interface 471 ip address 472 ip admin state 473 ip broadcast address 474 load interval 474 show ip interface 475 show ip interface brief 478 shutdown interface 479 IP phone upgrades 480 clear ip tftp server statistics 480 copy ftp phone image 481 copy ftp phon...

Page 14: ... port range 509 ip tcp compression connections 510 show ip rtp header compression 511 show ip rtp header compression brief 513 show ip tcp header compression 514 show ip tcp header compression brief 516 License file of CM 517 ip license server 517 License file of gateway 518 copy ftp license file 518 copy license file ftp 519 copy license file scp 520 copy license file tftp 521 copy license file u...

Page 15: ...5 show logging file content 556 show logging server condition 557 show logging session condition 558 Master key configuration 559 key config key password encryption 559 MGC Media Gateway Controller configuration 561 clear mgc list 561 session 562 set icc monitoring 563 set mediaserver 563 set mgc list 564 set reset times 565 show icc monitoring 566 show mediaserver 567 show mgc 568 show mgc list 5...

Page 16: ...mss notification rate 592 show mss notification rate 593 Object tracking 594 rtr 594 type 595 dscp object tracking 596 fail retries 597 frequency 598 interface keepalive bypass logic 599 next hop object tracking 599 source address 601 success retries 602 wait interval 603 rtr schedule 604 show rtr configuration 605 show rtr operational state 607 show track 608 track 610 description object tracking...

Page 17: ...e interface 638 capture ipsec 639 capture max frame size 640 capture start 640 capture stop 641 capture service 642 clear capture buffer 643 copy capture file ftp 644 copy capture file scp 645 copy capture file tftp 646 copy capture file usb 647 ip capture list 648 cookie 648 ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing 649 composite operation 650 destination ip 651 dscp policy based routin...

Page 18: ... operation 684 destination ip 685 dscp policy 687 fragment 688 icmp 689 ip protocol 691 show composite operation 692 show ip rule 693 source ip 695 tcp destination port 696 tcp established 698 tcp source port 699 udp destination port 701 udp source port 703 name 705 owner 706 show composite operation 707 show ip rule 708 show list 709 ip access group 710 ip policy list copy 711 ip simulate 712 sho...

Page 19: ...stination port 747 udp source port 749 name 751 owner 752 pre classification 753 show composite operation 754 show dscp table 755 show ip rule 756 show list 758 ip simulate 759 show ip qos list 760 Policy based routing 762 ip next hop list 762 next hop interface 763 next hop ip 765 show next hop 766 ip pbr group 766 ip pbr list 767 cookie 768 icmp 769 ip rule policy policy based routing packet sni...

Page 20: ...dundancy 803 set port redundancy enable disable 805 set port redundancy intervals 806 show port redundancy 807 Port status 807 show port 807 PPP encapsulation 809 interface serial 809 encapsulation 810 ip address 812 keepalive PPP 813 ppp timeout ncp 814 ppp timeout retry 815 show interfaces 815 PPPoE PPP over Ethernet 818 interface FastEthernet 818 encapsulation pppoe 819 ip address negotiated 82...

Page 21: ...adius authentication server 847 set radius authentication udp port 848 show radius authentication 849 Recovery password 850 set terminal recovery password 850 Restoring gateway configuration 851 restore usb 851 show restore status 852 RIP 853 ip distribution access default action 853 ip distribution access list 854 ip distribution access list cookie 855 ip distribution access list copy 856 ip dist...

Page 22: ...P 880 redistribute OSPF 881 redistribute RIP 882 Routing table configuration 883 clear ip route 883 ip default gateway 884 ip netmask format 885 ip redirects 886 ip route 886 ip routing 888 show ip route 889 show ip route best match 890 show ip route static 891 show ip route summary 892 show ip route track table 893 traceroute 893 RSVP 896 set qos rsvp 896 show qos rtcp 897 RTCP 898 set qos rtcp 8...

Page 23: ...endpoint init 930 set interface 931 set interface companding 932 set layer1 stable 933 set name 934 set side 935 set spid a 937 set spid b 938 set tei assignment 939 show bri 940 clear attendant 942 clear bri 942 clear dial pattern 943 clear ds1 944 clear extension 944 clear fac 945 clear incoming routing 946 clear sig group 947 clear slot config 948 clear station 949 clear survivable config 950 c...

Page 24: ...ng 983 set length 984 set match pattern 985 show incoming routing 986 set attendant 987 set date format 988 set fac 989 set ip codec set 990 set max ip registrations 991 set pim lockout 991 set slot config 992 show attendant 994 show bri 994 show date format 996 show dial pattern 996 show ds1 998 show extension 999 show fac 1001 show incoming routing 1002 show ip codec set 1003 show last pim updat...

Page 25: ...1039 remove port 1039 set cbc 1040 set cbc parameter 1041 set cbc service feature 1043 set channel preference 1044 set codeset display 1045 set codeset national 1046 set dial 1047 set digit handling 1047 set digits 1049 set digit treatment 1050 set incoming destination 1051 set incoming dialtone 1052 set japan disconnect 1053 set name 1054 set numbering format 1055 set send name 1056 set send numb...

Page 26: ...erver enable notifications 1092 snmp server host 1093 snmp server informs 1096 Spanning tree 1098 set port edge admin state 1098 set port point to point admin status 1099 set port spantree 1100 set port spantree cost 1101 set port spantree force protocol migration 1102 set port spantree priority 1103 set spantree default path cost 1104 set spantree enable disable 1105 set spantree forward delay 11...

Page 27: ...3 set system contact 1133 set system location 1134 set system name 1134 Telnet access 1135 ip telnet 1135 ip telnet client 1136 ip telnet services 1137 show ip telnet 1137 telnet 1138 TFTP server 1139 clear ip tftp server statistics 1139 ip tftp server 1140 ip tftp server file system size 1140 show application memory 1141 Traffic shaping 1142 interface serial 1142 frame relay traffic shaping 1144 ...

Page 28: ...n 1173 ip tcp compression connections 1174 ip tcp header compression 1175 show ip tcp header compression 1177 show ip tcp header compression brief 1178 VLAN configuration 1180 clear port static vlan 1180 clear vlan 1181 interface vlan 1182 icc vlan 1183 set port static vlan 1184 set port vlan 1185 set port vlan binding mode 1186 set trunk 1187 set vlan 1188 show cam vlan 1189 show port vlan bindin...

Page 29: ...escription ISAKMP peer 1216 initiate mode 1217 isakmp policy 1218 keepalive VPN 1219 keepalive track 1220 pre shared key 1221 self identity 1222 suggest key 1223 crypto isakmp peer group 1224 description ISAKMP peer group 1225 set peer peer group 1226 crypto isakmp policy 1227 authentication 1228 description ISAKMP policy 1229 encryption 1230 group 1231 hash 1231 lifetime 1232 crypto isakmp sugges...

Page 30: ...eempt 1274 ip vrrp primary 1275 ip vrrp priority 1276 ip vrrp timer 1276 router vrrp 1277 show ip vrrp 1278 WAN configuration verifying 1280 show controllers 1280 show frame relay fragment 1281 show frame relay lmi 1282 show frame relay map 1284 show frame relay pvc 1285 show frame relay traffic 1286 show interfaces 1287 show map class frame relay 1290 WAN Ethernet port configuration 1291 interfac...

Page 31: ...Contents Issue 1 January 2008 31 Alphabetical Index of Commands 1305 Topical Index of Commands 1315 ...

Page 32: ...Contents 32 Avaya G450 CLI Reference ...

Page 33: ...ription contains The command name A short description of the purpose of the command The following sections Syntax This section describes the correct syntax for the command Parameters This section lists and describes elements of the command syntax such as parameters their definitions and allowed values User Level This section shows the lowest access level for which the command is accessible There a...

Page 34: ...k Therefore the Avaya Web site Display Type Description Screen Display text Text represented in this format is displayed by the CLI User entered text Text represented in this format is entered by the user Variable This format indicates a variable argument as it is entered by the user Variable in text This format indicates a variable argument discussed in the Parameters section Syntax elements grou...

Page 35: ...ok title Your browser downloads the book Related resources For more information on the Avaya G450 Media Gateway and related features see the following books Title Number Overview for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03 602058 Quick Start for Hardware Installation for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03 602053 Installing and Upgrading the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03 602054 Administration for the Avaya G450...

Page 36: ... 7585 Maintenance and repair call the Avaya National Customer Care Support Line at 1 800 242 2121 Toll fraud call Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention at 1 800 643 2353 International For all international resources contact your local Avaya authorized dealer for additional help Trademarks All trademarks identified by the or TM are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other tra...

Page 37: ... reach us by Mail send your comments to Avaya Inc Product Documentation Group Room B3 H13 1300 W 120th Ave Westminster CO 80234 USA E mail send your comments to document avaya com Fax send your comments to 1 303 538 1741 Ensure that you mention the name and number of this book Avaya G450 CLI Reference 03 602056 ...

Page 38: ...About this Book 38 Avaya G450 CLI Reference ...

Page 39: ...e help to see the list of commands available in the current context User levels The following are the user levels that control access to the various parts of the CLI Level Access Description User read only User level is a general access level used to display system parameter values This level complies with the Read Only restrictions level Privileged read write Privileged level is used to access co...

Page 40: ... interface command with an interface identifier such as interface loopback 1 When an interface has only one sub interface the commands for the sub interface are available from the context of the parent interface This is called unified configuration When there are multiple sub interfaces you must enter the context of a particular sub interface in order to configure the sub interface For example whe...

Page 41: ...ine prompts The command line prompt is always prefixed with the hostname of the media gateway If the media gateway is registered then the prompt is hostname media_gateway_number Otherwise the prompt is hostname The root context prompt reflects the logged in user level The Supervisor level prompt always ends with super The Privileged level prompt ends with The User level prompt ends with Note Note ...

Page 42: ...ser Root Read Only context Log in as Privileged User Root Read Write context Log in as Supervisor Root Admin context super CNA testplug Configuring a CNA testplug cna testplug 1 Interface Console Configuring the Console interface if Console Interface USB Configuring the USB interface if USB Modem Interface Serial USP E1 T1 if serial 2 1 Interface Loopback The loopback virtual interface if loopback...

Page 43: ...ntry ACL 301 ip rule 4 composite operation Security ACL match action ACL 301 CompOp 2 ip capture list Configure a capture list Cap 501 ip capture list ip rule Configure a capture list rule Cap 501 ip rule 22 ip dhcp pool Configure a DHCP pool DHCP 5 ip dhcp pool option Configure a DHCP option DHCP 5 option 19 ip dhcp pool vendor specific opti on Configure a vendor specific DHCP option DHCP 5 vendo...

Page 44: ...tandard Local Survivability SLS sls sls station Configure SLS stations sls station extension sls trunk group Configure SLS trunks sls trunk group tgnum sls ds1 Configure SLS DS1 parameters sls ds1 port address sls sig group Configure SLS signaling group parameters sls sig group sgnum sls bri Configure SLS BRI parameters sls bri slot address sls dial pattern Configure SLS dial pattern parameters sl...

Page 45: ...announcement directory copy scp announcement file Download an announcement file from a remote SCP server to the G450 announcement directory copy usb announcement file Download an announcement file from a USB mass storage device to the G450 announcement directory erase announcement file Erase an announcement file from the G450 announcement directory rename announcement file Rename an announcement f...

Page 46: ...lay a list of the ARP resolved MAC to IP addresses in the ARP table show ip reverse arp Display the IP address of a host based on a known MAC address Table 4 ASG authentication CLI commands Command Description copy auth file ftp Upload the authentication file from the gateway to an FTP server copy auth file scp Upload the authentication file from the gateway to an SCP server copy auth file tftp Up...

Page 47: ...waits for user response to authentication requests before timing out a connection login authentication services login Activate all Avaya Services logins including local login to Console port and Services port with craft login Use the no form to deactivate all Avaya Services logins ppp authentication Set modem operation mode Setting the mode to ras enables ASG authentication for Avaya Services remo...

Page 48: ...ing the online help files and Java plug in show web aux files url Display the URL of the Web server containing online help files and the Java plug in Table 6 USB backup CLI commands Command Description backup config usb Back up the gateway configuration to a USB mass storage device show backup status Display information regarding the status of a backup of the gateway configuration to a USB mass st...

Page 49: ... to wait before switching to the backup interface in case of failure backup interface Set a backup interface for the current interface Table 8 Broadcast relay CLI commands Root level command First level command Description interface dialer FastEthernet serial tunnel VLAN see IP interface configuration Enter the context of a Dialer FastEthernet Serial Tunnel or VLAN interface ip directed broadcast ...

Page 50: ...AM table Table 10 CDR file CLI commands Command Description copy cdr file ftp Upload a Call Detail Recording CDR file to a remote server using FTP copy cdr file scp Upload a Call Detail Recording CDR file to a remote server using FTP copy cdr file tftp Upload a Call Detail Recording CDR file to a remote server using FTP copy cdr file usb Upload a Call Detail Recording CDR file from the gateway to ...

Page 51: ...splay the amount of time in minutes the terminal remains idle before timing out If the logout value is 0 there is no timeout limit tech Enter tech mode where additional tech related commands are available tree Display an alphabetical list of commands that are available at your current location in the CLI hierarchy Table 12 CNA test plugs CLI commands Root level command First level command Descript...

Page 52: ...test plug service on the gateway show cna testplug Display CNA test plug configuration and statistics Table 12 CNA test plugs CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 of 2 Table 13 Configuration files CLI commands Command Description copy ftp startup config Download a G450 configuration file from an FTP server to the Startup Configuration NVRAM copy running confi...

Page 53: ...uration NVRAM erase startup config Reset the NVRAM parameters to the factory default values This command is an alias for nvram initialize nvram initialize reset the NVRAM parameters to the factory default values This command is an alias for erase startup config show copy status Display the status of the copy running config startup config operation show download status Display the status of the cur...

Page 54: ...re relay is controlled set contact closure pulse duration Set the length of time for the relay to return to normal after the call controller triggers it show contact closure Display the status of one or all contact closure relays Table 16 Counters CLI commands Command Description clear counters interface Clear counters for the selected interface or the entire device clear ip traffic Clear the IP c...

Page 55: ...e of the server SAT controlled CSU loopbacks on a media module show csu status View the status of the CSU on a media module Table 18 Date and time setting CLI commands Command Description set date Set the current date set time Set the current time Table 19 Default gateway CLI commands Command Description ip default gateway Define or remove a default gateway router ...

Page 56: ...the device show faults Display information about currently active faults show mg list_config Display the current hardware and firmware configurations for the installed media gateway equipment show mgc Display information about the Media Gateway Controller with which the G450 is registered show mm Display information about media modules that are installed on the G450 show module Display brief infor...

Page 57: ...the front panel of the G450 Table 21 Device status commands continued Command Description 2 of 2 Table 22 DHCP and BOOTP relay CLI commands Root level command First level command Description interface FastEthernet VLAN see IP interface configuration Enter configuration mode for the FastEthernet or VLAN interface ip bootp dhcp network Select the network from which the BOOTP DHCP server should alloc...

Page 58: ...e to a USB mass storage device show upload dhcp binding file status Display the upload status of a DHCP binding file Table 24 DHCP client configuration CLI commands Root level command First level command Description clear ip dhcp client statistics Clear the DHCP client statistics counters interface fastethernet Enter interface FastEthernet configuration mode clear ip dhcp client statistics Clear t...

Page 59: ...he DHCP client s default route show ip dhcp client Display the configuration of the DHCP client show ip dhcp client statistics Display the DHCP client statistics counters release dhcp Release a DHCP lease for an interface renew dhcp Renew a DHCP lease for an interface show ip dhcp client Display the configuration of the DHCP client show ip dhcp client statistics Display the DHCP client statistics ...

Page 60: ...g packet by the DHCP server to check if the IP address it is about to allocate is already in use by another client ip dhcp ping timeout Set the time the DHCP server waits for a reply to a sent ping packet before allocating an IP address to a DHCP client ip dhcp pool Create a DHCP pool bootfile Provide startup parameters for the DHCP client device client identifier Reserve the pool s IP address for...

Page 61: ... a name for the DHCP option value Enter the option data type and the option data server name Specify the optional server name in the boot process of a DHCP client show ip dhcp pool Display DHCP pool configurations start ip addr Set the start IP address of the range of available IP addresses that the DHCP server may assign to clients subnet mask Configure the subnet mask of the pool vendor specific...

Page 62: ...st level command Second level command Description 3 of 3 Table 26 Dialer interface CLI commands Root level command First level command Description interface dialer Enter the interface Dialer configuration context dialer modem interface Associate a Dialer with a modem interface dialer order Set which dial strings are used upon a new dial trigger event dialer persistent Force the Dialer to attempt t...

Page 63: ...ler interface CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 of 2 Table 27 Banner CLI commands Command Description banner login Enter the login banner configuration mode banner post login Enter the post login banner configuration mode clear screen Clear the current terminal display hostname Change the Command Line Interface CLI prompt line Add a line to the current ban...

Page 64: ...list Specify static domain names suffixes to complete non FQDN names host names that do not end with a dot ip domain lookup Enable or disable the DNS Resolver ip domain name server list Enter the context of the DNS servers list or set up the list description DNS resolver Set a name for the DNS servers list name server Add a DNS server to the list of up DNS servers ip domain retry Set the number of...

Page 65: ...ernet Tunnel or VLAN interface dynamic cac Enable the ICMP keepalive mechanism on the current interface show dynamic cac Display information about the most recent dynamic CAC event Table 30 Dynamic trap manager CLI commands Command Description clear dynamic trap manager Remove administration of the dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager Modify the SNMP settings of the dynamic trap m...

Page 66: ...ock source Set the clock source for an E1 or T1 controller fdl Define the type of Facility Data Link loopback that the remote line is requested to enter framing Set the frame type for an E1 or T1 data line linecode E1 Set the type of line code transmission for the E1 line linecode T1 Set the type of line code transmission for the T1 line loopback Activate or deactivate loopback mode for an E1 or T...

Page 67: ... or range of ports set port edge admin state Determine whether the port is an edge port for the purposes of Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP set port enable disable Enable or disable a port or a range of ports set port flowcontrol Set the send receive mode for flowcontrol frames IEEE 802 3x or proprietary for a full duplex port set port level Set the default packet priority level for untagged pac...

Page 68: ...tion CLI commands continued Command Description 2 of 2 Table 33 ETR configuration CLI commands Command Description set etr Enable Emergency Transfer Relay ETR mode or allow the gateway to control ETR mode automatically show etr Display the status of Emergency Transfer Relay ETR mode Table 34 Fans CLI commands Command Description show platform fans Display information about the fan tray unit ...

Page 69: ...on a media module from a TFTP server copy tftp SW_imageA Upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank A from a TFTP server copy tftp SW_imageB Upgrade the G450 firmware into Bank B from a TFTP server copy usb EW_archive Upgrade the Java applet for Avaya G450 Manager software from the USB mass storage device copy usb module Upgrade the firmware on a media module from the USB mass storage device copy usb SW_...

Page 70: ...nd Description clear fragment Clear the fragment database and restore its default values fragment chain Set the maximum number of fragments that can comprise a single IP packet destined to the router fragment size Set the maximum number of fragmented IP packets destined to the router which should be reassembled at any given time fragment timeout Set the maximum number of seconds allocated for reas...

Page 71: ...y intervals that pass before issuing a full status enquiry message frame relay lmi n392dte Set the maximum number of unanswered status enquiries the equipment accepts before declaring the interface down frame relay lmi n393dte Set the number of status polling intervals over which the error threshold is counted the monitored event count frame relay lmi type Manually define the type of the Local Man...

Page 72: ...ces show frame relay pvc brief Display information on all PVCs known to the device in table form show interfaces Display interface configuration and statistics for a particular interface or all interfaces show map class frame relay Display the map class frame relay table show traffic shape Display traffic shaping and Frame Relay Traffic Shaping configuration information show traffic shape queue Di...

Page 73: ...estination address of the tunnel tunnel dscp Assign a DSCP value to packets traveling through the tunnel tunnel key Enable and set an ID key for the tunnel tunnel mode Specify the encapsulation method of the tunnel This command is only included for future development and for conformity with other systems Currently the tunnel can only perform GRE encapsulation tunnel path mtu discovery Enable dynam...

Page 74: ...level command First level command Description interface vlan Create a VLAN interface enter interface VLAN configuration mode or delete a VLAN interface icc vlan Set the current VLAN as the ICC VLAN show icc vlan Display the current ICC VLAN Table 41 ICMP errors CLI commands Command Description ip icmp errors Set ICMP error messages to ON or OFF show ip icmp Display the status enabled or disabled o...

Page 75: ...d keepalive packets necessary to set the interface s keepalive status as down keepalive icmp interval Set the interval in seconds between keepalive packets keepalive icmp source address Set the source IP address of the keepalive packets keepalive icmp success retries Set the number of consecutive successful keepalive packets necessary to set the interface s keepalive status as up keepalive icmp ti...

Page 76: ...es not exist or delete a Loopback interface or sub interface interface serial Enter Serial interface or sub interface configuration mode create a Serial interface if it does not exist or delete a Serial interface or sub interface interface tunnel Enter interface tunnel configuration mode create an interface tunnel if it does not exist or delete an interface tunnel or sub interface interface USB mo...

Page 77: ...es shutdown interface Set the administrative status of the current interface to down or restore the administrative status of the interface to up Table 43 IP interface configuration CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 of 2 Table 44 IP phone upgrades CLI commands Command Description clear ip tftp server statistics Clear TFTP server statistics copy ftp phone im...

Page 78: ...ile from the external USB mass storage device to phone image bank A B C or D in the local gateway TFTP directory copy usb phone script Download a phone script file from the external USB mass storage device to phone script bank A or B on the local gateway s TFTP directory erase phone image Delete phone image A B C D E or F erase phone script Delete phone script A B C or D ip tftp server file system...

Page 79: ... a specific interface clear ip tcp header compression Clear TCP header compression statistics for all enabled interfaces or for a specific interface interface dialer serial see IP interface configuration Enter the context of the Dialer or Serial interface ip rtp compression connections Control the number of Real Time Transport Protocol RTP connections supported on the current interface ip rtp head...

Page 80: ... interface show ip rtp header compression brief Display a subset of header compression statistics in the form of a table show ip tcp header compression Display TCP header compression statistics for a specific interface show ip tcp header compression brief Display a subset of TCP header compression statistics in the form of a table Table 46 IPHC configuration CLI commands continued Root level comma...

Page 81: ...to a remote server using TFTP copy license file usb Upload the license file from the gateway to a USB mass storage device copy scp license file Download a VPN license from an SCP server to the gateway copy tftp license file Download a VPN license from a TFTP server to the gateway copy usb license file Download a VPN license from a USB mass storage device to the gateway show download license file s...

Page 82: ...set lldp system control Enable or disable the LLDP application globally per device or stack set lldp tx delay Set the minimal delay in seconds between successive LLDP frame transmissions on each port set lldp tx hold multiplier Set the multiplier on the interval that determines the actual TTL value sent in an LLDP frame set lldp tx interval Set the interval at which the device transmits LLDP frame...

Page 83: ...f system messages to non volatile memory NVRAM set logging server Define a new Syslog output server for remote logging of system messages set logging server access level Set the access level associated with a Syslog server sink set logging server condition Set a filter for messages sent to the specified Syslog server Messages can be filtered by source system severity or both set logging server ena...

Page 84: ...ssion Table 51 Logging CLI commands continued Command Description 2 of 2 Table 52 Master configuration key CLI commands Command Description key config key password encryption Set the default Master Configuration Key of the gateway Table 53 MGC list CLI commands Command Description clear mgc list Remove one or more MGCs from the MGC list session Open a telnet connection to the MGC set icc monitorin...

Page 85: ...the MGCs on the MGC list show recovery Show the media gateway monitoring and recovery setup Table 53 MGC list CLI commands continued Command Description 2 of 2 Table 54 Console port configuration for modem use CLI commands Root level command First level command Description interface console Enter configuration context for the Console interface async mode interactive Enter modem mode every time the...

Page 86: ...ation status shutdown interface Disconnect an active PPP session and shut down the modem speed PPP Set the PPP baud rate to be used by asynchronous PPP ports timeout absolute Set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session Table 54 Console port configuration for modem use CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 o...

Page 87: ...r an authentication response show ppp authentication Display PPP authentication status shutdown USB modem Disconnect an active PPP session and shut down the modem timeout absolute Set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session Table 55 USB port configuration for modem use CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 ...

Page 88: ...ion rtr Enter Respond Time Reports RTR configuration mode RTRs are the basic building blocks of object tracking type Set the type of operation an RTR should employ in its probes and specify the address of the remote device being probed dscp object tracking Set the DSCP value for the packets of the RTR probes fail retries Set how many consecutive unanswered probes change the status of an RTR operat...

Page 89: ...edule Activate or stop an RTR operation show rtr configuration Display RTR configuration values show rtr operational state Display the global operational status of the RTR feature show track Display tracking information track Configure an object tracker description object tracking Set a description for the object tracker object Add an object tracker to a track list threshold count Set the upper an...

Page 90: ... OSPF interface for the purpose of determining the shortest path ip ospf dead interval Configure the interval before declaring the neighbor as dead ip ospf hello interval Specify the time interval between hello packets sent by the router ip ospf message digest key Specify the message digest key for the interface and enable OSPF MD5 authentication ip ospf network point to multipoint Specify the net...

Page 91: ...base for a specific router show ip ospf interface Display the OSPF related interface information show ip ospf neighbor Display OSPF neighbor information on a per interface basis show ip protocols Display parameters and statistics of a given IP routing protocol Table 58 OSPF CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 of 2 Table 59 Packet sniffing CLI commands Root l...

Page 92: ...ure service clear capture buffer Clear the capture buffer useful in case it holds sensitive information copy capture file ftp Upload the packet sniffing buffer to a file on a remote FTP server copy capture file scp Upload the packet sniffing buffer to a file on a remote SCP server copy capture file tftp Upload the packet sniffing buffer to a file on a remote TFTP server copy capture file usb Uploa...

Page 93: ...itial fragments only icmp Set the IP protocol to ICMP and an equation on the types of ICMP messages ip protocol Set the IP protocol show ip rule Display the attributes of a specific rule source ip Set the current rule to apply to packets from the specified source IP address tcp destination port Set the IP protocol to TCP and an equation on the destination port tcp source port Set the IP protocol t...

Page 94: ... frames show ip capture list Show capture list s Table 59 Packet sniffing CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Second level command Description 4 of 4 Table 60 Platform configuration CLI commands Command Description show platform fans Display information on the fan tray unit show platform power Display the power supply configuration and parameters show platform mainboard D...

Page 95: ...rrent interface as the Primary Management Interface for the system show pmi Display the current Primary Management Interface Table 62 Access control list CLI commands Root level command First level command Second level command Description interface dialer serial loopback FastEthernet tunnel VLAN see IP interface configuration Enter the interface configuration mode for a Dialer Serial Loopback Fast...

Page 96: ...st Enter configuration mode for the specified policy access control list and create the list if it does not exist cookie Set the cookie for the current list ip fragments in Specify the action taken on incoming IP fragmentation packets for the current access control list ip option in Drop incoming packets that contain IP options Table 62 Access control list CLI commands continued Root level command...

Page 97: ...tion ip Apply the current rule to packets with the specified destination IP address dscp policy Apply the current rule to packets with the specified DSCP value fragment Apply the current rule for non initial fragments only icmp Apply the current rule to a specific type of ICMP packet ip protocol Apply the current rule to packets with the specified IP protocol Table 62 Access control list CLI comma...

Page 98: ...packets with the specified destination port tcp established Apply the current rule only to packets that are part of an established TCP session tcp source port Apply the current rule to TCP packets from ports with specified source port udp destination port Apply the rule to UDP packets with the specified destination port udp source port Apply the rule to UDP packets from the specified source port T...

Page 99: ...for the current list attributes of a specific rule show list Display the attributes of the current list including its rules ip policy list copy Copy an existing policy list to a new list show ip access control list Display the attributes of a specific access control list or of all access control lists Table 62 Access control list CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Second...

Page 100: ...ialer Serial Loopback FastEthernet Tunnel or VLAN interface ip qos group Activate a specific QoS list for a specific direction on the current interface ip simulate Test the action of a policy on a simulated packet show ip qos list Display the attributes of a specific QoS list or all QoS lists for the current interface ip policy list copy Copy an existing policy list to a new list ip qos list Enter...

Page 101: ... the current composite operation show composite operation Display the attributes of the current composite operation cookie Set the cookie for the current list dscp table Enter the DSCP table entry context for a particular DSCP value for the current QoS list composite operation Specify the composite operation to execute for packets with the specified DSCP value Table 63 QoS list CLI commands contin...

Page 102: ... not exist create it and enter its configuration mode composite operation Assign the specified composite operation to the current rule destination ip Apply the current rule to packets with the specified destination IP address dscp policy Apply the current rule to packets with the specified DSCP value fragment Apply the current rule for non initial fragments only Table 63 QoS list CLI commands cont...

Page 103: ...e Display the current list s DSCP table show ip rule Display the attributes of the current rule source ip Apply the current rule to packets from the specified source IP address tcp destination port Apply the current rule to TCP packets with the specified destination port tcp source port Apply the current rule to TCP packets from ports with specified source port Table 63 QoS list CLI commands conti...

Page 104: ...wner of the current list pre classification Specify which priority tag the current QoS list uses for data flows show composite operation Display all composite operations configured for the list show dscp table Display the current list s DSCP table show ip rule Display the rules configured for the current list attributes of a specific rule Table 63 QoS list CLI commands continued Root level command...

Page 105: ...command First level command Second level command Description interface dialer serial loopback FastEthernet tunnel VLAN see IP interface configuration Enter the interface configuration mode for a Dialer Serial Loopback FastEthernet Tunnel or VLAN interface ip pbr group Apply the specified PBR list to the current interface The PBR list is applied to ingress packets only ip next hop list Enter the co...

Page 106: ...es it and enters its configuration mode destination ip Specify the destination IP address of packets to which the current rule applies dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN Specify the DSCP value that is set by the current policy operation fragment Apply the current rule for non initial fragments only icmp Apply the current rule to a specific type of ICMP packet ip protocol Apply the curre...

Page 107: ...s with the specified destination port udp source port Apply the rule to UDP packets from the specified source port name Assign a name to the specified list or operation owner Specify the owner of the current list show ip rule Display the attributes of a specific rule or all rules show list Display information about the specified list show ip active lists Display information about a specific policy...

Page 108: ...w port classification Display port classification for a specified port or all ports Table 66 Port mirroring CLI commands Command Description clear port mirror Delete a port mirroring pair set port mirror Define a port mirroring source destination pair show port mirror Display mirroring information for a specified port or for all ports Table 67 Port redundancy CLI commands Command Description set p...

Page 109: ...splay port status on I O modules If no port is specified information for all ports is displayed Table 69 PPP encapsulation CLI commands Root level command First level command Description interface serial Enter Serial interface or sub interface configuration mode encapsulation Set the encapsulation mode for a Serial interface PPP or frame relay ip address Configure the IP address and subnet mask of...

Page 110: ...e encapsulation pppoe Change the encapsulation to PPPoE ip address Configure an IP address and subnet mask for the interface ip address negotiated Obtain an IP address via PPP IPCP negotiation keepalive track Bind interface status to an object tracker to check whether the interface is up mtu Set the interface s MTU to 1492 which ensures that overall packet size for the PPPoE interface does not exc...

Page 111: ...y Set the interval between PPPoE client dial attempts pppoe client persistent max attempts Limit the number of consecutive connection establishment retries pppoe client service name Set the PPPoE client service name pppoe client wait for ipcp Set the amount of time in seconds between establishment of the PPPoE tunnel and establishment of the IPCP tunnel If this time is exceeded the PPPoE client te...

Page 112: ... queue limit Set the size of any of the four priority queues in packets for a given interface or interface type voip queue Enable or disable custom queueing for VoIP traffic If you disable custom queueing WFVQ is re enabled voip queue delay Set the maximum query delay for which to estimate the high priority queue size necessary to meet the queuing delay show queueing Display the priority queue con...

Page 113: ...dius authentication server Clear the primary or secondary RADIUS server IP address set radius authentication Enable or disable RADIUS authentication set radius authentication retry number Set the number of times to resend an access request when there is no response set radius authentication retry time Set the time to wait before resending an access request set radius authentication secret Set the ...

Page 114: ...e gateway files from a USB mass storage device show restore status Display information regarding the status of a restore operation of gateway files from a USB mass storage device Table 77 RIP CLI commands Root level command First level command Description interface dialer FastEthernet loopback serial VLAN tunnel see IP interface configuration Enter the context of a Dialer FastEthernet Loopback Ser...

Page 115: ...default action for a specific RIP distribution access list ip distribution access list Create a RIP distribution access list ip distribution access list cookie Set the access list cookie ip distribution access list copy Copy the distribution access list ip distribution access list name Set the name of the distribution list ip distribution access list owner Set the owner of the distribution list ro...

Page 116: ...t level command First level command Description 3 of 3 Table 78 RMON monitoring CLI commands Command Description clear rmon statistics Clear RMON statistic rmon alarm Create or delete an RMON alarm entry rmon event Create or delete an RMON event entry rmon history Create or delete an RMON history entry show rmon alarm Display information about a specific RMON alarm entry or all existing RMON alarm...

Page 117: ... rip Enable RIP and enter the router configuration context redistribute RIP Redistribute routing information from other protocols into RIP default metric RIP Configure the metric to be used in updates that are redistributed from one routing protocol to another Table 80 Routing table CLI commands Command Description clear ip route Delete all the dynamic routing entries from the routing table ip def...

Page 118: ...lay all routes with configured object trackers traceroute Trace the route packets are taking to a particular IP address by displaying the hops along the path Table 80 Routing table CLI commands continued Command Description 2 of 2 Table 81 RTP statistics CLI commands Command Description set qos rsvp Set values for the RSVP parameters of the VoIP engines show qos rtcp Display QoS RSVP and RTCP para...

Page 119: ...or more QoS event counters exceeded their configured threshold rtp stat qos trap rate limit Configure the QoS trap rate limiter rtp stat service Enable the RTP statistics application rtp stat threshold Set thresholds for the RTP statistics applications show rtp stat config Display the RTP statistics application configuration show rtp stat detailed Display a detailed QoS log for a specific RTP sess...

Page 120: ... Description set sls Enable or disable SLS show sls Display SLS status enabled or disabled sls Enter the SLS context bri Administer an ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI port for SLS set bearer capability Set the Information Transfer Rate field of the Bearer Capability IE in SLS set country protocol Specify the ISDN Layer 3 country protocol type in SLS set directory number a Assign a directory number t...

Page 121: ...en the set interface command has been administered as peerMaster or peerSlave for the ISDN link in SLS set spid a Assign a Service Profile Identifier SPID to the B1 channel of the BRI link in SLS set spid b Assign a Service Profile Identifier SPID to the B2 channel of the BRI link in SLS set tei assignment Select the method by which the Layer 2 LAPD protocol obtains its Terminal Endpoint Identific...

Page 122: ...elete the administration for a given ISDN signaling group in SLS clear slot config Delete the slot and the board administration in the G450 for SLS clear station Delete a particular extension number in the SLS data set clear survivable config Set the SLS parameters to their default values clear trunk group Delete a trunk group entry from the SLS data set dial pattern Administering ARS dial pattern...

Page 123: ...en the set interface command has been administered as peerMaster or peerSlave for the ISDN link in SLS set spid a Assign a Service Profile Identifier SPID to the B1 channel of the BRI link in SLS set spid b Assign a Service Profile Identifier SPID to the B2 channel of the BRI link in SLS set tei assignment Select the method by which the Layer 2 LAPD protocol obtains its Terminal Endpoint Identific...

Page 124: ...elete the administration for a given ISDN signaling group in SLS clear slot config Delete the slot and the board administration in the G450 for SLS clear station Delete a particular extension number in the SLS data set clear survivable config Set the SLS parameters to their default values clear trunk group Delete a trunk group entry from the SLS data set dial pattern Administering ARS dial pattern...

Page 125: ...ld of the Bearer Capability IE in SLS set bit rate Set the maximum transmission rate for the DS1 facility in SLS set channel numbering Select the channel numbering method for B channels on an E1 interface in SLS set connect Specify the equipment at the far end of the DS1 link in SLS set country protocol Specify the ISDN Layer 3 country protocol type in SLS set interface Specify the glare handling ...

Page 126: ...terface incoming routing Administer digit treatment for incoming routed calls in SLS set delete digits Specify number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the dialed string for an inbound trunk call in SLS set insert digits incoming routing Specify number of digits to be inserted at the beginning of the dialed string for an inbound trunk call in SLS set length Specify the length of the di...

Page 127: ...450 set slot config Define the slot and the board type in the G450 for SLS show attendant Display the administered attendant provisioning show bri List the administered BRI parameters for SLS show date format Display the current date format for the SLS data set show dial pattern List all dial pattern strings in the SLS data set show ds1 List the administered DS1 parameters for SLS show extension D...

Page 128: ...t config Define the slot and the board administration in the G450 for SLS show station Display extension specific SLS data parameters show trunk group Display trunk group administration in SLS sig group Administer signaling groups for SLS add nfas interface Identify a list of DS1 modules that are controlled by the primary D channel in SLS remove nfas interface Remove a member from a NFAS managed D...

Page 129: ...on in SLS set password Administer a station password in SLS for DCP and IP station sets set port Administer the port on a station for SLS set swhook flash Enable SLS to recognize the switchhook flash signal from a particular analog station and to provide a subsequent transfer service set trunk destination Administer a station extension to be included in a pool of stations that can receive incoming...

Page 130: ...specified as part of the scocs service declared in the Network Services Facility information element set channel preference Define how the Channel Identification IE field is encoded in SLS set codeset display Specify which Q 931 codesets are allowed to send display information to the user phone in SLS set codeset national Specify which Q 931 codesets are allowed to send National Information Elemen...

Page 131: ...isconnect sequence CONNECT message followed by a DISCONNECT message in SLS set name Identify the user name for a trunk group in SLS set numbering format Specify the numbering plan for this trunk in SLS set send name Define whether or not the calling connected called or busy party s administered name is sent to the network on outgoing or incoming calls in SLS set send number Define whether or not t...

Page 132: ...ble or disable the SNMP agent for the G450 set snmp community Create or modify an SNMPv1 community set snmp retries Set the number of times to attempt to communicate with a particular node set snmp timeout Specify the time to wait for a response before retrying the communication show snmp Display SNMP configuration information including a list of SNMP notification receivers show snmp engineID Disp...

Page 133: ...user does not exist it is created snmp server view Configure settings for an SNMP MIB view If the view does not exist it is created Table 86 SNMP access configuration CLI commands continued Root level command Description 2 of 2 Table 87 SNMP trap configuration CLI commands Root level command First level command Description set port trap Enable or disable SNMP Link Up and Link Down traps notificati...

Page 134: ...otification types snmp server informs Configure the SNMPv3 timeout and retries for notifications Table 87 SNMP trap configuration CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 of 2 Table 88 Spanning tree CLI commands Command Description set port edge admin state Assign or unassign RSTP edge port admin state to a port for Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP treatment set...

Page 135: ...e priority for the spanning tree set spantree tx hold count Set the value in packets used by the spanning tree in order to limit the maximum number of BPDU s transmitted during a hello time period set spantree version Set the version of the spanning tree protocol used by the device show port edge state Display the edge state of a specified port show port point to point status Display the point to ...

Page 136: ...I commands Command Description clear sync interface Disassociate an interface previously specified as the primary or secondary clock synchronization source set sync interface Define the specified module and port as a potential source for clock synchronization for the media gateway set sync source Specify which clock source is the active clock source The identity of the current synchronization sour...

Page 137: ...okies defense mechanism against SYN attacks Table 92 Syslog file CLI commands Command Description copy syslog file ftp Copy the Syslog file to a remote server using FTP copy syslog file scp Copy the Syslog file to a remote server using SCP copy syslog file tftp Copy the Syslog file to a remote server using TFTP copy syslog file usb Upload the Syslog file from the gateway to the USB mass storage de...

Page 138: ...94 Telnet access configuration CLI commands Command Description ip telnet Enable the G450 to establish an incoming telnet connection or disable its ability to establish an incoming telnet connection ip telnet client Enable the G450 to establish an outgoing telnet connection or disable its ability to establish an outgoing telnet connection ip telnet services Enable the Telnet server on the Services...

Page 139: ...and Description interface serial Enter Serial interface or sub interface configuration mode frame relay traffic shaping Turn on or turn off traffic shaping and frame relay fragmentation map class frame relay Create a QoS template which can later be assigned to DLCIs bc out Configure the committed burst size in bits for the outbound direction be out Configure the excess burst size in bits for the o...

Page 140: ...ffic on the current interface Table 96 Traffic shaping CLI commands continued Root level command First level command Description 2 of 2 Table 97 USB mass storage CLI commands Command Description backup config usb Back up the gateway configuration to a USB mass storage device dir Display information regarding the status of a restore operation of gateway files from a USB mass storage device erase us...

Page 141: ...n show username Display local user accounts username Add a local user account Table 99 USP port configuration CLI commands Root level command First level command Description interface serial Enter Serial interface or sub interface configuration mode bandwidth Set the bandwidth parameter manually for this interface idle character Set the bit pattern used to indicate an idle line ignore dcd Specify ...

Page 142: ...nd Description clear ip tcp header compression Clear TCP header compression statistics for all enabled interfaces or for a specific interface interface dialer serial see IP interface configuration Enter the context of the Dialer or Serial interface ip tcp compression connect ions Set the total number of TCP header compression connections supported on the current interface ip tcp header compression...

Page 143: ...figuration mode or delete a VLAN interface icc vlan Set the current VLAN as the ICC VLAN set port static vlan Assign a static VLAN to a port set port vlan Set the port VLAN ID PVID set port vlan binding mode Define the binding method used by ports set trunk Configure the VLAN tagging mode of a port set vlan Create or modify a VLAN show cam vlan Display all MAC entries in the CAM table for a specif...

Page 144: ...and DSP cores parameters status and occupancy show voip parameters Display information about the VoIP engine Table 103 VoIP testing CLI commands Command Description busyout voip dsp Put the VoIP engine in busyout not available state This is recommended before starting a Bit Transfer Rate BTR test release voip dsp Release the VoIP entity from a busyout not available state This command also ends a r...

Page 145: ...ransparency udp encapsulation Re enable NAT Traversal if it was disabled crypto ipsec transform set Enter the IKE phase 2 IPSec transform set context and create or edit IPSec parameters for the VPN tunnel mode Set security association lifetime set pfs Specify whether each IKE phase 2 negotiation will employ PFS and if yes which Diffie Hellman group to employ set security association lifetime Set t...

Page 146: ...e is no traffic description ISAKMP peer Enter a description for the ISAKMP peer initiate mode Specify which IKE Phase 1 mode to use when communicating with the peer aggressive or none isakmp policy Set the ISAKMP policy for the ISAKMP peer keepalive VPN Enable DPD keepalives that check whether the remote peer is up keepalive track Bind an object tracker to a remote VPN peer or to an interface to c...

Page 147: ...KMP peer group set peer peer group Add a peer to the peer group crypto isakmp policy Enter the crypto ISAKMP policy context and create or edit IKE Phase 1 parameters authentication Set the authentication of ISAKMP policy pre shared secret description ISAKMP policy Enter a description for the ISAKMP policy encryption Set the encryption algorithm for an ISAKMP policy group Set the Diffie Hellman gro...

Page 148: ...running even if there is no traffic description crypto map Enter a description for the crypto map set dscp Set the DSCP value in the tunneled packet set peer crypto map Attach a peer to a crypto map set peer group Attach a peer group to a crypto map set transform set Configure the transform set interface FastEthernet dialer serial VLAN see IP interface configuration Enter the context of the FastEt...

Page 149: ... specific rule description ip rule Enter a description for the ip rule in the ip crypto list destination ip Specify the destination IP address of packets to which the current rule applies protect crypto map Protect traffic that matches this rule by applying the IPSec processing configured by the specific crypto map source ip Indicate that the current rule applies to packets from the specified sour...

Page 150: ...w crypto isakmp peer group Display crypto ISAKMP peer group configuration show crypto isakmp policy Display ISAKMP policy configuration show crypto isakmp sa Display the ISAKMP SA database status show crypto map Display all or specific crypto map configurations show ip active lists Display information about a specific policy list or all lists show ip crypto list Display all or specific crypto list...

Page 151: ... ip vrrp override addr owner Accept packets addressed to the IP addresses associated with the virtual router such as ICMP SNMP and telnet if it is not the IP address owner ip vrrp preempt Configure a router to preempt a lower priority master for the virtual router ID ip vrrp primary Set the primary address used as the source address of VRRP packets for the virtual router ID ip vrrp priority Set th...

Page 152: ...Display a summary table of frame relay sub interfaces and DLCIs associated with the sub interfaces show frame relay pvc Display detailed PVC information show frame relay traffic Display frame relay protocol statistics including ARP requests and replies sent and received over frame relay interfaces show interfaces Display interface configuration and statistics for a particular interface or all inte...

Page 153: ...ialer see IP interface configuration Enter interface configuration mode for either a Serial FastEthernet or Dialer interface fair queue limit Set the maximum number of packets that can be queued in the weighted fair queue fair voip queue Enable Weighted Fair VoIP Queuing WFVQ on the current interface priority queue Enable or disable priority queuing mode in a Serial or FastEthernet interface If yo...

Page 154: ...Roadmap 154 Avaya G450 CLI Reference ...

Page 155: ...dia Gateway arranged alphabetically within topics Logging in to the CLI To login to the CLI you need a username and a password Initially there is only one user named root with password root on the system It is recommended to change the root user password to prevent unauthorized entry into the system The root user has Administrative privileges You can add more users with the username command When y...

Page 156: ...pe the first few letters of the command and then press the tab key The system completes the command automatically If more than one command begins with those letters pressing the tab key twice displays a list of commands matching those letters Pressing the tab key twice automatically populates the next part of the command when only one option is available Abbreviating commands You can abbreviate co...

Page 157: ...ouncement2 wav from the announcements directory to a remote FTP server with IP address 192 168 49 10 place it in the C drive and name it remote_announcement2 wav G450 001 super copy announcement file ftp local_announcement2 wav 192 168 49 10 c remote_announcement2 wav Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The name of the announcement file in the G450 announcement dire...

Page 158: ...nouncement directory to a remote SCP server using SCP The files can then be downloaded from the SCP server to Avaya Voice Announcements Manager VAM Syntax copy announcement file scp source filename ip destination filename Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The file name of the announcement file in the G450 announceme...

Page 159: ... announcement file erase announcement file rename announcement file show announcements files show download announcement file status show upload announcement file status copy announcement file usb Use the copy announcement file usb command to upload an announcement file from the gateway to the USB mass storage device Syntax copy announcement file usb source filename destination usb device destinati...

Page 160: ...er to the gateway s announcement directory The FTP command prompts for the username and password after the command is entered Syntax copy ftp announcement filename ip destination filename Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To download announcement_file2 wav from the FTP server at IP address 192 168 49 10 and save it in the gateway s announcement directory as local_announcemen...

Page 161: ...an announcement file from the Voice Announcements Manager to the G450 announcement directory using SCP A maximum of 256 announcement files can be stored in the announcement directory Syntax copy scp announcement file source filename ip destination filename Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The filename of the announ...

Page 162: ...announcement file rename announcement file show announcements files show download announcement file status show upload announcement file status copy usb announcement file Use the copy usb announcement file command to download an announcement file from the external USB mass storage device to the gateway Syntax copy usb announcement file source usb device source filename destination filename Paramet...

Page 163: ...afe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb erase announcement file Use the erase announcement file command to erase an announcement file in the G450 announcement directory Syntax erase announcement file source filename Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To erase the announcement file local_announcement1 wav from the G450 announcement directory G450 001 er...

Page 164: ...ination filename Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To change the name of the announcement file from from_local_announcement1 wav to to_local_announcement1 wav G450 001 rename announcement file from_local_announcement1 wav to_local_announcement1 wav Related Commands copy announcement file scp copy announcement file usb copy ftp announcement file copy scp announcement file cop...

Page 165: ...ouncements files command to display the announcements files stored in the G450 announcement directory Syntax show announcements files brief Parameters User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value brief Keyword indicating to display less detail ...

Page 166: ...RVER SCP CLIENT ID File 5 46xxupgrade scr 8 4601dbte1_82 bin 9 4602dbte1_82 bin Nv Ram Total bytes used 28000 Total bytes free 7344800 Total bytes capacity fixed 7372800 Related Commands copy announcement file scp copy announcement file usb copy ftp announcement file copy scp announcement file copy usb announcement file erase announcement file rename announcement file show download announcement fi...

Page 167: ...le hellodestination wav Host 135 64 102 64 Running state Idle Failure display null Last warning No warning Bytes Downloaded 7825 Related Commands copy announcement file scp copy announcement file usb copy ftp announcement file copy scp announcement file copy usb announcement file erase announcement file rename announcement file show announcements files show upload announcement file status show upl...

Page 168: ...ut the upload fails G450 001 super show upload announcement file status Module 9 Module 9 Source file hellosource wav Destination file d hellodestination wav Host 135 64 102 64 Running state Idle Failure display SCP Permission denied Last warning No warning In this example no upload command has been issued G450 001 super show upload announcement file status Module 9 No source file for upload opera...

Page 169: ...User Level read write Context general Example To add a permanent entry for station 192 168 7 8 to the ARP cache G450 001 super arp 192 168 7 8 00 40 0d 8c 2a 01 To remove an entry from the ARP cache for the station 192 168 13 76 G450 001 super no arp 192 168 13 76 Related Commands arp timeout clear arp cache ip max arp entries ip proxy arp show ip arp show ip reverse arp Parameter Description Poss...

Page 170: ...store the default value four hours Syntax arp timeout seconds no arp timeout Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the ARP timeout to one hour G450 001 super arp timeout 3600 To restore the default value for ARP timeout G450 001 super no arp timeout Related Commands arp clear arp cache ip max arp entries ip proxy arp show ip arp show ip reverse arp Parameter Description P...

Page 171: ...ies for an interface named FastEthernet 10 2 G450 001 super clear arp cache fastethernet 10 2 Flushing ARP cache entries on ifName fastethernet 10 2 Flushed 1 ARP entries To flush ARP entries for one host address G450 001 super clear arp cache 156 16 11 32 Flushing ARP cache entry of host 156 16 11 32 Flushed 0 ARP entries Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface The interface...

Page 172: ... no form of this command to restore the default value In order for this command to take effect you must copy the running configuration to the startup configuration and reset the device Syntax ip max arp entries value no ip max arp entries Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the maximum number of ARP cache entries to 8000 G450 001 super ip max arp entries 8000 Parameter ...

Page 173: ...001 super show ip arp To display one host ARP mapping G450 001 super show ip arp 192 168 49 1 To display a range of ARP mappings G450 001 super show ip arp 192 168 49 1 255 255 255 0 To display ARP mappings for the VLAN 1 interface G450 001 super show ip arp Vlan 1 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface The interface name in quotes string 1 32 chars ip_interface The IP inter...

Page 174: ...Related Commands arp arp timeout clear arp cache ip max arp entries ip proxy arp show ip reverse arp show ip reverse arp Use the show ip reverse arp command to display the IP address of a host based on a known MAC address Syntax show ip reverse arp mac_addr match_len Parameters User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mac_addr The MAC address match_l...

Page 175: ...ip proxy arp show ip arp ASG authentication copy auth file ftp Use the copy auth file ftp command to copy the authentication file to a remote server using FTP Syntax copy auth file ftp filename ip Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To copy the authorization file auth pass to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy auth file ftp auth pass 192 168 49 10 Parameter ...

Page 176: ...sing SCP Syntax copy auth file scp filename ip Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To copy the authorization file auth pass to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy auth file scp auth pass 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy auth file ftp copy auth file tftp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase au...

Page 177: ...ss 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication response time login authentication services login ppp authentication show auth file info show download auth file status show...

Page 178: ... copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication response time login authentication services login ppp authentication show auth file info show download auth file status show login authentication show upload auth file status Related Commands backup config usb copy...

Page 179: ...to continue Y N y Username anonymous Password Beginning download operation This operation may take up to 20 seconds Please refrain from any other operation during this time Related Commands copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy auth file tftp copy auth file usb copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local cra...

Page 180: ...ssword Beginning download operation This operation may take up to 20 seconds Please refrain from any other operation during this time Related Commands copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy auth file tftp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication respon...

Page 181: ...d Beginning download operation This operation may take up to 20 seconds Please refrain from any other operation during this time Related Commands copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy auth file tftp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication response tim...

Page 182: ...restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Related Commands ASG authentication copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy auth file tftp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication response time login authentication services ...

Page 183: ... make sure that the authentication file label on the gateway chassis is also replaced Syntax erase auth file source filename Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To erase the ASG authentication file auth_file g450 lac G450 001 erase auth_file g450 lac Related Commands copy announcement file scp copy announcement file usb copy ftp announcement file copy scp announcement file copy usb...

Page 184: ... lockout command to set a policy for locking out access to device administration service policy after successive failed login attempts Use the no login authentication lockout command to return the lockout time and lockout attempt threshold to their default values Note Note As soon as you use the login authentication lockout command the new lockout settings immediately override previous settings fo...

Page 185: ... login authentication local craft password command to enable Avaya Services login local craft authentication using a password default Use the no form of this command to disable Avaya Services login local craft authentication using a password Syntax no login authentication local craft password User Level admin Context general Example To disable Avaya Services login local craft authentication using ...

Page 186: ...esponse time interval between the user name prompt and the user name entry The response time interval between the challenge prompt and the challenge response Note Note The authentication response timeout is ignored by the gateway for the Console interface Syntax no login authentication response time time Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To timeout a connection if no response arr...

Page 187: ...he command to disable all Avaya Services logins including local craft password based authentication Note Note By default Avaya Services login access is enabled as soon as the Authentication File is downloaded to the gateway Syntax no login authentication services login User Level admin Context general Example To enable Avaya Services login G450 001 super login authentication services login Related...

Page 188: ... Level read write Context Interface Console USB modem Example To select the CHAP authentication protocol G450 001 if CON ppp authentication chap Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value pap Keyword indicating the Password Authentication Protocol An unencrypted password is sent for authentication This is the default chap Keyword indicating the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol ...

Page 189: ...t interface usb modem async modem init string async reset modem USB port ip peer address ppp chap secret shutdown USB modem timeout absolute Related Commands Modem configuration Console port interface console async mode interactive async mode terminal async modem init string async reset modem Console port ip peer address ppp chap secret shutdown interface speed PPP timeout absolute show auth file ...

Page 190: ...to the device Syntax show download auth file status User Level read only Context general Example To display the status of the download process of the authentication file to the device G450 001 super show download auth file status Module 10 Module 10 Source file AF 7000003277 060926 211040 xml Destination file auth file Host 149 49 71 50 Running state Idle Failure display null Last warning No warni...

Page 191: ...onse time 120 seconds CLI logout timeout Off Related Commands copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy auth file tftp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication response time login authentication services login ppp authentication show au...

Page 192: ...e 10 Module 10 Source file auth file Destination file d zion run cfg Host 135 64 102 39 Running state Idle Failure display SCP Permission denied Last warning No warning In this example no upload command has been issued G450 001 super show upload auth file status Module 10 No source file for upload operation no upload operation was done Related Commands copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy au...

Page 193: ...sic password Note Note For security reasons you should change the root password immediately Syntax username name password passwd asg secret secret access type access_type no username name Parameters User Level admin Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value name New user name or dadmin minimum four character string passwd User s password minimum eight character string sec...

Page 194: ...1 super username root password verysecret access type read write ERROR User account root has always an administrator access type Note Note If you wish to define a username which includes spaces you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks for example new york Related Commands login authentication lockout show username Auxiliary files set web aux files url Use the set web aux files url comma...

Page 195: ...ands show web aux files url show web aux files url Use the show web aux files url command to display the URL of the Web server containing online help files and the Java plug in Syntax show web aux files url User Level read only Context general Example To display the URL of the Web server G450 001 super show web aux files url the web aux files url is http 176 2 3 66 DMweb Related Commands set web a...

Page 196: ...xample To back up the gateway configuration in the form of file gatewaybackup1 to usb device0 G450 001 super backup config usb usb device0 gatewaybackup1 Related Commands copy announcement file usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value usb device The destination USB mass ...

Page 197: ...s User Level read only Context general Example To display information regarding the status of a backup G450 001 super show backup status Backup operation in progress Do not remove usb mass storage device until the end of operation Files backup Type FileName Status Startup config startup config cfg OK Related Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb copy usb announcement file erase usb...

Page 198: ...PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Example To switch over immediately to the backup interface in case of failure and pause 60 seconds before reverting to the primary interface G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 backup delay 0 60 Related Commands backup interface Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value failure_delay The delay...

Page 199: ...2 L3 Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Loopback Example To specify that Serial interface 3 1 1 is a backup interface for the current interface G450 001 if Serial 3 1 2 backup interface Serial 3 1 1 Related Commands backup delay Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_type The type of int...

Page 200: ...FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 L3 Related Commands interface fastethernet interface serial interface vlan ip netbios rebroadcast ip netbios rebroadcast Use the ip netbios rebroadcast command to enable the forwarding of NETBIOS packets on an interface If no value is provided for direction the both option...

Page 201: ...ved by and sent from the FastEthernet interface G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 ip netbios rebroadcast both Related Commands interface fastethernet interface serial interface vlan ip directed broadcast Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value direction The NETBIOS rebroadcasts mode both NETBIOS packets received on the interface are rebroadcast to other interfaces and NETBIOS packets recei...

Page 202: ...xt general Example To clear the CAM table G450 001 super clear cam CAM table cleared Related Commands show cam show cam mac show cam Use the show cam command to display the CAM table entries for a specific module and port If no module or port is specified the system displays all CAM table entries Note Note MACs associated with LAGs appear under the LAG ID not under the LAG port Syntax show cam mod...

Page 203: ...ts 08 00 20 c6 98 5f 1 3 33 08 00 20 c4 c8 51 1 3 33 00 00 5e 00 01 02 1 3 33 00 01 02 de 96 2f 1 3 33 00 02 2d 47 18 67 1 3 33 00 02 2d 48 18 29 1 3 33 00 04 0d 01 b0 00 1 3 33 Related Commands clear cam show cam mac show cam mac Use the show cam mac command to display a specific mac entry in the CAM table Syntax show cam mac mac_addressic Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value modul...

Page 204: ...ed Commands clear cam show cam CDR file copy cdr file ftp Use the copy cdr file ftp command to copy a Call Detail Recording CDR file to a remote server using FTP Syntax copy cdr file ftp filename ip Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mac_address The MAC entry to display Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value filename File name with full path string ip IP ad...

Page 205: ...upload cdr file status copy cdr file scp Use the copy cdr file scp command to copy a Call Detail Recording CDR file to a remote server using SCP Syntax copy cdr file scp filename ip Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To copy the authorization file cdr1 to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy cdr file scp cdr1 192 168 49 10 Parameter Description Possible Value...

Page 206: ...er using TFTP Syntax copy cdr file tftp filename ip Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To copy the authorization file cdr1 to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy cdr file tftp cdr1 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy cdr file ftp copy cdr file scp copy announcement file usb show upload cdr file status Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value filen...

Page 207: ... general Example To upload cdr1 from the gateway to usb device0 G450 001 super copy cdr file usb cdr1 usb device0 Related Commands backup config usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The logical name for the source file destination usb device The desti...

Page 208: ... status Module 10 Module 10 Source file cdr file Destination file 444 Host 135 64 102 114 Running state Idle Failure display null Last warning No warning In this example an upload command has been issued but the upload fails G450 001 super Show upload cdr file status Module 10 Module 10 Source file cdr file Destination file d zion run cfg Host 135 64 102 39 Running state Idle Failure display SCP P...

Page 209: ...t command to exit the current context If you are in the root context the exit command logs you out of the system Syntax exit User Level read only Context all Example To exit the rule 22 configuration context and then the access control list 330 context G450 001 ACL 330 ip rule 22 exit G450 001 ACL 330 exit G450 001 super Related Commands reset set logout show logout ...

Page 210: ... being saved Note Note If a reset command is issued while a backup or restore operation is in progress a query displays inquiring whether you wish to reset If the gateway is reset while a backup or restore operation is in progress the backup restore operation fails Syntax reset module module_number voip chassis Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To reset the VoIP engine G450 ...

Page 211: ...u performed was successful Syntax retstatus User Level read only Context general Example To display the status of the most recently executed command G450 001 super retstatus Succeeded G450 001 super retstatus Failed set logout Use the set logout command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle session Syntax set logout timeout ...

Page 212: ...ds exit reset show logout show logout Use the show logout command to display the amount of time in minutes the terminal remains idle before timing out If the logout value is 0 there is no timeout limit The default logout value is 15 minutes Syntax show logout User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value timeout Number of minutes until the system automati...

Page 213: ...mode where additional tech related commands are available Note Note This command is reserved for service personnel use only Syntax tech User Level tech Context general Example To enter tech mode G450 001 super tech Password G450 001 tech tree Use the tree command to display the commands that are available at your current location in the CLI hierarchy All commands are listed alphabetically Syntax t...

Page 214: ...ine banner post login banner post login line type q to quit or space key to continue CNA test plugs cna testplug The G450 features one CNA test plug which has its own CNA configuration context Use the cna testplug command to enter the CNA test plug configuration context Syntax cna testplug 1 User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value depth The level of depth at which...

Page 215: ... cna testplug shutdown CNA test plugs test rate limit clear counters CNA test plugs Use the clear counters command to clear the CNA test plug counters Syntax clear counters User Level read write Context cna testplug Example To clear CNA test plug counters on testplug 1 G450 001 cna testplug 1 clear counters Related Commands cna testplug cna testplug service control port rtp echo port rtp test port...

Page 216: ...843 G450 001 cna testplug 1 control port 12843 Related Commands clear counters CNA test plugs cna testplug cna testplug service rtp echo port rtp test port scheduler show cna testplug shutdown CNA test plugs test rate limit rtp echo port Use the rtp echo port command to set the UDP port used by the CNA test plug to listen for RTP streams send by other test plugs running RTP tests Use the no form o...

Page 217: ...test rate limit rtp test port Use the rtp test port command to set the UDP port used by the CNA test plug to send an RTP stream to another test plug in an RTP test Use the no form of the command to return to the default UDP port for RTP tests Syntax rtp test port port no rtp test port Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value port The UDP port number to be used as the RTP echo...

Page 218: ...est plug attempts to register with the scheduler highest on the list and moves along the list if necessary until registration is successful You can specify the TCP registration port the port used by the test plug to request registration and send registration parameters to a scheduler By default the TCP registration port is 8888 Use the no form of the command to clear one of the scheduler addresses...

Page 219: ...ort rtp test port show cna testplug shutdown CNA test plugs test rate limit shutdown CNA test plugs Use the shutdown command to disable the CNA test plug Use the no form of the command to enable the CNA test plug By default the test plug is enabled Syntax no shutdown User Level read write Context cna testplug Example To enable the test plug G450 001 cna testplug 1 no shutdown Related Commands clea...

Page 220: ...rate limit maxTests interval Parameters User Level read write Context cna testplug Example To set the CNA test rate limit to 70 tests every 20 seconds G450 001 cna testplug 1 test rate limit 70 20 Related Commands clear counters CNA test plugs cna testplug cna testplug service control port rtp echo port rtp test port scheduler show cna testplug shutdown CNA test plugs Parameter Description Possibl...

Page 221: ...lug context to disable enable the test plug itself Syntax cna testplug service User Level admin Context general Example To enable the CNA test plug service G450 001 cna testplug service The Converged Network Analyzer test plug is enabled Related Commands clear counters CNA test plugs cna testplug control port rtp echo port rtp test port scheduler show cna testplug shutdown CNA test plugs test rate...

Page 222: ... Control 8889 RTP test 8888 RTP echo 8887 Test rate limiter Maximum 60 tests in 10 seconds Last Test rtp to 149 49 54 114 scheduler 135 64 102 76 50002 Result RTP echo started Test Count Failed Cancelled traceroute 1 0 0 rtp 66 0 0 ping 0 0 0 tcpconnect 0 0 0 merge 0 0 0 Output fields Name Description test plug 1 is The status of the test plug service Possible values are up The test plug is up dow...

Page 223: ...nterface test plug configuration error scheduler list empty The scheduler list is empty and therefore the test plug is disabled test plug control port binding error The test plug cannot bind the UDP control port test plug RTP port binding error The test plug cannot bind the RTP test UDP port Address The IP address of the test plug interface bind to PMI States that the PMI is the test plug s IP add...

Page 224: ...ce the test plug was up traceRoute The current last test performed is was a traceroute test rtp The current last test performed is was an RTP test ping The current last test performed is was a ping test tcpConnect The current last test performed is was a TCPConnect test merge The current last test performed is was a merge test Result The results of the last test run Test The types of tests Count T...

Page 225: ...onfiguration is not active until you reset the device Syntax copy ftp startup config filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To download the configuration file G450 img from the FTP server at IP address 135 64 10 33 using login dan G450 001 super copy ftp startup config G450 img 135 64 10 33 Username dan Password G450 001 super reset Parameter Description Possible Valu...

Page 226: ...e on an FTP server The command prompts for the username and password Uncommitted changes to the configuration are included Note Note After you change the configuration run the copy running config startup config command to save the changes If you do not save the changes the device loses the changes when you reset it Syntax copy running config ftp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context...

Page 227: ...iguration using the SCP secure protocol The command prompts for the username and password Uncommitted changes to the configuration are included Note Note After you change the configuration run the copy running config startup config command to save the changes If you do not save the changes the device loses the changes when you reset it Syntax copy running config scp filename ip Parameters User Lev...

Page 228: ...guration including Standard Local Survivability SLS data to NVRAM When a gateway powers up SLS is disabled by default However if the gateway resets because of a CLI command a software timeout etc and the copy running config startup config command has not been issued prior to the reset any administrative changes made are lost This command is equivalent to save translation in the Communication Manag...

Page 229: ...ntax copy running config tftp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload the current configuration to G450 cfg on the TFTP server at IP address 135 64 10 33 G450 001 super copy running config tftp G450 cfg 135 64 10 33 Related Commands copy ftp startup config copy running config ftp copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy startup config f...

Page 230: ...guration run the copy running config startup config command to save the changes If you do not save the changes the device loses the changes when you reset it Syntax copy scp startup config filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To download router1 cfg from the SCP server at IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy scp startup config c config_files router1 cfg 192 ...

Page 231: ...ame ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload the current configuration to G450 cfg on the FTP server at IP address 135 64 10 33 G450 001 super copy startup config ftp G450 cfg 135 64 10 33 Related Commands copy ftp startup config copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy running config tftp copy startup config scp copy startup config tftp copy tft...

Page 232: ...rs User Level read write Context general Example To upload the current configuration to router1 cfg on the SCP server at IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy startup config scp c config_files router1 cfg 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy ftp startup config copy running config ftp copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy running config tftp copy startup config ftp c...

Page 233: ...Syntax copy startup config tftp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload the current configuration to G450 cfg on the TFTP server at IP address 135 64 10 33 G450 001 super copy startup config tftp G450 cfg 135 64 10 33 Related Commands copy ftp startup config copy running config ftp copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy running config...

Page 234: ...ntext general Examples To upload startup_config cfg from the gateway to usb device0 G450 001 super copy startup config usb startup_config cfg usb device0 Related Commands backup config usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The logical name for the sour...

Page 235: ...mple To copy the configuration file router1 cfg from the TFTP server 192 168 49 10 into the startup configuration G450 001 super copy tftp startup config c G450 router1 cfg 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy ftp startup config copy running config ftp copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy running config tftp copy startup config ftp copy startup config scp copy startup con...

Page 236: ...r copy usb startup config usb device0 temp startup_config cfg Related Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb erase startup config Use the erase startup config command to reset the NVRAM parameters to the factory default values This command is an alias for the command nvram initialize on page 237 S...

Page 237: ...running config show startup config nvram initialize Use the nvram initialize command to reset the NVRAM parameters to the factory default values This command is an alias for erase startup config refer to erase startup config on page 236 CAUTION CAUTION This command erases all announcement files in the G450 announcement directory Syntax nvram initialize User Level read write Context general Example...

Page 238: ...atus show logging file condition show running config show startup config Related Commands USP configuration bandwidth idle character ignore dcd interface serial invert txclock transmitter delay show copy status Use the show copy status command to display the status of the copy running config startup config operation Syntax show copy status User Level read write Context general Example To display t...

Page 239: ...s as the file is being loaded into the device Syntax show download status module_number Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display the status of a configuration file download for module 10 G450 001 super show download status 10 Related Commands copy ftp startup config copy running config ftp copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy running config tftp...

Page 240: ...ig ftp copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy running config tftp copy startup config ftp copy startup config scp copy startup config tftp copy tftp startup config erase startup config nvram initialize show copy status show download status show logging file condition show running config show startup config show running config Use the show running config command to display ...

Page 241: ...y ftp startup config copy running config ftp copy running config scp copy running config startup config copy running config tftp copy startup config ftp copy startup config scp copy startup config tftp copy tftp startup config erase startup config nvram initialize show copy status show download status show erase status show logging file condition show startup config show startup config Use the sho...

Page 242: ...running config tftp copy startup config ftp copy startup config scp copy startup config tftp copy tftp startup config erase startup config nvram initialize show copy status show download status show erase status show logging file condition show running config show upload status Use the show upload status command to display status information regarding the upload of a capture file or a configuratio...

Page 243: ...r show ip capture list Connectivity ping Use the ping command to send ICMP packets to a target system The ping command is useful for checking host reachability and network connectivity Syntax ping host interval size timeout source_address Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host The IP address of the target system interval The number of seconds between successive ICMP pa...

Page 244: ...et contact closure admin command to specify how the contact closure relay is controlled Note Note The set contact closure pulse duration command does not affect the set contact closure admin manual command Syntax set contact closure admin module port relay mgc manual trigger manual off Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Module number of the contact closure port 1...

Page 245: ...e duration for a contact closure relay Pulse duration is the amount of time for the relay to return to normal after the call controller triggers it Syntax set contact closure pulse duration module port relay time Parameters manual trigger Contact closure relay is triggered manual off Contact closure relay is not triggered Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value Parameter Description Po...

Page 246: ...act closure admin show contact closure show contact closure Use the show contact closure command to view the status of a contact closure relay If no relay is specified the status of all relays is displayed Syntax show contact closure module port relay Parameters User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Contact closure module to display 10 port...

Page 247: ...ontact closure 10 1 1 MODULE PORT RELAY ADMIN PULSE DURATION STATUS 10 2 1 mgc 3 secs off Related Commands Contact closure set contact closure admin set contact closure pulse duration Related Commands Policy cookie ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show isdn bri link show list Counters clear counters interface Use the clear counters command...

Page 248: ...User Level read only Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_ type The type of interface interface_ identifier The interface number The format varies depending on the value of interface_type For FastEthernet module port For Serial module port channel group For Vlan Vlan id For LoopBack Loopback number For FastEthernet 10 2 or 10 4 For Serial USP 3 1 4 1 8 1 For Serial DS1 mod...

Page 249: ...layed Syntax show ip traffic protocol_type Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display traffic information for all protocols G450 001 super show ip traffic IP statistics Received 5644 total 4012 local destination 0 bad hop count 0 packet header errors 0 unknown protocol 0 address errors 1632 discarded Fragments Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value protocol_typ...

Page 250: ...0 mask requests 0 mask replies 0 redirects Sent 0 total 0 ICMP errors 0 unreachables 0 time exceeded 0 parameter 0 quench 0 echo 0 echo reply 0 timestamps request 0 timestamp reply 0 mask requests 0 mask replies 0 redirects OSPF statistics Received 0 total 0 checksum errors 0 hello 0 database desc 0 link state req 0 link state updates 0 link state acks Sent 0 total ARP statistics Received 5394 req...

Page 251: ...module Syntax show csu loopbacks mmID Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To view the state of loopbacks on module 2 G450 001 super show csu loopbacks v2 CSU LOOPBACK STATUS Towards DTE Port Digital Diagnostics OFF Towards Network Payload OFF Line OFF Related Commands show csu status Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mmID The Media Module ID ...

Page 252: ...eneral Example To display the status of the CSU on module 4 G450 001 super show csu status v4 TI version of csu status CSU NETWORK INTERFACE STATUS LOS ON 00F OFF EER OFF L00PD OFF AIS OFF PDV OFF LOF OFF YEL ON E1 version of csu status CSU NETWORK INTERFACE STATUS LOS ON 00F OFF EER OFF L00PD OFF AIS OFF PDV OFF LOF OFF LMA OFF RMA OFF LCM ON Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mm...

Page 253: ... registered to a call controller the call controller overwrites the date set manually by this command Syntax set date mm dd yyyy Name Description LOS Loss of signal OOF Out of frame EER Excessive error rate LOOPD Looped AIS Alarm indication signal PDV Pulse density violation same as BPV LOF Loss of frame LMA Local multiframe alignment YEL Yellow RMA Remote multiframe alignment LCM Loss of CRC mult...

Page 254: ...time show system set time Use the set time command to set the current time Note Note If the gateway is registered to a call controller the call controller overwrites the time set manually by this command Syntax set time HH MM SS Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mm A two digit number denoting the month 01 12 dd A two digit number denoting the day 01 31 yyyy A four digit number de...

Page 255: ... Use the ip default gateway command to define a default gateway router Use the no form of this command to remove the default gateway Syntax ip default gateway ip_address interface_type interface_number cost preference permanent track track index no ip default gateway Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value HH A two digit number denoting the hour 00 23 MM A two digit number denoting the...

Page 256: ...lear ip route ip route show ip route show ip route best match show ip route static show ip route summary show ip route track table traceroute Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip_address The IP address of the router interface_type The interface type interface_number The interface number cost The path cost 1 preference The preference High Low Low permanent Keyword that specifies n...

Page 257: ...disconnects the current session CAUTION CAUTION This command erases all announcement files in the G450 announcement directory Syntax zeroize User Level admin Context general Example To clear all secret parameters and initialize the NVRAM to its factory defaults G450 001 super zeroize This command will restore factory defaults and disconnect your existing session Zeroize do you want to continue Y N...

Page 258: ...ule Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To disable CPU utilization measurements for module 10 G450 001 super clear utilization cpu 10 set utilization cpu Use the set utilization cpu command to enable CPU utilization measurements Syntax set utilization cpu module Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module The module for which to disable CPU utilization measureme...

Page 259: ...how temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show download Use the show download command to display the status of the current file copy process to the device Syntax show download software mmID config status Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value software Keyword specifying that ...

Page 260: ...estination File BANK B Host 0 0 0 0 Running State idle Last Failure No Error Last Warning null Progress 0 0 0 Related Commands set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config show mgc show mm show module show recovery show restart log show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show faults Use the show faults command to display the active faults for the media gat...

Page 261: ...lization cpu show mg list_config show mgc show mm show module show recovery show restart log show download show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show mg list_config Use the show mg list_config command to show the installed media gateway equipment It displays the current hardware and firmware configurations of the media gateway The show mg list_config command is...

Page 262: ...v8 Analog MM711 A 1 61 V10 Mainboard G450 A 17 25 Related Commands set utilization cpu show faults show mgc show mm show module show recovery show restart log show download show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show mgc Use the show mgc command to display the currently active media gateway controller state and setup parameters Syntax show mgc User Level read on...

Page 263: ...tatus set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config show mm show module show recovery show restart log show download show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show mm Use the show mm command to show the media gateway media module information It displays the types and serial numbers of media modules installed on the media gateway If no media module ID is speci...

Page 264: ...ages Related Commands set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config show mgc show module show recovery show restart log show download show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show module Use the show module command to view information about a media module If no media module is specified information about all media modules is displayed Syntax show module mmID...

Page 265: ...A 0 N A v3 DCP MM717 A 1 2 v4 Analog MM714 A 1 61 v5 E1T1 MM340 A 0 N A v6 E1T1 MM340 A 0 N A v7 E1T1 MM340 A 0 N A v8 Analog MM711 A 1 61 V10 Mainboard G450 A 17 25 Related Commands set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config show mgc show mm show recovery show restart log show download show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show recovery Use the show r...

Page 266: ...w download show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show restart log Use the show restart log command to retrieve restart data that is stored in a log in flash memory Syntax show restart log User Level read only Context general Example To display restart information G450 001 super show restart log RESET ID MM DD hh mm ss hs STR 0000000000 01 01 02 54 17 00 MgFw 48...

Page 267: ... show mg list_config show mgc show mm show module show recovery show download show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show system Use the show system command to display information about the device Syntax show system User Level read only Context general ...

Page 268: ...00 04 0d 29 c6 bb WAN2 MAC address 00 04 0d 29 c6 bc SERVICES MAC address 00 04 0d 29 c6 be Memory 1 256MB Memory 2 Not present PSU 1 xxxx400W PSU 2 xxxx400W Media Socket 1 VoIP DSP xxxxx8102 Media Socket 2 VoIP DSP xxxxx7119 Media Socket 3 Not present Media Socket 4 Sync Over IP xxxxxZarlink222 FAN Trays xxxxxxxxx Related Commands Device status set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config ...

Page 269: ... show recovery show restart log show download show system show timeout show utilization show voltages test led show timeout Use the show timeout command to display the amount of time in minutes the terminal remains idle before timing out If the timeout value is 0 there is no timeout limit The default timeout value is 15 minutes Syntax show timeout User Level read only Context general Example To di...

Page 270: ...ameters User Level read only Context general Example To display the status of software downloads for all media modules G450 001 super show upload software status Related Commands set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config show mgc show mm show module show recovery show restart log show system show temp show timeout show utilization show voltages test led Parameter Description Possible Val...

Page 271: ...le To display utilization information for all modules G450 001 super show utilization Mod CPU CPU RAM RAM 5sec 60sec used Total Kb 10 4 4 21 105313 Kb Related Commands set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config show mgc show mm show module show restart log show system show temp show voltages test led show voltages Use the show voltages command to view power supply voltages Syntax show vol...

Page 272: ...S STATUS OK OK Related Commands set utilization cpu show faults show mg list_config show mgc show mm show module show recovery show restart log show download show system show temp show timeout show utilization test led test led Use the test led command to run a test of the device s LED operation Syntax test led User Level read only Context general Example To run a test of the device s LED operatio...

Page 273: ...e BOOTP DHCP server should allocate an address This command is required only when there are multiple IP interfaces over the VLAN Use the no form of this command to remove the specified network Note Note More than one network can be configured For requests to servers all configured networks are used The networks are used on a round robin basis Syntax ip bootp dhcp network ip_net no ip bootp dhcp ne...

Page 274: ...he BOOTP DHCP server Use the no form of this command to disable relaying of BOOTP and DHCP requests Syntax no ip bootp dhcp relay User Level read write Context general Example To enable relaying of BOOTP and DHCP requests G450 001 super ip bootp dhcp relay Related Commands ip bootp dhcp network ip bootp dhcp server ip bootp dhcp server Use the ip bootp dhcp server command to add a BOOTP DHCP serve...

Page 275: ... 46 Related Commands ip bootp dhcp network ip bootp dhcp relay DHCP binding file copy dhcp binding ftp Use the copy dhcp binding ftp command to copy the DHCP bindings file to a remote server using FTP Syntax copy dhcp binding ftp filename ip Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip_address The IP address of the server Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value fil...

Page 276: ...e usb show upload dhcp binding file status copy dhcp binding scp Use the copy dhcp binding scp command to copy the DHCP bindings file to a remote server using SCP Syntax copy dhcp binding scp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To copy the binding file dhcp_binding txt to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy dhcp binding scp dhcp_binding txt 1...

Page 277: ...cp binding tftp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To copy the binding file with file name dhcp_binding txt to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy dhcp binding tftp dhcp_binding txt 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy dhcp binding ftp copy dhcp binding scp copy announcement file usb show upload dhcp binding file status Parameter Description ...

Page 278: ...ntext general Examples To upload dhcp_binding txt from the gateway to usb device0 G450 001 super copy dhcp binding usb dhcp_binding txt usb device0 Related Commands backup config usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The logical name for the source fil...

Page 279: ... a DHCP binding file If no download was done G450 001 super show upload dhcp binding file status Module 10 No dest file for download operation no download operation was done If download was done G450 001 super show upload dhcp binding file status Module 10 Module 10 Source file dhcp binding Destination file bbbb Host 135 64 102 64 Running state Idle Failure display null Last warning No warning Rel...

Page 280: ... in the interface context the counters of the specified interface are cleared When you use this command in the general context all DHCP client counters are cleared Example To clear the DHCP client statistics counters G450 001 config if FastEthernet 10 2 clear ip dhcp client statistics ip address dhcp Use the ip address dhcp command to enable IP address negotiation via DHCP Use the no form of this ...

Page 281: ...tiate DHCP address negotiation using the new values Syntax no ip address dhcp User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet L2 L3 Example To enable IP address negotiation via DHCP G450 001 config if FastEthernet 10 2 ip address dhcp Related Commands clear ip dhcp client statistics ip dhcp client client id ip dhcp client hostname ip dhcp client lease ip dhcp client request ip dhcp client rou...

Page 282: ...ient request ip dhcp client route track release dhcp renew dhcp show ip dhcp client show ip dhcp client statistics ip dhcp client hostname Use the ip dhcp client hostname command to specify the client host name for the DHCP client Use the no form of this command to restore the default value which is the G450 s hostname Syntax no ip dhcp client hostname host name Parameter Description Possible Valu...

Page 283: ...nt show ip dhcp client statistics ip dhcp client lease Use the ip dhcp client lease command to set the lease requested by the DHCP client Use the no form of this command to specify the default behavior which is that the client does not request a lease from the DHCP server Syntax no ip dhcp client lease days hours minutes Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Defaul...

Page 284: ...ics ip dhcp client request Use the ip dhcp client request command to determine which DHCP options the DHCP client requests from the DHCP server By default the DHCP client requests all DHCP options Use the no form of this command to disable requesting of a specific option Note Note The DHCP client receives the requested options only if they were previously configured for the DHCP pool in the DHCP s...

Page 285: ... statistics ip dhcp client route track Use the ip dhcp client route track command to apply object tracking in order to monitor the DHCP client s default route Use the no form of this command to restore the default value which is that no object tracker is specified to check the default route Syntax no ip dhcp client route track track index dns nameserver A keyword indicating the DHCP client is requ...

Page 286: ...quest release dhcp renew dhcp show ip dhcp client show ip dhcp client statistics release dhcp Use the release dhcp command to release a DHCP lease for an interface This effectively releases the client IP address on the specified interface Note Note If you are releasing a dynamic IP address with DNS information DNS servers list the DNS information is removed as well and the DNS Resolver application...

Page 287: ... client request ip dhcp client route track renew dhcp show ip dhcp client show ip dhcp client statistics renew dhcp Use the renew dhcp command to renew a DHCP lease for an interface This is effectively a request to renew an existing IP address or the start of a new process of requesting a new IP address Syntax renew dhcp interface type interface identifier Parameter Description Possible Values Def...

Page 288: ...ient lease ip dhcp client request ppp ipcp dns request release dhcp ip dhcp client route track show ip dhcp client show ip dhcp client statistics show ip dhcp client Use the show ip dhcp client command to show the configuration of the DHCP client Syntax show ip dhcp client in the interface context show ip dhcp client interface type interface identifier brief in the general context Parameter Descri...

Page 289: ...0 1 2 20 Domain name avaya com DNS Server 122 22 22 33 133 33 33 33 Lease Received D H M S 2 2 3 4 Lease Remains D H M S 1 2 3 4 Lease Rebind D H M S 0 0 8 45 Lease Renew D H M S 0 0 5 0 Lease Requested D H M S 5 0 0 0 Host Name G450 1 Client Identifier 01 11 22 33 44 55 66 Requested Options default router 3 Dns servers 6 Domain name 15 Track id 1 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Valu...

Page 290: ... lease time has passed so the renewal phase entered rebind Renew 0 5 of the lease time has passed so the device is trying to renew the lease until 0 875 of the lease time will have passed Release The client released the lease Decline The client detected an IP conflict by sending an ARP packet Idle The client did not get an IP address and keeps trying after an Idle time 40 seconds to reach new IP a...

Page 291: ... remaining until the renew phase 0 5 of the lease time Lease Requested The lease requested by the DHCP client see ip dhcp client lease Host Name The host name of the DHCP client The default value is the gateway s hostname unless otherwise specified using the ip dhcp client hostname command Client Identifier The client identifier of the DHCP client The value is the MAC address of the interface unle...

Page 292: ...counters for all interfaces on which it is configured Note Note When the ip address dhcp command is used the DHCP Client statistics counters for the relevant interface are cleared The global parameters are not cleared Syntax show ip dhcp client statistics User Level read only Context interface FastEthernet 10 2 general Examples To show the DHCP Client statistics counters in the interface context G...

Page 293: ...ed packets of the following types Discover A DHCP Client s first packet to discover a DHCP server and request an IP address allocation Request A DHCP Client packet to request renew a specific IP address offered allocated by the DHCP server Decline A DHCP client packet sent when discovering congestion with the IP address allocated by the DHCP server Release A DHCP client release packet sent when re...

Page 294: ...e the server locks the IP address for half an hour by marking the IP address with client identifier 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 If you have solved the conflict before half an hour you can use this command to free the IP address for reallocation Syntax clear ip dhcp server binding ip address all Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To clear the allocation of IP address 1 1 1 1 G450 001...

Page 295: ...50 001 super clear ip dhcp server statistics Related Commands clear ip dhcp server binding ip dhcp activate pool ip dhcp ping packets ip dhcp ping timeout ip dhcp pool ip dhcp server show ip dhcp pool show ip dhcp server bindings show ip dhcp server statistics ip dhcp activate pool When you create a DHCP pool the pool remains inactive until you activate it This allows you to modify the pool config...

Page 296: ...cp ping packets command to enable the sending of a ping packet by the DHCP server to check if the IP address it is about to allocate is already in use by another client The purpose of this feature is to prevent IP address congestion Use the no form of this command to disable the sending of these ping packets Note Note Sending a ping packet before each IP address allocation reduces the rate at whic...

Page 297: ...istics ip dhcp ping timeout Use the ip dhcp ping timeout command to set the ping timeout This is the time the DHCP server waits for a reply to a sent ping packet before allocating an IP address to a DHCP client A lack of reply after the configured timeout indicates that the IP address is not in use and therefore can be allocated Syntax ip dhcp ping timeout timeout Parameters User Level read write ...

Page 298: ... pool Use the ip dhcp pool to create a DHCP pool or to enter the context of a DHCP pool Use the no form of this command to delete a DHCP pool Note Note You cannot delete an active DHCP pool Use the no form of the dhcp pool command to deactivate a pool When you deactivate the pool any associated binding information is erased Syntax no ip dhcp pool pool num Parameters User Level read write Context g...

Page 299: ...ot file Use the no form of this command to clear the boot file name Syntax no bootfile file name Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool Example To set booter as the bootfile G450 001 DHCP 5 bootfile booter To clear the bootfile definition G450 001 DHCP 5 no bootfile Related Commands client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server option server...

Page 300: ...mand to clear a specified unique identifier for a DHCP client Syntax no client identifier unique identifier Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool Example To set the MAC address as a client identifier for an Ethernet MAC client with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 55 G450 001 DHCP 5 client identifier 01 00 11 22 33 44 55 Related Commands bootfile default router dns server domain name end ip...

Page 301: ...HCP 5 default router 164 35 2 4 135 64 102 3 Related Commands bootfile client identifier dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option dns server Use the dns server command to set up to eight Domain Name Server DNS IP addresses Use the no form of this command to clear the DNS IP addresses Syntax...

Page 302: ...se name next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option domain name Use the domain name command to set a domain name string for the client Use the no form of this command to clear the domain name Syntax no domain name domain name Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip addr list A list of up to eight IP addresses for...

Page 303: ... vendor specific option end ip addr Use the end ip addr command to set the end IP address of a DHCP pool IP address range For manual reservation leasing set the end IP address to be identical to the start IP address Syntax no end ip addr ip addr Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip addr The end IP address of the DHCP pool IP addr...

Page 304: ...ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option lease Use the lease command to set the lease of a DHCP pool Syntax lease seconds infinite Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool Example To set a lease of 1 day G450 001 DHCP 5 lease 86400 Related Commands interface serial ppp ipcp dns request show interfaces Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value seconds ...

Page 305: ...01 ACL 330 name Admin13 Related Commands DHCP server bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option Related Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture ipsec capture max frame size capture sta...

Page 306: ...t server in the boot process of a DHCP client Use the no form of this command to clear the next server IP address Syntax no next server ip address Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool Example To set 1 1 1 1 as the IP address of the next server in the boot process of a DHCP client G450 001 DHCP 5 next server 1 1 1 1 Related Commands bootfile client identifier default router dns server...

Page 307: ... option 42 G450 001 DHCP 5 option 42 G450 001 DHCP 5 option 42 Related Commands bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value option num The index of the DHCP option 1 255 The exceptions are options configurab...

Page 308: ...s Admin13 G450 001 ACL 330 name Admin13 Related Commands DHCP server bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option Related Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size capture s...

Page 309: ...o set the value of a DHCP option or a vendor specific option Use the no form of this command to clear the vendor specific value Syntax no value raw type value Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool vendor specific dhcp pool option Example To specify IP addresses for World Wide Web servers DHCP option 72 G450 001 dhcp 5 option 72 value raw ip address 135 64 102 1 135 64 102 2 Parameter ...

Page 310: ... 44 55 66 77 Related Commands bootfile class identifier client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask vendor specific option server name Use the server name command to specify the optional server name in the boot process of a DHCP client Use the no form of this command to clear the optional ...

Page 311: ...ol index all detailed Parameters User Level read only Context general dhcp pool Example To display the configuration of the current DHCP pool G450 001 DHCP 5 show ip dhcp pool Index Name 5 DHCP pool 5 Mode Inactive Start IP Address Range 1 1 1 1 End IP Address Range 1 1 1 20 Lease Time 8 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds BootFile N A Next Server N A Client Identifier N A Parameter Description Possi...

Page 312: ... hours 0 minutes 0 seconds BootFile N A Next Server N A Client Identifier N A Server Name N A DHCP options Option Num 1 Name subnet mask Value 255 255 255 0 Option Num 3 Name default router Value 1 1 1 1 Option Num 176 Name SSON Value This is an example Vendor Specific Information Index 1 Name ccp avaya com Class Identifier null Value This is an example too To display the names and statuses of all...

Page 313: ...um 3 Name default router Value 1 1 1 1 Option Num 176 Name SSON Value This is an example Vendor Specific Information Index 1 Name ccp avaya com Class Identifier null Value This is an example too Index Name 6 DHCP pool 6 Mode Inactive Start IP Address Range 2 2 2 2 End IP Address Range 2 2 2 20 Lease Time 8 days 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds BootFile N A Next Server N A Client Identifier N A Server N...

Page 314: ...from the pool belongs to a DHCP client Bootfile For BOOTP clients the file to be downloaded by the client after the DHCP transaction ends Next Server The IP address of the Server to be accessed by the DHCP client after the DHCP transaction ends Client Identifier Used for static manual pools only where permanent IP address allocation is done according to the configured client identifier Server Name...

Page 315: ...ddr before you configure a new range Syntax no start ip addr ip addr Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool Example To set the start IP address of a DHCP pool to IP address 135 64 120 2 G450 001 DHCP 5 start ip addr 135 64 120 2 Related Commands bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server option server name show ip dhcp pool subne...

Page 316: ... 255 255 240 G450 001 DHCP 5 subnet mask 255 255 255 240 To set the subnet mask for DHCP pool 5 to 255 255 255 240 by stating the subnet mask prefix G450 001 DHCP 5 subnet mask 28 Related Commands bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr value vendor specific option Parameter Description P...

Page 317: ...ad write Context dhcp pool Example To set vendor specific option number 1 G450 001 DHCP 5 vendor specific option 1 Related Commands bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value class identifier Use the class identifier command to set a vendor specific identifier string Syntax...

Page 318: ...cp avaya com Related Commands value name Use the name command to assign a name to the specified list or operation Use the no form of the command to return the name to the default value Syntax no name name Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value string Identifier string for vendor specific option string 1 255 bytes null string Parameter Description Possible Values Default Val...

Page 319: ...lated Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size capture start capture stop capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list show capture show capture buffer hex Related Commands Policy based routing ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy c...

Page 320: ...fic option 1 G450 001 DHCP 5 vendor specific 1 value raw ascii MCIPADD 10 10 2 140 MCPORT 1719 TFTPSRVR 10 10 5 188 To set a non encapsulated value in Hex format for vendor specific option 1 G450 001 DHCP 5 vendor specific 1 value raw hex 00 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 Related Commands bootfile class identifier client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease name next server ...

Page 321: ... server G450 001 super ip dhcp server Related Commands clear ip dhcp server binding clear ip dhcp server statistics ip dhcp activate pool ip dhcp ping packets ip dhcp ping timeout ip dhcp pool show ip dhcp pool show ip dhcp server bindings show ip dhcp server statistics show ip dhcp server bindings A binding is an assignment of an IP address to a client Use the show ip dhcp server bindings command...

Page 322: ...p server statistics show ip dhcp server statistics Use the show ip dhcp server statistics command to display DHCP server statistics Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics Name Description IP Address The IP addresses allocated reserved by the DHCP server Lease Expiration seconds The length of time that the IP address is kept for a specific client id MAC address Type The type of address allocation Op...

Page 323: ...CP Discover packets that arrived from DHCP clients requesting allocation of a new IP address DHCP Requests The number of DHCP Request packets that arrived from DHCP clients to request renew new allocated IP addresses DHCP Declines The number of DHCP Decline packets that arrived from DHCP clients due to IP address congestion detected by the DHCP clients DHCP Releases The number of DHCP Release pack...

Page 324: ...ialer context and create or configure the Dialer interface Use the no form of this command to delete the Dialer interface Syntax no interface dialer dialer id Parameters User Level read write Context general DHCP Offers The number of DHCP Offer packets sent by the DHCP server offering a new IP address to a DHCP client DHCP Acks The number of DHCP Acknowledge packets sent by the DHCP server acknowl...

Page 325: ...to a modem interface Use the no form of the command to remove the association Syntax no dialer modem interface modem interface name Parameters User Level read write Context interface Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To associate a dialer to the Console G450 001 if Dialer 1 dialer modem interface console Related Commands interface dialer dialer order dialer persistent dialer persistent delay dialer persiste...

Page 326: ... dial trigger event G450 001 if Dialer 1 dialer order last successful Related Commands interface dialer dialer modem interface dialer persistent dialer persistent delay dialer persistent initial delay dialer persistent max attempts dialer persistent re enable dialer string dialer wait for ipcp Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value sequential Restart from beginning of dial list This i...

Page 327: ...t every second G450 001 if Dialer 1 dialer persistent Related Commands interface dialer dialer modem interface dialer order dialer persistent delay dialer persistent initial delay dialer persistent max attempts dialer persistent re enable dialer string dialer wait for ipcp dialer persistent delay Use the dialer persistent delay command to set the redial interval Use the no form of the command to s...

Page 328: ...r wait for ipcp dialer persistent initial delay Use the dialer persistent initial delay command to set the minimum delay from boot to persistent dialing Use the no form of the command to return the delay to the default value Note Note Use this command to prevent the Dialer interface from dialing out after the G450 is reset This is needed because the primary interface does not become active immedia...

Page 329: ...umber of consecutive dial attempts for the dial list Use the no form of the command to set unlimited dial attempts Syntax no dialer persistent max attempts max att Parameters User Level read write Context interface Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To set the number of consecutive dial attempts for the dial list to 50 G450 001 if Dialer 1 dialer persistent max attempts 50 Related Commands interface dialer d...

Page 330: ...face Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To set the persistent re enable timer after the maximum number of dial attempts has been reached G450 001 if Dialer 1 dialer persistent re enable Related Commands interface dialer dialer modem interface dialer order dialer persistent dialer persistent delay dialer persistent initial delay dialer persistent max attempts dialer string dialer wait for ipcp dialer string U...

Page 331: ...ialer persistent re enable dialer wait for ipcp dialer wait for ipcp Use the dialer wait for ipcp command to set the maximum time the dialer waits between dialing a number to successfully establishing PPP IPCP Syntax no dialer wait for ipcp sec Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value id The location of the phone number in the list 1 5 dial string The modem string The modem d...

Page 332: ...r persistent re enable dialer string ip address negotiated Use the ip address negotiated command to enable obtaining an IP address via PPP IPCP negotiation Use the no form of this command to disable IP address negotiation Note Note The ip address negotiated command is intended primarily for PPPoE and dialer modem Note Note When you release a negotiated IP address using no ip address negotiated any...

Page 333: ...o its default value The login banner appears before the user is prompted for the login name To enter text for the login banner refer to the command line on page 336 Note Note Before creating a new banner delete the current banner using the no banner login command Syntax no banner login User Level admin Context general Example To enter login banner configuration mode G450 001 super banner login G45...

Page 334: ...e command line on page 336 Note Note Before creating a new banner delete the current banner using the no banner post login command Syntax no banner post login User Level admin Context general Example To enter the post login banner configuration mode G450 001 super banner post login G450 001 super post login Related Commands banner login clear screen hostname line show banner login show banner post...

Page 335: ... information If the device is registered the current media gateway number appears If the device is not registered question marks are displayed Use the hostname command with no parameters to display the current prompt value Use the no form of this command to return the CLI prompt to the default Syntax hostname hostname_string no hostname Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To s...

Page 336: ...Syntax line number string Parameters Note Note To define a string that includes spaces enclose the entire string in quotation marks for example New York User Level admin Context banner login banner post login Example To specify text for the third line of the banner displayed after a successful login G450 001 super banner post login line 3 Welcome to the G450 Media Gateway CLI Interface Parameter D...

Page 337: ...banner login User Level admin Context general Example To display the banner that appears before the login prompt G450 001 super show banner login Welcome to G450 Media Gateway FW version 0 11 0 Related Commands banner login banner post login clear screen hostname line show banner post login terminal length terminal width show banner post login Use the show banner post login command to display the ...

Page 338: ...in clear screen hostname line show banner login terminal length terminal width terminal length Use the terminal length command to set the length of the terminal display in characters Syntax terminal length lines Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To set the screen to display 24 lines G450 001 super terminal length 24 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value lines Th...

Page 339: ...th characters Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To limit the display to a width of 60 characters G450 001 super terminal width 60 Related Commands banner login banner post login clear screen hostname line show banner login show banner post login terminal length Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value characters The number of characters in the width of the terminal...

Page 340: ...domain statistics Related Commands ip domain list ip domain lookup ip domain name server list ip domain retry ip domain timeout nslookup show ip domain show ip domain statistics ip domain list Use the ip domain list command to specify static domain names suffixes to complete non FQDN names host names that do not end with a dot This aids the DNS Resolver in resolving the remote peer host name to an...

Page 341: ...r list ip domain retry ip domain timeout nslookup show ip domain show ip domain statistics ip domain lookup Use the ip domain lookup command to enable the DNS Resolver Use the no form of this command to disable the DNS Resolver Note Note The DNS Resolver is enabled by default Syntax no ip domain lookup User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value index ...

Page 342: ...ntext Once you are in the context of the list use the name server command to add or delete DNS servers in the list Syntax ip domain name server list index Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create DNS server list 1 and enter its context G450 001 super ip domain name server list 1 G450 001 name server list 1 Related Commands clear ip domain statistics description DNS resolv...

Page 343: ...ame server list 1 description All DNS servers Related Commands clear ip domain statistics ip domain list ip domain lookup ip domain name server list ip domain retry ip domain timeout name server nslookup show ip domain show ip domain statistics name server Use the name server command to add a DNS server to the list of up to six DNS servers Use the no form of this command to delete the server from ...

Page 344: ...ip domain retry ip domain timeout nslookup show ip domain show ip domain statistics ip domain retry Use the ip domain retry command to set the number of retries for a DNS query Use the no form of this command to restore the retries value to the default value of 2 Syntax no ip domain retry retries Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value index The index number of the DNS server indicatin...

Page 345: ...p show ip domain show ip domain statistics ip domain timeout Use the ip domain timeout command to set the timeout for a DNS query Use the no form of this command to restore the timeout value to the default value of 3 seconds Syntax no ip domain timeout timeout Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value retries The number of retries 0 100 2 ...

Page 346: ...atistics nslookup Use the nslookup command to resolve a host name to an IP address Note Note The nslookup command has a timeout of 30 seconds Syntax nslookup hostname Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To resolve the host name www avaya com to an IP address G450 001 super nslookup www avaya com DNS server 135 64 19 81 Host name pcmsnj avaya com IP address 216 74 135 14 Host al...

Page 347: ...uses the DNS servers discovered using this command Syntax ppp ipcp dns request no ppp ipcp dns User Level read write Context Interface Console FastEthernet PPP L2 PPP L2 L3 Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 USB modem Example To enable DNS information requests from the remote peer during the PPP IPCP session G450 001 config if FastEthernet 10 2 ppp ipcp dns re...

Page 348: ... com 2 global avaya com 3 avaya com Output fields Field Description Retries The configured number of retries for a DNS query Timeout seconds The configured timeout for a DNS query Description The description of the DNS servers list Index The Index number of the DNS server This number determines the order in which the DNS servers are accessed when the device tries to resolve a remote peer host name...

Page 349: ...s G450 001 super show ip domain statistics Transaction Type Total Transactions Success Failures Standard query 1 1 0 Interface The interface running the PPP or DHCP protocol that discovered the DNS server where applicable Following is the list of configured static domain names suffixes used to complete non FQDN names host names that do not end with a dot They aid the DNS Resolver in resolving a re...

Page 350: ...Output fields Related Commands clear ip domain statistics ip domain list ip domain lookup ip domain name server list ip domain retry ip domain timeout nslookup show ip domain Field Description Total transactions The total number of DNS resolution requests Success The number of successful transactions Failures The number of failed transactions Total queries The total number of DNS query packets sen...

Page 351: ...he ssh client protocol https Keyword indicating to display the status of the https protocol snmp Keyword indicating to display the status of the SNMP protocol telnet Keyword indicating to display the status of the telnet protocol telnet services Keyword indicating to display the status of the telnet protocol on the Services interface http Keyword indicating to display the status of the HTTP protoc...

Page 352: ...Protocols Status SSH CLIENT ON TELNET CLIENT OFF SNMPv1 ON SNMPv3 ON TELNET ON TELNET SERVICES ON HTTP ON RECOVERY PASSWORD ON FTP CLIENT ON TFTP OFF DHCP ON DNS CLIENT ON dhcp Keyword indicating to display the status of the DHCP protocol dns client Keyword indicating to display the status of the DNS client protocol Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ...

Page 353: ... write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 PPP L2 PPP L2 L3 Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 Loopback L2 L2 L3 VLAN L2 L2 L3 Example To set dynamic CAC on FastEthernet interface 10 2 with a bearer bandwidth limit of 128 and an activation priority of 100 G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 dynamic cac 128 100...

Page 354: ...nly Context general Example To display information about the most recent dynamic CAC event G450 001 super show dynamic cac Current RBBL 256 kbps event 0 Days 1 21 00 Last event BBL 256 kbps Related Commands dynamic cac Dynamic trap manager clear dynamic trap manager Use the clear dynamic trap manager command to remove administration of the dynamic trap manager Syntax clear dynamic trap manager Use...

Page 355: ...fault settings and remove all notification type filters Syntax snmp server dynamic trap manager traps informs v1 v2c community name udp port port notification list no snmp server dynamic trap manager notification list Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value traps Keyword indicating that the dynamic trap manager send messages without requesting acknowledgement This is the def...

Page 356: ...ult clear traps rtp stat qos RTP statistics end of call QoS traps wan WAN router traps media gateway media gateway traps security security traps config configuration change notifications eth port faults notifications of Ethernet port faults sw redundancy software redundancy notifications temperature temperature warning notifications cam change notifications about changes in CAM l3 events notificat...

Page 357: ...rtogroup show snmp view snmp server community snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Co...

Page 358: ...ddress linecode E1 linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode controller Use the controller command to enter configuration mode for a specific controller Syntax controller e1 t1 module_number port_number Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value controller_number The controller module number and port number Parameter...

Page 359: ... cablelength long command to configure transmit and receive levels for a cable longer than 655 feet Use the no form of the command to restore the transmit and receive levels to their default values Syntax cablelength long rx_level tx_level no cablelength long Parameters User Level read write Context interface Controller T1 Example To set the receive and transmit values for the cable to gain36 and ...

Page 360: ...ransmit level to its default value Note Note The transmit attenuation is configured using the loop length Syntax cablelength short tx_value Parameters User Level read write Context interface Controller T1 Example To set the transmit value for the cable to 399ft G450 001 super controller 5 1 cablelength short 399ft Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long channel group...

Page 361: ...create a new channel group number 2 with time slots 5 6 and 8 and speed of 56 G450 001 super controller 5 1 channel group 2 timeslots 5 6 8 speed 56 Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short clock source ds mode fdl framing interface serial ip address linecode E1 linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode Paramet...

Page 362: ...Controller Example To specify that controller number 5 uses an external clock G450 001 super controller 5 1 clock source line Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short channel group ds mode fdl framing interface serial ip address linecode E1 linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode Parameter Description Possibl...

Page 363: ... no fdl Parameters User Level read write Context interface Controller T1 Example To set the FDL type to ansi G450 001 super controller 5 1 fdl ansi Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short channel group clock source ds mode framing interface serial ip address linecode E1 linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mod...

Page 364: ...interface Controller Example To set the frame type to extended super frame G450 001 super controller 5 1 framing esf Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short channel group clock source ds mode fdl interface serial ip address linecode E1 linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode Parameter Description Possible Va...

Page 365: ...r Level read write Context interface Controller E1 Example To set the line code type to ami G450 001 super controller 5 1 linecode ami Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short channel group clock source ds mode fdl framing interface serial ip address linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode Parameter Descripti...

Page 366: ...zs Parameters User Level read write Context interface Controller T1 Example To set the line code type to ami G450 001 super controller 5 1 linecode ami Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short channel group clock source ds mode fdl framing interface serial ip address linecode E1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode Pa...

Page 367: ...er Description Possible Values Default Value local Keyword indicating that the controller loop the internal transmit signal back to the internal receive signal line Keyword indicating that the controller loop the external line signal back toward the network without reframing the DS1 signal payload Keyword indicating that the controller loop the external line signal back toward the network and refr...

Page 368: ...and to reset the far end counters on a T1 line Syntax remote fdl_request_type Parameters User Level read write Context interface Controller T1 Example To reset performance monitoring counters G450 001 super controller 5 1 remote reset performance monitoring counters Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short channel group clock source ds mode fdl frami...

Page 369: ...operate in T1 mode G450 001 super ds mode t1 To change ds mode copy the running configuration to the start up configuration file and reset the device Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength long cablelength short channel group clock source fdl framing interface serial ip address linecode E1 linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode ...

Page 370: ...s for USP interfaces and when higher or lower layers are defined for that interface Syntax no interface Serial module if_number if_link_type For USP interfaces if_number has the syntax port ip_interface sub_interface ip_interface For DS1 interfaces if_number has the syntax port channel_group ip_interface sub_interface ip_interface Parameters User Level read write Context general interface Serial F...

Page 371: ...ace Use the no form of this command to delete an IP interface Syntax ip address ip_address mask admin_state negotiated no ip address Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Console Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 USB modem Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Paramet...

Page 372: ...1 loopback remote show controllers show controllers remote show ds mode show controllers Use the show controllers command to display status information about a controller interface Syntax show controllers module port Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To display controller status information G450 001 super show controllers T1 5 1 is down Cablelength is long gain26 0db Transmi...

Page 373: ...remote show controllers remote show ds mode Related Commands Verifying WAN configuration show frame relay fragment show frame relay lmi show frame relay pvc show frame relay traffic show interfaces show ip interface show map class frame relay show controllers remote Use the show controllers remote command to display controller statistics from a peer station If the Facility Data Link FDL for this c...

Page 374: ...code E1 linecode T1 loopback remote show controllers show ds mode show ds mode Use the show ds mode command to display the current mode of the controller Syntax show ds mode User Level read only Context general Example To display the current mode of the controller G450 001 super show ds mode Current ds mode T1 Configured ds mode T1 Related Commands clear controller counters controller cablelength ...

Page 375: ...te Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for both ETH LAN ports 5 6 on the front panel no flowcontrol Keyword specifying that the port will advertise no pause capabilities asym tx only Keyword specifying that the port will adve...

Page 376: ...nfigure the duplex type of an Ethernet or Fast Ethernet port or range of ports You can configure Ethernet and FastEthernet interfaces to either full duplex or half duplex The duplex status of a port in auto negotiation mode is determined by auto negotiation An error message is generated if you try to set the transmission type of auto negotiation Fast Ethernet ports to half duplex or full duplex mo...

Page 377: ...ntrol advertisement show port edge state show port flowcontrol set port edge admin state Use the set port edge admin state command to assign or de assign RSTP edge port admin state to a port for Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP treatment Syntax set port edge admin state module port admin_state Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mod...

Page 378: ... port speed show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement show port edge state show port flowcontrol set port enable disable Use the set port enable disable command to enable or disable a port or a range of ports Syntax set port enable disable module port Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Enable a port disable Disable...

Page 379: ...tion send or receive can be configured separately Syntax set port flowcontrol receive send all module port off on proprietary Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value receive Keyword specifying whether the port can receive its administrative status from a remote device This option is only available for Gigabit Ethernet modules with negotiation set to off send Keyword specifyi...

Page 380: ...ort duplex set port edge admin state set port enable disable set port level set port name set port negotiation set port point to point admin status set port speed show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement show port edge state show port flowcontrol port Number of the port on the module off Used with receive to turn off an attached device s ability to send flow control packets to a local ...

Page 381: ... port level 6 5 5 Port 6 5 level set to 5 Related Commands set port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement set port enable disable set port duplex set port edge admin state set port enable disable set port flowcontrol set port name set port negotiation set port point to point admin status set port speed show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement show port edge state show port flowcon...

Page 382: ...et the name of port 6 5 to arthur G450 001 set port name 6 5 arthur Port 6 5 name set Note Note If you wish to define a name which includes spaces you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks for example new york Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for ...

Page 383: ...n protocol to determine the highest connection parameters available to connected ports and configures the port speed and duplex setting of both ports This command applies to Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet ports If negotiation is disabled the user can set the speed and duplex of the Fast Ethernet ports Syntax set port negotiation module port enable disable Parameters User Level read write Contex...

Page 384: ...nt show port edge state show port flowcontrol set port point to point admin status Use the set port point to point admin status command to manage the connection type of the port Syntax set port point to point admin status module port admin_status Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a r...

Page 385: ...tion flowcontrol advertisement show port edge state show port flowcontrol set port speed Use the set port speed command to configure the speed of a port or range of ports In auto negotiation mode the port s speed is determined by auto negotiation An error message is generated if you try to set the speed when auto negotiation is enabled Syntax set port speed module port 10MB 100MB 1GB Parameters Pa...

Page 386: ...ort point to point admin status show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement show port edge state show port flowcontrol show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement Use the show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement command to display the flowcontrol advertisement for a Gigabit port used to perform auto negotiation If no port is specified information for all ports is disp...

Page 387: ...t port enable disable set port duplex set port edge admin state set port enable disable set port flowcontrol set port level set port name set port negotiation set port point to point admin status set port speed show port edge state show port flowcontrol show port edge state Use the show port edge state command to display the edge state of the specified port If no port is specified information for ...

Page 388: ... name set port negotiation set port point to point admin status set port speed show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement show port flowcontrol show port flowcontrol Use the show port flowcontrol command to display port flow control information If no port is specified information for all ports is displayed Syntax show port flowcontrol module port Parameter Description Possible Values Def...

Page 389: ...enable disable set port flowcontrol set port level set port name set port negotiation set port point to point admin status set port speed show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement show port edge state Output fields Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module Field Description Port Module and port number Send Flowc...

Page 390: ... port will send flow control frames to the far end Off indicates that the local port will not send flow control frames to the far end Receive Flowcontrol Admin Receive flow control administration Possible settings On indicates that the local port will act upon flow control indications if received from the far end Off indicates that the local port will discard flow control frames if received from t...

Page 391: ...ands show etr show etr Use the show etr command to view the status of Emergency Transfer Relay ETR mode Syntax show etr User Level read only Context general Example To display the ETR status G450 001 super show etr Module 7 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Module number 10 auto Allow the gateway to control ETR mode automatically manual on Keyword specifying to set ETR mod...

Page 392: ...ns Use the show platform fans command to display information about the fan tray unit Syntax show platform fans User Level admin Context general Example To display information on the fan tray unit G450 001 super show platform fans FAN TRAY UNIT 1 Type G450 FAN TRAY Description G450 FAN TRAY UNIT Serial Number xxxxxxxxxxxxx HW Vintage 1 HW Suffix A Faults No Fault Messages ...

Page 393: ...29 c6 bd WAN1 MAC address 00 04 0d 29 c6 bb WAN2 MAC address 00 04 0d 29 c6 bc SERVICES MAC address 00 04 0d 29 c6 be Memory 1 256MB Memory 2 Not present PSU 1 xxxx400W PSU 2 xxxx400W Media Socket 1 VoIP DSP xxxxx8102 Media Socket 2 VoIP DSP xxxxx7119 Media Socket 3 Not present Media Socket 4 Sync Over IP xxxxxZarlink222 FAN Trays xxxxxxxxx Firmware management copy ftp EW_archive Use the copy ftp ...

Page 394: ...copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy ftp module Use the copy ftp module command to download firmware from an FTP server into a media module The FTP command prompts for the username and password after the command is entered Syntax copy ftp module...

Page 395: ...W_imageB copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy ftp SW_imageA Use the copy ftp SW_imageA command to download a software image from an FTP server into Bank A The command prompts for the username and password Syntax copy ftp SW_imageA filename ip Pa...

Page 396: ...opy ftp module copy ftp SW_imageB copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy ftp SW_imageB Use the copy ftp SW_imageB command to download a software image from an FTP server into Bank B The command prompts for the username and password Syntax copy ftp...

Page 397: ...opy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy tftp EW_archive Use the copy tftp EW_archive command to download the media gateway manager application into the media gateway via TFTP To use this command you need to have an active TFTP server and to create a file into which to download the data If Avaya Network Man...

Page 398: ... set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy tftp module Use the copy tftp module command to download a new version of module software into a particular media module from a saved file via TFTP To use this command you need to have an active TFTP server and to create a file into which to download the software If Avaya Network Manager is running you do not need ...

Page 399: ... usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy tftp SW_imageA Use the copy tftp SW_imageA command to update the software image in Bank A of the media gateway To use this command you need to have an active TFTP server and to create a file into which to download the data If Avaya Network Manager is running you do not need an additional T...

Page 400: ...p SW_imageB copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy tftp SW_imageB Use the copy tftp SW_imageB command to update the software image in Bank B of the media gateway To use this command you need to have an active TFTP server and to create a fil...

Page 401: ...ommands copy ftp EW_archive copy ftp module copy ftp SW_imageA copy ftp SW_imageB copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status show image version copy usb EW_archive Use the copy usb EW_archive command to download Avaya G450 Manager software from the external USB mass storage device to the gatewa...

Page 402: ...show backup status show restore status show usb copy usb module Use the copy usb module command to download firmware from the external USB mass storage device to the gateway Syntax copy usb module source usb device source filename module number Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source usb device The source USB mass storage device usb device0 source filename The full na...

Page 403: ...how usb copy usb SW_image Use the copy usb SW_image command to download a software from the external USB mass storage device into Bank A or Bank B Syntax copy usb SW_imageA SW_imageB source usb device source filename Parameters source filename The full name and path of the file to be downloaded module number The slot number of the media module being upgraded Parameter Description Possible Values D...

Page 404: ...how usb dir Use the dir command to show either The files that have been downloaded to the media gateway using the G450 001 Download interface and the SNMP MIB The files in the USB mass storage device Syntax dir module_number file system directory Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module_number Displays downloaded files for the specified module onl...

Page 405: ... BootImage Nv Ram Booter Image 10 sniffer N A Other Ram Sniffer Capture 10 phone ScriptA N A Phone Script Nv Ram N A 10 phone ScriptB N A Phone Script Nv Ram 46xxupgrade scr 10 phone ScriptC N A Phone Script Nv Ram N A 10 phone ScriptD N A Phone Script Nv Ram N A 10 phone ImageA N A Phone Image Ram N A 10 phone ImageB N A Phone Image Ram N A 10 phone ImageC N A Phone Image Ram 4601dbte1_82 bin 10 ...

Page 406: ...tive Supervisor Module Syntax set boot bank value Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To specify that the media gateway boots from boot bank A G450 001 super set boot bank bank A boot bank set to bank A Related Commands copy ftp EW_archive copy ftp module copy ftp SW_imageA copy ftp SW_imageB copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy tftp SW_imageB copy us...

Page 407: ...ftp module copy ftp SW_imageA copy ftp SW_imageB copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show download software status show image version show download software status Use the show download software status command to display the status of the current firmware download process as the software is being loaded into the...

Page 408: ...49 70 61 Running state Writing Failure display null Last warning No warning Related Commands copy ftp EW_archive copy ftp module copy ftp SW_imageA copy ftp SW_imageB copy tftp EW_archive copy tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show image version show image version Use the show image version command to display the softwar...

Page 409: ...py tftp module copy tftp SW_imageA copy tftp SW_imageB copy usb announcement file dir set boot bank show boot bank show download software status Fragmentation clear fragment Use the clear fragment command to clear the fragment database and restore its default values Note Note No IP reassembly is performed on packets in transit through the router Syntax clear fragment User Level read write Context ...

Page 410: ... reassembly is performed on packets in transit through the router Syntax fragment chain chain_limit no fragment chain Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the maximum number of fragments for a single IP packet to 30 G450 001 super fragment chain 30 Related Commands clear fragment fragment size fragment timeout show fragment Parameter Description Possible Values Default V...

Page 411: ...rmed on packets in transit through the router Syntax fragment size database_limit no fragment size Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the maximum number of packets to reassemble to 150 G450 001 super fragment size 150 Related Commands clear fragment fragment chain fragment timeout show fragment Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value database_ limit The max...

Page 412: ...t timeout no fragment timeout Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the maximum time to reassemble packets to be 30 seconds G450 001 super fragment timeout 30 Related Commands clear fragment fragment chain fragment size show fragment show fragment Use the show fragment command to display information about IP packets that are passing from or to the router Note Note No IP r...

Page 413: ...t timeout is 10 sec Number of packets waiting to be reassembled is 0 Number of successfully reassembled packets is 11954 Number of packets which failed to be reassembled is 0 Number of packets which overflowed the database is 0 Related Commands clear fragment fragment chain fragment size fragment timeout Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay counters Use the clear frame relay counters comman...

Page 414: ...ment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics interface serial Use the interface serial command to enter Serial interface or sub interface configuration mode If the specified interface or sub interface does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Use the no form of the command to delete ...

Page 415: ...91dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics Related Commands IP interface configuration description interface interfac...

Page 416: ...t one IP interface is defined on it Instead the following message appears You cannot update this L2 interface since L3 interfaces are defined on it By default the Frame Relay encapsulation type for the main interface is IETF Note Note Non IETF encapsulation is compatible with other vendors Syntax encapsulation ppp frame relay type no encapsulation Parameters User Level read write Context interface...

Page 417: ...ic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics Related Commands PPP encapsulation ip address keepalive PPP ppp timeout ncp ppp timeout retry show interfaces frame relay class dlci Use the frame relay class dlci command to associate a Virtual Channel with a named QoS or Traffic shaping template map class Traffic shaping only works if it is enabled on the frame relay interface Use the no form ...

Page 418: ...traffic shape statistics frame relay interface dlci Use the frame relay interface dlci command to associate a frame relay Virtual Channel with the current interface This VC will be in the primary role that is will determine the operational status of the interface Use the no form of this command to delete the association of the VC and the sub interface To replace the currently configured interface ...

Page 419: ...dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics frame relay lmi n391dte Use the frame relay lmi n391dte command to set the number of status enquiry ...

Page 420: ... out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics frame relay lmi n392dte Use the frame relay lmi n392dte command to set the maximum number of unanswered status enquiries the equipment accepts before declaring the interface down Use the no form of this command to revert to the default value Syntax no frame r...

Page 421: ...i n393dte command to set the number of status polling intervals over which the error threshold is counted the monitored event count To set the error threshold refer to frame relay lmi n392dte on page 420 In other words if within events number of events the station receives error_threshold number of errors the interface is marked as down Use the no form of this command to revert to the default valu...

Page 422: ...c shape statistics frame relay lmi type Use the frame relay lmi type command to manually define the type of the Local Management Interface LMI to use Use the no form of this command to specify automatic detection of the LMI type auto sensing If auto sense fails ANSI is used as the default Syntax no frame relay lmi type lmi_type Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 FR L2 US...

Page 423: ...s for supporting traffic separation The first DLCI is assigned to the high priority traffic Other DLCIs are assigned to Medium L2 4 5 Normal L2 2 3 and Low L2 0 1 priorities When fewer than 4 DLCIs are specified the last DLCI on the command line is assigned to all the remaining unassigned priority classes Use the no form of this command to clear the current priority DLCI group Syntax no frame rela...

Page 424: ...rame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics frame relay traffic shaping Use the frame relay traffic shaping command to turn on off traffic shaping and Frame Relay fragmentation Virtual Channels that are not explicitly assigned to a map class frame relay are assigned to the default map class frame relay Use the no form of this command to turn ...

Page 425: ...o delete an IP interface Syntax ip address ip_address mask admin_state negotiated no ip address Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Console Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 USB modem Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To assign the IP address 192 168 22 ...

Page 426: ...cription interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface tunnel interface USB modem interface vlan ip admin state ip broadcast address load interval show ip interface brief map class frame relay Use the map class frame relay command to create a QoS template named map_class_name which can later be assigned to DLCIs Use the no form of this command to ...

Page 427: ...type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics bc out Use the bc out command to configure the committed burst size in bits for the outbound direction Use the no form of this command to return the committed burst s...

Page 428: ...fic shaping ip address map class frame relay be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics be out Use the be out command to configure the excess burst size in bits for the outbound direction Use the no form of this command to return the excess burst size to its default value Note Note The Exces...

Page 429: ...ame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics cir out Use the cir out command to configure the Committed Information Rate CIR in bits per second for the outbou...

Page 430: ... n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics fragment Use the fragment command to enable FRF 12 fragmentation and configure the fragment size Use th...

Page 431: ...mi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics show frame relay map Use the show frame relay map command to display a summary table of Frame Relay sub interfaces and DLCIs a...

Page 432: ...table form Syntax show frame relay pvc brief User Level read only Context general Example To show a table of all PVCs known to the device G450 001 super show frame relay pvc brief Related Commands clear frame relay counters interface serial encapsulation frame relay class dlci frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type fr...

Page 433: ... is 255 255 255 240 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_type The type of interface DIaler FastEthernet Serial Vlan Loopback Console Tunnel USB interface_ identifier The interface number The format varies depending on the value of interface_type For FastEthernet module port For Serial module port channel group For Vlan Vlan id For LoopBack Loopback number For Tunnel Tunnel...

Page 434: ...eliability 1 255 txLoad 255 255 rxLoad 255 255 Encapsulation ARPA Link status trap disabled Half duplex 10Mb s 10BaseTX ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Dynamic CAC BBL 1500 kbps Dynamic CAC activation priority 50 Dynamic CAC interface status active Last input never Last output never Last clearing of show interface counters never 5 minute input rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec 5 minute output rate ...

Page 435: ...i frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics Related Commands PPP encapsulation interfac...

Page 436: ...ame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics Related Commands Traffic shaping frame relay traffic shaping map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show traffic shape show traffic shape queue show traffic shape statis...

Page 437: ...0 125 375 FastEthernet 10 2 128000 1518 128000 0 1 16 To display traffic shaping and Frame Relay Traffic Shaping information for the Serial 5 0 interface G450 001 super show traffic shape interface Serial 5 0 11 11 Target Byte Sustain Excess Interval Increment Interface VC Rate Limit bits int bits int ms bytes Serial 5 0 11 11 16 24000 12375 24000 96000 125 375 Serial 5 0 11 11 20 24000 12375 2400...

Page 438: ...ay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics show traffic shape queue Use the show traffic shape queue command to display information about the real time status of traffic shaping and Frame Relay Traffic Shaping queues Syntax show traffic shape queue interface name number Target Rate Rate that traffic is shaped to in bits per second This is the CIR ...

Page 439: ...8 149 49 70 155 135 64 102 240 tcp 23 2515 1 0 127 Related Commands Traffic shaping frame relay traffic shaping map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show map class frame relay show traffic shape show traffic shape statistics traffic shape rate Related Commands Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay counters interface serial encapsulation frame relay class dlci frame relay inte...

Page 440: ...e statistics Queue Packets Bytes Packets Bytes Shaping Interface VC Depth Delayed Delayed Active Serial 4 1 11 11 16 0 455 220218 375 182250 No Serial 3 1 1 2 30 50 455 220218 375 182250 yes FastEthernet 10 2 0 1031 1938990 534 938270 No To display traffic shaping and Frame Relay Traffic Shaping statistics for the Serial 4 1 interface G450 001 super show traffic shape statistics Serial 4 1 11 11 Q...

Page 441: ...lass frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling Field Description Interface Interface or sub interface type and number VC Virtual circuit which is the DLCI number Queue Depth Number of frames currently in the VC Virtual Circuit queue Packets Number of packets sent through the VC Bytes Number of bytes s...

Page 442: ...ser Level read write Context general Example To create interface tunnel 1 and enter its configuration mode G450 001 super interface tunnel 1 Related Commands IP interface configuration description interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface USB modem interface vlan ip address ip admin state ip broadcast address load interval show ip interface br...

Page 443: ...ckets equal to the retries parameter the tunnel informs the hosts which send packets to the tunnel that the tunnel is down It does so even though the source interface continues to send keepalive packets Syntax keepalive seconds retries no keepalive Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Example To enable GRE tunnel keepalives setting the rate to 10 seconds and retries t...

Page 444: ...tax no tunnel checksum User Level read write Context Interface Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Example To specify that the router adds a checksum bit to the outgoing GRE packet G450 001 super tunnel checksum Related Commands keepalive GRE tunnel tunnel destination tunnel key tunnel path mtu discovery tunnel source tunnel ttl tunnel destination Use the tunnel destination command to specify the destination IP addre...

Page 445: ...default the GRE header copies the DSCP value from the header of the original packet Use the tunnel dscp command to override the original packet s DSCP with the specified DSCP value Use the no form of the command to use the DSCP value of the original packet Syntax tunnel dscp dscp no tunnel dscp Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip address The destination IP address for...

Page 446: ... security key number The tunnel endpoint must also be configured to use a security key and the key numbers must be identical If a security key is not configured on the tunnel endpoint or a different key number is used the packets are discarded Use the no form of the command to specify that no security key should be sent Syntax tunnel key key_id no tunnel key Parameters User Level read write Contex...

Page 447: ...n method of the tunnel This command is only included for future development and for conformity with other systems Currently the tunnel can only perform GRE encapsulation Syntax tunnel mode encapsulation no tunnel mode Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Example To specify GRE tunnel encapsulation G450 001 super tunnel mode gre Related Commands interface fastethernet ...

Page 448: ...make the MTU value permanent no updating Use the no form of the command to disable MTU discovery Note Note When MTU discovery is disabled the tunnel s source interface marks all packets may be fragmented even if the packet s original setting is do not fragment It is highly recommended to enable the MTU discovery feature on a tunnel Syntax tunnel path mtu discovery age timer minutes infinite no tun...

Page 449: ...el source command to specify the IP address of the source interface for the GRE tunnel The source interface is the interface used to direct all traffic into the tunnel Note Note The CLI does not verify that the specified IP address actually exists Syntax tunnel source ip address Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Example To specify the GRE tunnel source interface IP...

Page 450: ...unnel ttl command to override this default Use the no form of the command to use the default ttl value Syntax tunnel ttl ttl no tunnel ttl Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Example To set the ttl value to 16 G450 001 super tunnel ttl 16 Related Commands keepalive GRE tunnel tunnel checksum tunnel destination tunnel key tunnel path mtu discovery tunnel source Parame...

Page 451: ...write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_type The type of interface DIaler FastEthernet Serial Vlan Loopback Console Tunnel USB interface_ identifier The interface number The format varies depending on the value of interface_type For FastEthernet module port For Serial module port channel group For Vlan Vlan id For LoopBack Loopback number For Tunnel Tunn...

Page 452: ...ed 0 giants 0 input errors 0 CRC 32 packets output 896 bytes 0 output errors 0 collisions FastEthernet 10 2 is up line protocol is down Physical address is 00 04 0d 29 c5 10 MTU 1500 bytes Bandwidth 10000 kbit Reliability 1 255 txLoad 255 255 rxLoad 255 255 Encapsulation ARPA Link status trap disabled Half duplex 10Mb s 10BaseTX ARP type ARPA ARP Timeout 04 00 00 Dynamic CAC BBL 1500 kbps Dynamic ...

Page 453: ... 0 output drops 0 unknown protocols 0 packets input 0 bytes 0 broadcasts received 0 giants 0 input errors 0 CRC 0 packets output 0 bytes 0 output errors 0 collisions Console asynchronous mode is terminal Terminal baud rate is 9600 Related Commands Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay counters frame relay class dlci interface serial map class frame relay fragment show frame relay pvc brief R...

Page 454: ...se the no form of the command to disable the HTTP server Syntax ip http port port_number no ip http Parameters User Level admin Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value port Keyword that changes the default port of the HTTP server port_number The number of the new port for the HTTP server 1 65535 80 ...

Page 455: ...G450 001 super interface vlan 2 G450 001 if Vlan 2 icc vlan Related Commands ICC configuration show icc vlan Related Commands VLAN configuration clear port static vlan clear vlan interface vlan set port static vlan set port vlan set port vlan binding mode set trunk set vlan show cam vlan show port vlan binding mode show trunk show vlan show icc vlan Use the show icc vlan command to view the ICC VL...

Page 456: ...p errors command to set ICMP error messages to On Use the no form of this command to set ICMP error messages to Off Syntax no ip icmp errors User Level read write Context general Related Commands description interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface tunnel interface USB modem interface vlan ip address ip admin state ip broadcast address load i...

Page 457: ...epalive icmp command to enable the ICMP keepalive mechanism on an interface ICMP keepalive is a mechanism that reports on the status of an IP address and its next hop The destination interface is only declared to be alive if the next hop is also reachable This feature is critical for mechanisms such as policy based routing that must guarantee service on a particular path Use the no form of the com...

Page 458: ...ce address keepalive icmp success retries keepalive icmp timeout show keepalive icmp keepalive icmp failure retries Use the keepalive icmp failure retries command to set the number of consecutive failed keepalive packets necessary to set the interface s keepalive status as down Using this command without a parameter resets the failure retry value to the default value Syntax keepalive icmp failure ...

Page 459: ...ource address keepalive icmp success retries keepalive icmp timeout show keepalive icmp keepalive icmp interval Use the keepalive icmp interval command to set the interval in seconds between keepalive packets Using this command without a parameter resets the interval value to the default value Syntax keepalive icmp interval seconds Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value fai...

Page 460: ...e icmp timeout show keepalive icmp keepalive icmp source address Use the keepalive icmp source address command to set the source IP address of the keepalive packets Using this command without a parameter sets the source IP address to the default value which is the interface s primary IP address Syntax keepalive icmp source address source_ip_address Parameters User Level read write Context interfac...

Page 461: ...keepalive status as Up Using this command without a parameter resets the success retry value to the default value Syntax keepalive icmp success retries success retries number Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Example To set the number of consecutive successful keepalive packets necessary to set the interface s keepalive status as up to 2 G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 ...

Page 462: ...tEthernet Example To set the timeout for receiving the keepalive response to 1 second G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 keepalive icmp timeout 1 Related Commands keepalive icmp keepalive icmp failure retries keepalive icmp interval keepalive icmp source address keepalive icmp success retries show keepalive icmp show keepalive icmp Use the show keepalive icmp command to display information about the ex...

Page 463: ...uccess Retries 1 Failure Retries 4 Success Retries Counter 4 Failure Retries Counter 0 Related Commands keepalive icmp keepalive icmp failure retries keepalive icmp interval keepalive icmp source address keepalive icmp success retries keepalive icmp timeout IP interface configuration interface console Use the interface console command to enter the Console interface configuration mode The interface...

Page 464: ...et interface loopback interface serial interface tunnel interface USB modem interface vlan ip address ip admin state ip broadcast address load interval show ip interface brief interface dialer Use the interface dialer command to enter the Dialer interface context and create or configure the Dialer interface Use the no form of this command to delete the Dialer interface Syntax no interface dialer d...

Page 465: ... interface configuration mode Use the no form of this command to delete an IP interface If the specified interface does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Syntax no interface fastethernet module port ip_interface Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create a FastEthernet interface and enter its context G450 001 super interface fastethernet 10 2...

Page 466: ...guration mode Use the no form of this command to delete a Loopback interface or sub interface If the specified interface does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Syntax no interface loopback interface_number ip_interface Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create Loopback interface 1 and enter its configuration mode G450 001 super interface loo...

Page 467: ... of the command to delete the interface The no form can only be used to delete sub L3 and sub frame relay interfaces The command fails for USP interfaces and when higher or lower layers are defined for that interface Syntax no interface serial module if_number if_link_type For USP interfaces if_number has the syntax port ip_interface sub_interface ip_interface For DS1 interfaces if_number has the ...

Page 468: ... ip admin state ip broadcast address ip crypto group load interval show ip interface brief interface tunnel Use the interface tunnel command to enter Tunnel interface configuration mode Use the no form of this command to delete a Tunnel interface If the specified interface does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Syntax no interface tunnel tunnel_number Parameters Use...

Page 469: ...o enter the configuration context for the USB interface Use the no form of the command to reset the USB interface settings to their factory defaults The USB interface always exists but is disabled by default Use the no shutdown command to enable the interface The default settings for the USB modem interface are Syntax no interface usb modem User Level read write Context general Example To enter th...

Page 470: ...N interface configuration mode Use the no form of this command to delete the interface If the specified interface does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Syntax no interface vlan vlan_id ip_interface Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create VLAN 2 and enter its configuration context G450 001 super interface vlan 2 To create a sub interface 1...

Page 471: ...unk show vlan description interface Use the description command to configure a description for the current interface Use the no form of this command to clear the description of the current interface Syntax description string no description Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Console Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 USP...

Page 472: ...er Level read write Context Interface Console Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 USB modem Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To assign the IP address 192 168 22 33 with mask 255 255 255 0 to the FastEthernet interface G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 ip address 192 168 22 ...

Page 473: ...B L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 Example To set the administrative state of an IP interface to up G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 ip admin state up Related Commands description interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface tunne...

Page 474: ...address for the VLAN 1 interface to 192 168 255 255 G450 001 if Vlan 1 ip broadcast address 192 168 255 255 Related Commands description interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface tunnel interface USB modem interface vlan ip address ip admin state load interval show ip interface brief load interval Use the load interval command to set the load ...

Page 475: ...oad interval 60 Related Commands description interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface tunnel interface USB modem interface vlan ip address ip admin state ip broadcast address show ip interface brief show ip interface Use the show ip interface command to display information about an interface that has an IP address or about all interfaces that...

Page 476: ...interface Showing 2 Interfaces Serial 1 1 is down Internet address is 2 2 2 2 subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Advertised IPCP address Broadcast address is 2 2 2 255 Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Proxy ARP is disabled Primary management IP interface FastEthernet 10 2 is up Internet address is 149 49 75 71 subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Broadcast address is 149 49 75 255 Directed broadcast fo...

Page 477: ...erfaces show map class frame relay Status message Meaning RTP IP header compression is enabled and not compressing RTP header compression was enabled on this interface but is not actively compressing This can be caused by failure to negotiate RTP IP header compression is enabled and compressing RTP header compression was enabled on this interface and is functioning properly RTP IP header compressi...

Page 478: ...ation for all interfaces in this example PPP is activated on the FastEthernet interface and no IP address has been gathered G450 001 super show ip interface brief Showing 6 Interfaces Interface Address Mask Method Status FastEth 10 2 unassigned 32 IPCP down Vlan 10 10 0 0 1 8 manual up Vlan 20 20 0 0 1 8 manual up Serial 3 1 1 51 0 0 1 8 manual up Console 10 3 0 1 24 manual down Usb 10 3 0 3 24 ma...

Page 479: ...P down In this example an IP address has been gathered for the interface configured with DHCP client G450 001 super show ip interface brief Showing 1 Interface Interface Address Mask Method Status FastEth 10 2 10 0 0 40 24 DHCP up Related Commands description interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface tunnel interface USB modem interface vlan i...

Page 480: ...erface Vlan 2 changed state to administratively down Line protocol on Interface Vlan 2 changed state to down Related Commands WAN Ethernet port configuration autoneg duplex speed interface traffic shape rate Related Commands Modem configuration async mode interactive async mode terminal async reset modem Console port ip address ppp authentication speed PPP timeout absolute IP phone upgrades clear ...

Page 481: ...ommand to download a file from a remote FTP server to phone image bank A B C or D in the local gateway TFTP directory The G450 prompts you for a username and password when you enter a command to transfer a file using FTP Syntax copy ftp phone imageA phone imageB phone imageC phone imageD filename ip Context general Parameters User Level read write Example To download 4602sape1_8 bin from a remote ...

Page 482: ...ipt Use the copy ftp phone script command to download a file from a remote FTP server to phone script bank A or B on the local G450 TFTP directory The G450 prompts you for a username and password when you enter a command to transfer a file using FTP Syntax copy ftp phone scriptA phone scriptB filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To download 46xxupgrade txt from a re...

Page 483: ...s show upload phone script file status copy phone script ftp Use the copy phone script ftp command to upload a phone script file from the local G450 TFTP directory to a remote server using FTP Syntax copy phone scriptA phone scriptB phone scriptC phone scriptD ftp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload 46xxupgrade txt to the host at IP address 192 168 49 10 ...

Page 484: ...se the copy phone script scp command to upload a phone script file from the local G450 TFTP directory to a remote server using SCP Syntax copy phone scriptA phone scriptB phone scriptC phone scriptD scp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To copy 46xxupgrade txt to the host at IP address 192 168 49 10 using login anonymous G450 001 copy phone scriptA scp 46xxupgrad...

Page 485: ...ectory to a remote server using TFTP Syntax copy phone scriptA phone scriptB phone scriptC phone scriptD tftp filename ip Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload 46xxupgrade txt to the host at IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy phone scriptA tftp 46xxupgrade txt 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy announcement file usb copy ftp phone script copy scp phone scrip...

Page 486: ...e Context general Example To upload 46xxupgrade scr from the gateway to usb device0 G450 001 super copy phone scriptA usb 46xxupgrade scr usb device0 Related Commands backup config usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The logical name for the source f...

Page 487: ...firmation do you want to continue Y N y Username anonymous Password Beginning download operation This operation may take up to 20 seconds Please refrain from any other operation during this time Related Commands copy announcement file usb copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone script copy tftp phone image copy tftp phone script copy usb announcement file erase phone image ip tftp server file system s...

Page 488: ...8 bin from the host at IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy tftp phone imageA c IpphoneRelease 4602sape1_8 bin 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone script copy scp phone script copy tftp phone script copy usb announcement file erase phone image ip tftp server file system size show application memory show ip tftp server files show download phone script file sta...

Page 489: ... G450 001 super copy tftp phone scriptA file1 txt 135 64 100 205 Confirmation do you want to continue Y N y Related Commands copy announcement file usb copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone script copy scp phone script copy tftp phone image copy usb announcement file erase phone image ip tftp server file system size show application memory show ip tftp server files show download phone script file st...

Page 490: ...r Level read write Context general Example To download 4601dape1_82 bin from usb device0 to phone image bank A in the local gateway TFTP directory G450 001 super copy usb phone imageA usb device0 temp 4601dape1_82 bin Related Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Va...

Page 491: ...read write Context general Example To download 46xxupgrade scr from usb device0 to phone script bank A on the local gateway s TFTP directory G450 001 super copy usb phone scriptA usb device0 temp 46xxupgrade scr Related Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Values D...

Page 492: ... Beginning erase operation Done Related Commands copy ftp phone script copy scp phone script copy ftp phone image copy tftp phone image copy tftp phone script copy usb announcement file ip tftp server file system size show application memory show ip tftp server files show download phone script file status show upload phone script file status erase phone script Use the erase phone script command to...

Page 493: ... Use the no ip tftp server file system size command to reset the TFTP file system size to its default size Note Note It is possible to increase the memory allocation for the Sniffer cache application at the expense of the TFTP file system size The Sniffer cache application may have been configured to use up to 1000 Kb of the default TFTP allocation of 18560 Kb which would cause a conflict when set...

Page 494: ... phone script erase phone image show application memory show ip tftp server files show upload phone script file status ip tftp server show application memory Use the show application memory CLI command to show the configured and allocated application memory Syntax show application memory User Level read only Context general Example To show the configured and allocated application memory G450 001 s...

Page 495: ...ile status Context general User Level read only Example To display the status of the download of a phone image file G450 001 super show download phone image file status Module 10 Module 10 Source file start Destination file phone ImageA Host 135 64 102 64 Running state Idle Failure display null Last warning No warning Bytes Downloaded 7825 Related Commands copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone scrip...

Page 496: ...download operation no download operation was done If a download has been performed G450 001 show download phone script file status Module 10 Module 10 Source file home p46xx script Destination file phone ScriptA Host 135 64 103 116 Running state Idle Failure display null Last warning No warning Bytes Downloaded 27 Related Commands copy announcement file usb copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone scri...

Page 497: ...84 4602dbte1_8 bin phone imageA Ram 1048576 4602dape1_8 bin phone imageD Ram 2097152 Nv Ram Total bytes used 20480 Total bytes free 110592 Total bytes capacity fixed 131072 Ram Total bytes used 3166208 Total bytes free 2076672 Total bytes capacity Allocated 3166208 Total bytes capacity Configured 5242880 Related Commands copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone script copy running config startup config...

Page 498: ... TFTP server are counted as access violation errors Syntax show ip tftp server statistics User Level read only Context general Example To display TFTP server error counters G450 001 super show ip tftp server statistics Counter Value File downloads OK 0 File download Timeouts 0 Total TFTP server errors 0 Non defined TFTP errors 0 File not found errors 0 Access violation errors 0 Illegal TFTP operat...

Page 499: ...ad phone script file Syntax show upload phone script file status User Level read only Context general Example To display the upload phone script file If no upload has been performed G450 001 show upload phone script file status Module 10 Total TFTP server errors The total number of download upload errors Non defined TFTP errors The number of undefined errors File not found errors The number of fil...

Page 500: ...ement file usb copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone script copy running config startup config copy scp phone script copy tftp phone image copy tftp phone script copy usb announcement file erase phone image ip tftp server file system size show application memory show download phone script file status show ip tftp server files IP unnumbered ip unnumbered Use the ip unnumbered command to specify an in...

Page 501: ...index for the unnumbered interface configuration 1 255 interface type The interface type of the interface from which to borrow an IP address FastEthernet Serial Vlan Loopback Tunnel Dialer identifier The identifier depends on the interface type For FastEthernet module port For Serial module port channel group sub interface For Vlan vlan id For loopback loopback number For Tunnel tunnel number For ...

Page 502: ...p rtp header compression interface_type interface_number Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To clear header compression statistics for all interfaces G450 001 super clear ip rtp header compression Related Commands clear ip tcp header compression ip rtp compression connections ip rtp header compression ip rtp max period ip rtp max time ip rtp non tcp mode ip rtp port range ip t...

Page 503: ...erface_number Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To clear TCP compression statistics for all enabled interfaces G450 001 super clear ip tcp header compression Related Commands clear ip rtp header compression ip rtp compression connections ip rtp header compression ip rtp max period ip rtp max time ip rtp non tcp mode ip rtp port range ip tcp compression connections ip tcp head...

Page 504: ...rs User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 L3 Example To allow 48 RTP connections on the Serial interface G450 001 if Serial 3 1 1 1 ip rtp compression connections 48 Related Commands clear ip rtp header compression clear ip tcp header compression ip rtp header compression ip rtp max period ip r...

Page 505: ...using the ip tcp header compression command and not the ip rtp header compression command then no ip rtp header compression does not disable TCP compression on the interface Syntax no ip rtp header compression iphc format Parameters Note Note Non IETF encapsulation is compatible with other vendors User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value iphc format Keyword specify...

Page 506: ... non tcp mode ip rtp port range ip tcp compression connections ip tcp header compression show ip rtp header compression show ip rtp header compression brief show ip tcp header compression ip rtp max period Use the ip rtp max period command to set the maximum number of compressed headers that can be sent between full headers Syntax no ip rtp max period number Parameters User Level read write Contex...

Page 507: ...rtp header compression show ip rtp header compression brief show ip tcp header compression ip rtp max time Use the ip rtp max time command to set the maximum number of seconds between full headers Syntax no ip rtp max time number Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 L3 Example To al...

Page 508: ...C RFCs When set to non ietf the command performs IP header compression compatible with other vendors which do not strictly follow the RFCs Note Note IETF mode is incompatible with non IETF mode The default of the ip rtp non tcp mode command is non ietf Note Note Non IETF encapsulation is compatible with other vendors Syntax no ip rtp non tcp mode ietf non ietf Parameters User Level read write Cont...

Page 509: ...hould be used Syntax no ip rtp port range min max Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 L3 Example To specify that ports in the range 49 152 through 65535 are RTP ports G450 001 if Serial 3 1 1 1 ip rtp port range 49152 65535 Related Commands clear ip rtp header compression clear ip...

Page 510: ...S1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 L3 Example To specify that 20 TCP header compression connections are to be supported in the current interface G450 001 super if Dialer 1 ip tcp compression connections 20 Related Commands clear ip rtp header compression clear ip tcp header compression ip rtp compression connections ip rtp header compression ip rtp max period ip rtp max time ...

Page 511: ... Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display RTP compression statistics for all interfaces G450 001 super show ip rtp header compression IP RTP header compression statistics Interface Serial 3 1 1 1 Rcvd 0 Full Headers 0 Compressed 0 Errors Sent 9 Full Headers 394 Compressed 8274 Bytes Saved 14202 Bytes Sent 1 58 Efficiency Improvement Factor Connect Active 100 Rx Slots 100 ...

Page 512: ...e compression due to errors Sent Information on sent RTP packets as follows Full Headers the number of RTP packets with full headers sent Compressed the number of RTP packets with compressed headers sent Bytes Saved the total saving in bytes due to compression Bytes Sent the total number of bytes sent after compression Efficiency Improvement Factor the improvement factor calculated as bytes saved ...

Page 513: ...01 super show ip rtp header compression brief Interface Active Slots Max Max Packets Bytes Improvement Time Period Sent Saved Factor Serial 1 0 NO 16 5 256 0 0 1 00 Output fields Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interfaceName The name of the interface Name Description Interface The interface on which RTP header compressions is being applied Active Indicates whether RTP header co...

Page 514: ...terface If no interface is specified it shows TCP header compression statistics for all interfaces Syntax show ip tcp header compression interface_name Parameters User Level read only Context general Max Time The maximum number of seconds between two full header packets Max Period The maximum number of compressed packets sent between two full header packets Packets Sent The number of compressed pa...

Page 515: ...er of TCP packets with compressed headers received Errors the number of packets discarded during de compression due to errors Sent Information on sent TCP packets as follows Full Headers the number of TCP packets with full headers sent Compressed the number of TCP packets with compressed headers sent Bytes Saved the total saving in bytes due to compression Bytes Sent the total number of bytes sent...

Page 516: ...he show ip tcp header compression brief command to display a subset of TCP header compression statistics for a specific interface If no interface is specified it shows TCP header compression statistics for all interfaces Syntax show ip tcp header compression brief interface_name Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display concise TCP header compression statistics for all int...

Page 517: ...imary controller but is using Processor Ethernet exclusively with H 248 media gateways In this case the S8500 does not have an IPSI controlled gateway to use for its hardware license verification Note Note There must be at least one H 248 media gateway G700 G250 G350 G450 or IG550 for each LSP in the main server s network Only one LSP or primary controller can use the serial number of a media gate...

Page 518: ... ip license server Related Commands show ip icmp License file of gateway copy ftp license file Use the copy ftp license file command to download a VPN license from an FTP server Syntax copy ftp license file filename ip Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value filename The filename of the VPN license including the full path on the FTP server ip The IP address of the FTP server...

Page 519: ... show download license file status show license status show upload license file status copy license file ftp Use the copy license file ftp command to copy the license file to a remote server using FTP Syntax copy license file ftp filename ip Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To copy the license file vpn license to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy license...

Page 520: ...sing SCP Syntax copy license file scp filename ip Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To copy the license file vpn license to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy license file scp vpn license 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy ftp license file copy license file ftp copy license file tftp copy scp license file copy tftp license file show download license file ...

Page 521: ...ense 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy ftp license file copy license file ftp copy license file scp copy scp license file copy tftp license file show download license file status show license status show upload license file status copy license file usb Use the copy license file usb command to upload the license file from the gateway to the USB mass storage device Syntax copy license file usb sou...

Page 522: ...announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb copy scp license file Use the copy scp license file command to download a VPN license from an SCP server Syntax copy scp license file filename ip Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The logical name for the source file destination usb device The destination USB m...

Page 523: ... license file ftp copy license file scp copy license file tftp copy tftp license file show download license file status show license status show upload license file status copy tftp license file Use the copy tftp license file command to download a VPN license from a TFTP server Syntax copy tftp license file filename ip Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value filename The filename of th...

Page 524: ... license file scp copy license file tftp copy scp license file show download license file status show license status show upload license file status copy usb license file se the copy usb license file command to download a VPN license file from the external USB mass storage device to the gateway Syntax copy usb license file source usb device source filename Parameter Description Possible Values Def...

Page 525: ... restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb show download license file status Use the show download license file status command to display the status of the download process of the VPN license to the device Syntax show download license file status User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source usb device The source ...

Page 526: ...license file ftp copy license file scp copy license file tftp copy scp license file copy tftp license file show license status show upload license file status show license status Use the show license status command to display the status of the VPN license Syntax show license status User Level read only Context general Example To display the status of the VPN license G450 001 super show license sta...

Page 527: ...e an upload command has been issued and the upload succeeds G450 001 super Show upload license file status Module 10 Module 10 Source file license file Destination file 444 Host 135 64 102 114 Running state Idle Failure display null Last warning No warning In the following example an upload command has been issued but the upload fails G450 001 super Show upload license file status Module 10 Module...

Page 528: ...y license file ftp copy license file scp copy license file tftp copy scp license file copy tftp license file show download license file status show license status show upload license file status Link status show isdn bri link Use the show isdn bri link command to view the status of all BRI links on a media module Syntax show isdn bri link mmID Parameters User Level read only Context general Parame...

Page 529: ...ted Commands show isdn link summary show isdn pri link show isdn link summary Use the show isdn link summary command to view a summary of all ISDN links Syntax show isdn link summary User Level read only Context general Example To display information about all ISDN links G450 001 super show isdn link summary LOCATION TYPE NO OF LINKS UP MG NO LINK N A Related Commands show isdn bri link show isdn ...

Page 530: ...x show isdn pri link mmID Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display PRI link information for media module 1 G450 001 super show isdn pri link 1 LOCATION TYPE LINK ID DLCI SIDE STATE v1 NO LINK N A N A N A N A Related Commands show isdn bri link show isdn link summary Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mmID The Media Module ID ...

Page 531: ...le To set the re initialization delay to 5 seconds G450 001 super set lldp re init delay 5 Related Commands set lldp system control set lldp tx delay set lldp tx hold multiplier set lldp tx interval set port lldp set port lldp tlv show lldp show lldp config show port lldp config show port lldp vlan name config Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value value The delay in seconds from when...

Page 532: ...mands set lldp re init delay set lldp tx delay set lldp tx hold multiplier set lldp tx interval set port lldp set port lldp tlv show lldp show lldp config show port lldp config show port lldp vlan name config set lldp tx delay Use the set lldp tx delay command to set the minimal delay in seconds between successive LLDP frame transmissions on each port The tx delay should be in the range 1 TxDelay ...

Page 533: ... tx hold multiplier set lldp tx interval set port lldp set port lldp tlv show lldp show lldp config show port lldp config show port lldp vlan name config set lldp tx hold multiplier Use the set lldp tx hold multiplier command to set the multiplier on the interval that determines the actual TTL value sent in an LLDP frame The time to live value transmitted in TTL TLV by the device is expressed by t...

Page 534: ...rt lldp tlv show lldp show lldp config show port lldp config show port lldp vlan name config set lldp tx interval Use the set lldp tx interval command to configure the interval at which the device transmits LLDP frames Syntax set lldp tx interval seconds Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value number The multiplier 2 10 30 Parameter Description Possible...

Page 535: ...tatus Syntax set port lldp module port disable rx only tx only rx and tx Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of module 1 10 port Number of port s disable Keyword specifying that the LLDP agent will not transmit nor receive LLDP frames on this port tx only Keyword specifying that the LLDP agent will transmit LLDP frames on this port but...

Page 536: ... show lldp show lldp config show port lldp config show port lldp vlan name config set port lldp tlv Use the set port lldp tlv command to enable or disable the transmission of the optional TLVs on a per port basis The optional TLVs are Port description System name System description System capabilities Management address Port vlan id Vlan name Syntax set port lldp tlv module port enable disable tlv...

Page 537: ...s administratively assigned name system description an alphanumeric string that is the textual description of the system system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled management address identifies an address associated with the local LLDP agent that may be used to reach higher layer management entities port vlan id LAN po...

Page 538: ... lldp re init delay set lldp system control set lldp tx delay set lldp tx hold multiplier set lldp tx interval set port lldp show lldp show lldp config show port lldp config show port lldp vlan name config show lldp Use the show lldp command to display the LLDP information received on each port Syntax show lldp module port Parameters User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possi...

Page 539: ...ater bridge accessPoint router phone DOCSIS stationOnly Supported Enabled Management address subtype 1 ip value 135 64 103 155 subtype 6 mac value 23a54237bce8 PVID 50 Static VLANs 1 name V1 3 name voice vlan 5 name data e44 Port number 6 2 Output fields Name Description Port number The port receiving the information about the remote LLDP agent Remote index The index assigned to the remote LLDP ag...

Page 540: ...value of System Description TLV received on the port SysCaps Displays which capabilities the remote LLDP agent supports and which are enabled This information is based on the values in the System Capabilities TLV received on the port Management Address The Management Address of the remote agent connected to that port according to the Management Address TLV received on the port PVID The PVID value ...

Page 541: ...p config show port lldp vlan name config show port lldp config Use the show port lldp config command to display port level LLDP configuration Syntax show port lldp config module port Name Description Application status Whether the LLDP application is enabled or disabled Tx interval The interval at which the device transmits LLDP frames Tx hold multiplier The value of the multiplier on the TxInterv...

Page 542: ...lt Value module Number of module 1 10 port Number of port s Field Description Port Number The ports on which LLDP is configured Port Status The LLDP status of the port Possible values disable The LLDP agent neither transmits nor receives LLDP frames on this port tx only The LLDP agent transmits LLDP frames on this port but does not store any information about the remote systems connected rx only T...

Page 543: ...System Name Whether the System Name TLV is transmitted enable or not transmitted disable from the port System Description Whether the System Description TLV is transmitted enable or not transmitted disable from the port System Capability Whether the System Capability TLV is transmitted enable or not transmitted disable from the port Management Address Whether the Management Address TLV is transmit...

Page 544: ...x delay set lldp tx hold multiplier set lldp tx interval set port lldp set port lldp tlv show lldp show lldp config show port lldp config Logging clear logging file Use the clear logging file command to delete the message log file being stored in non volatile memory NVRAM including the history log and open a new empty log file Syntax clear logging file User Level read write Name Description Port M...

Page 545: ...ent show logging server condition show logging session condition clear logging server Use the clear logging server command to delete the specified Syslog message server from the Syslog server table Syntax clear logging server ip_address hostname Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To delete the Syslog message server with IP address 176 15 4 25 G450 001 super clear logging serv...

Page 546: ...ition set logging file Use the set logging file command to manage the logging of system messages to non volatile memory NVRAM Syntax set logging file enable disable set logging file condition all MsgFacility none severity Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Keyword specifying to enable logging to the file sink disable Keyword specifying to disable logging to the f...

Page 547: ...w logging session condition MsgFacility Apply the filter condition to a specific MsgFacility boot dialer policy snmp usb modem cascade dnsc ppp stp vlan cdr fan pppoe supply voice cli filesys qos switchfabric wan cna_tp ipsec router system config isakmp rtp stat tftp console lag saa threshold dhcps poe security tracker none Keyword specifying not to log messages to the file sink severity severity ...

Page 548: ...el read write Context general Example To define a Syslog server at IP address 147 2 3 66 G450 001 super set logging server 147 2 3 66 Related Commands clear logging file clear logging server set logging file set logging server access level set logging server condition set logging server enable disable set logging server facility set logging session show logging file content show logging server con...

Page 549: ...cess level for the Syslog server at IP address 172 5 16 33 G450 001 super set logging server access level read write 172 5 16 33 Related Commands clear logging file clear logging server set logging file set logging server set logging server condition set logging server enable disable set logging server facility set logging session show logging file content show logging server condition show loggin...

Page 550: ...lity Apply this filter to messages produced by a specific system boot dialer policy snmp usb modem cascade dnsc ppp stp vlan cdr fan pppoe supply voice cli filesys qos switchfabric wan cna_tp ipsec router system config isakmp rtp stat tftp console lag saa threshold dhcps poe security tracker none Keyword specifying not to log any messages severity Only log messages whose severity level is equal to...

Page 551: ... server enable disable set logging server facility set logging session show logging file content show logging server condition show logging session condition set logging server enable disable Use the set logging server enable or set logging server disable command to enable or disable a specific Syslog server Syntax set logging server enable disable ip_address Parameters User Level read write Param...

Page 552: ...ition set logging server facility Use the set logging server facility command to define an output facility for the specified Syslog server Syntax set logging server facility facility ip_address Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value facility The facility used in Syslog reports auth Authorization daemon Background System Process clkd Clock Daemon clkd2 Clock Daemon mail Elec...

Page 553: ...n set logging server enable disable set logging session show logging file content show logging server condition show logging session condition set logging session Use the set logging session command to manage message logging for the current console session Syntax set logging session enable disable condition all MsgFacility none severity Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Valu...

Page 554: ... snmp usb modem cascade dnsc ppp stp vlan cdr fan pppoe supply voice cli filesys qos switchfabric wan cna_tp ipsec router system config isakmp rtp stat tftp console lag saa threshold dhcps poe security tracker none Keyword specifying not to log messages to the console session severity Only log messages whose severity level is equal to or more severe than the specified level 0 is the highest severi...

Page 555: ...g file Use the show dev log file command to display the encrypted device s log file Syntax show dev log file User Level read write Context general show logging file condition Use the show logging file condition command to display all conditions that have been defined for the file output sink Syntax show logging file condition User Level read only Context general Example To show information about c...

Page 556: ...ile content Use the show logging file content command to output the messages in the log file to the CLI console The output is arranged with the most recent event first The content of the file is output according to the current filter settings and user access If no parameters are specified information for all message facilities and severities is displayed Syntax show logging file content severity a...

Page 557: ...t logging server condition set logging server enable disable set logging server facility set logging session show logging server condition show logging session condition show logging server condition Use the show logging server condition command to display the filter conditions that have been defined for the Syslog output sink If an IP address or hostname is not specified the configuration of all ...

Page 558: ...erity Override Kernel Critical Related Commands clear logging file clear logging server set logging file set logging server set logging server access level set logging server condition set logging server enable disable set logging server facility set logging session show logging file content show logging session condition show logging session condition Use the show logging session condition comman...

Page 559: ...ommand to change the default Master Key of the gateway used to encrypt gateway secrets in the gateway configuration file Note Note For security reasons it is recommended to define a new Master Key upon gateway installation Otherwise the default Master Key common to all gateways is used to encrypt gateway secrets Note Note Record the phrase you entered in the key config key password encryption comm...

Page 560: ...hrase Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To change the default Master Key of the gateway to o 3qfhSE Ydf1 G450 super key config key password encryption o 3qfhSE Ydfl Related Commands copy running config startup config Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value master key phrase The phrase used to generate the gateway s Master Key used for encrypting gateway secrets A stri...

Page 561: ...re provided all entries are removed Syntax clear mgc list ipaddress1 Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To remove two media gateway controllers from the list with IP addresses of 132 236 73 2 and 177 13 2 45 G450 001 super clear mgc list 132 236 73 2 177 13 2 45 Related Commands session set icc monitoring set mediaserver set mgc list set reset times show icc monitoring show me...

Page 562: ...ured to 5023 on the server For session mgc and session icc the server should allow access to the Telnet port 23 Syntax session mgc sat icc sat Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To establish a session with the active media gateway controller G450 001 super session mgc Related Commands clear mgc list set icc monitoring set mediaserver set mgc list set reset times show icc monit...

Page 563: ...vel read write Context general Related Commands clear mgc list session set mediaserver set mgc list set reset times show icc monitoring show mediaserver show mgc show mgc list set mediaserver Use the set mediaserver command to set server management ports Syntax set mediaserver ip_address1 ip_address2 port name Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Keyword specifying to enable ...

Page 564: ...ist set reset times show icc monitoring show mediaserver show mgc show mgc list set mgc list Use the set mgc list command to permit the creation of a list of valid Media Gateway Controller s The user can configure up to four IP addresses separated by commas Note Note The set mgc list command appends the new controllers to the existing list of controllers if any Syntax set mgc list ipaddress1 Param...

Page 565: ...mediaserver set reset times show icc monitoring show mediaserver show mgc show mgc list set reset times Use the set reset times command to set reset times Syntax set reset times total search primary search minutes transition point value Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ipaddress1 The IP address of the call controller Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value...

Page 566: ...ession set icc monitoring set mediaserver set mgc list show icc monitoring show mediaserver show mgc show mgc list show icc monitoring Use the show icc monitoring command to display the state of the icc monitoring process Syntax show icc monitoring User Level read only Context general minutes Number of minutes 1 60 total search 30 primary search 1 transition point Keyword specifying to set the ent...

Page 567: ... mediaserver Use the show mediaserver command to show server configuration information Syntax show mediaserver User Level read only Context general Example To display server configuration information G450 001 super show mediaserver MGC IP ADDRESS SAT IP ADDRESS SAT PORT SERVER IP ADDRESS SERVER PORT 135 8 65 107 135 8 65 107 5023 135 8 65 107 23 Related Commands clear mgc list session set icc moni...

Page 568: ...ered NO Active Controller 255 255 255 255 H248 Link Status DOWN H248 Link Error Code 0x0 CONFIGURED MGC HOST Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Related Commands Media Gateway Controller clear mgc list session set icc monitoring set mediaserver set mgc list set reset times show icc monitoring show mediaserver show mgc list Related Commands Device status set utilization cpu show...

Page 569: ...ether SLS survivability is enabled or disabled If SLS is enabled the following message appears at the end of the MGC list SLS If SLS is disabled the following message appears at the end of the MGC list SLS disabled Syntax show mgc list User Level read only Context general Example To display the list of media gateway controllers G450 001 super show mgc list CONFIGURED MGC HOST 135 8 48 220 135 34 5...

Page 570: ... gateway monitoring and recovery setup Syntax show recovery User Level read only Context general Example To show recovery information G450 001 super show recovery RECOVERY TIMES Primary Search 1 Total Search 30 Transition Point 1 Field Description CONFIGURED MGC HOST Lists five administered elements The first three are the IP addresses of the next available call controller in the administered list...

Page 571: ...t does not exist Use the no form of this command to set the Console parameters to their default values Syntax no interface console User Level read write Context general Example To enter the Console interface context G450 001 super interface console G450 001 if Console Related Commands Modem configuration async modem init string interface USB modem ppp chap secret Related Commands IP interface conf...

Page 572: ...ntext Interface Console Example To enter modem mode G450 001 super if Console async mode interactive Related Commands async mode terminal ip address ppp authentication shutdown interface speed PPP timeout absolute async mode terminal Use the async mode terminal command to disable interactive mode on the Console Syntax async mode terminal User Level read write Context Interface Console Example To d...

Page 573: ...tring modem_string no async modem init string Parameters User Level admin Context Interface Console USB modem Example To set the modem initialization string to AT FE0Q0V0X0 D2N0S37 6 G450 001 super if Console async modem init string AT FE0Q0V0X0 D2N0S37 6 Related Commands async mode interactive async mode terminal async reset modem Console port async reset modem USB port interface console interfac...

Page 574: ...ation shutdown interface speed PPP timeout absolute ip peer address Use the ip peer address command to change the IP address offered by the Console or USB interface to a requesting calling host during PPP IPCP connection establishment By default the interface offers its own IP address plus one Syntax ip peer address ip address Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Console USB modem Pa...

Page 575: ...a PPP server or client session Note Note The value set for ppp authentication affects both the USB interface and the Console interface simultaneously Syntax ppp authentication pap chap none ras Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value pap Keyword indicating the Password Authentication Protocol An unencrypted password is sent for authentication This is th...

Page 576: ...ut authentication shutdown USB modem timeout absolute Related Commands ASG authentication copy auth file ftp copy auth file scp copy auth file tftp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication response time login authentication services logi...

Page 577: ... modem init string interface console interface USB modem ppp timeout authentication Use the ppp timeout authentication command to set the maximum time to wait for an authentication response Syntax no ppp timeout authentication seconds Parameters User Level admin Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value chap_secret The shared secret string a string of 4 32 characters Parameter Descriptio...

Page 578: ...em init string async reset modem USB port ip peer address ppp authentication ppp chap secret shutdown USB modem timeout absolute show ppp authentication Use the show ppp authentication command to show the PPP authentication status Syntax show ppp authentication User Level read only Context Interface Console USB modem Example To show the PPP authentication status G450 001 super if CON show ppp auth...

Page 579: ... User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 USP FR L2 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 PPP L2 PPP L2 L3 VLAN L2 L2 L3 Console Loopback L2 L2 L3 Controller Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To shutdown the VLAN 2 interface G450 001 if Vlan 2 shutdown Interface Vlan 2 changed state to administratively down Line...

Page 580: ...Console Example To set the PPP baud rate to 9600 G450 001 if CON speed 9600 Related Commands async mode interactive async mode terminal ip address ppp authentication shutdown interface shutdown USB modem timeout absolute timeout absolute Use the timeout absolute command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session Syntax timeout absolute time...

Page 581: ...n shutdown interface shutdown USB modem speed PPP Modem configuration USB modem port interface usb modem Use the interface usb modem command to enter configuration context for the USB interface Use the no form of the command to reset the USB interface settings to their factory defaults The USB interface always exists but is disabled by default Use the no shutdown command to enable the interface Pa...

Page 582: ...interface tunnel interface vlan ip address ip admin state ip broadcast address load interval show ip interface brief Related Commands Modem configuration async modem init string interface console ppp chap secret async modem init string Use the async modem init string command to change the default modem initialization string Use the no form of the command to return the modem initialization string t...

Page 583: ...dem ip peer address ppp authentication shutdown interface shutdown USB modem timeout absolute async reset modem USB port Use the async reset modem command to reset the USB modem This command resets the PPP stack deactivates the DTR signal issues an ATZ reset command to the USB modem and reissues the Init string sequence You can perform this command from within an active PPP session to close the se...

Page 584: ...nterface offers its own IP address plus one Syntax ip peer address ip address Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Console USB modem Example To configure the USB interface to offer requesting calling hosts the IP address 192 168 49 2 G450 001 super if USB modem ip peer address 192 168 49 2 Related Commands async mode interactive async mode terminal ip address ppp authentication shutd...

Page 585: ...Level read write Context Interface Console USB modem Example To select the CHAP authentication protocol G450 001 if CON ppp authentication chap Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value pap Keyword indicating the Password Authentication Protocol An unencrypted password is sent for authentication This is the default chap Keyword indicating the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol A...

Page 586: ...th file tftp copy auth file usb copy ftp auth file copy scp auth file copy tftp auth file copy usb auth file erase auth file login authentication lockout login authentication local craft password login authentication response time login authentication services login show auth file info show download auth file status show login authentication show upload auth file status ppp chap secret Use the ppp...

Page 587: ...nterface USB modem ppp timeout authentication Use the ppp timeout authentication command to set the maximum time to wait for an authentication response Syntax no ppp timeout authentication seconds Parameters User Level admin Context Interface Console USB modem Example To specify a maximum wait of 20 seconds for an authentication response G450 001 super if CON ppp timeout authentication 20 Paramete...

Page 588: ...ication command to show the PPP authentication status Syntax show ppp authentication User Level read only Context Interface Console USB modem Example To show the PPP authentication status G450 001 super if USB modem show ppp authentication PAP sent username configured CHAP refuseCHAP hostname G450 CHAP password not configured Related Commands Modem configuration Console port interface console asyn...

Page 589: ...isabled by default The USB modem can only be connected after the interface is manually brought up using this command Syntax no shutdown User Level For shutdown read write For no shutdown admin Context interface USB modem Example To disable the USB interface G450 001 super if USB modem shutdown Related Commands async reset modem USB port ip address ppp authentication shutdown USB modem timeout abso...

Page 590: ...ress ppp authentication shutdown interface shutdown USB modem MSS notifications DoS classification Use the DoS classification command to label a user defined DoS attack classification to be reported in MSS notifications Syntax DoS classification na fraggle smurf ip spoofing other attack 100 other attack 101 other attack 102 other attack 103 other attack 104 other attack 105 Parameter Description P...

Page 591: ... user defined DoS classification label usually used to report reception of Smurf packets ip spoofing Keyword indicating the user defined DoS classification label usually used to report reception of IP spoofing packets other attack 100 Keyword indicating the user defined DoS classification label for any packet criteria other attack 101 Keyword indicating the user defined DoS classification label fo...

Page 592: ...size Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the echo request limit at 500 packets per second G450 001 super icmp in echo limit 500 set mss notification rate Use the set mss notification rate command to configure the rate at which the G450 sends Managed Security Services MSS notifications MSS notifications report suspected DoS attacks Syntax set mss notification rate second...

Page 593: ... config show mss notification rate Use the show mss notification rate command to show the interval time in seconds between MSS notifications Syntax show mss notification rate User Level read write Context general Example To show the interval time between MSS notifications G450 001 super show mss notification rate Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value seconds The interval in seconds b...

Page 594: ...enter configuration mode for a specific RTR if this RTR is currently probing an object You must first deactivate the RTR using the no rtr schedule command Note Note You cannot delete an RTR being monitored by an object tracker You must first remove the link between them using the no track track id command Syntax rtr rtr id Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To enter RTR confi...

Page 595: ... newly created RTRs You cannot use it for existing RTRs Syntax type echo protocol ipIcmpEcho ip address type tcpConnect dest ipaddr ip address dest port port Parameters User Level read write Context rtr Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value echo protocol ipIcmpEcho Keyword indicating to use the ICMP Echo operation for RTR probes tcpConnect Keyword indicating to use the TCP Connection...

Page 596: ...ig rtr tcp 2 Related Commands dscp table fail retries frequency next hop object tracking rtr source address success retries wait interval dscp object tracking Use the dscp command to set the DSCP value in the IP header of an RTR operation s probe packets Use the no form of this command to restore the value to the default value of 48 Note Note You must run the type command to define the RTR operati...

Page 597: ...s of an RTR operation from up to down Use the no form of this command to restore the value to the default Note Note You must run the type command to define the RTR operation s probing method and the IP address of the remote device before you can use the fail retries command Syntax no fail retries retries Parameters User Level read write Context rtr rtr type Example To set the fail retries value fo...

Page 598: ...P address of the remote device before you can use the frequency command Syntax no frequency frequency value seconds milliseconds Parameters User Level read write Context rtr rtr type Example To set the frequency value for RTR 1 to 20 seconds G450 001 config rtr icmp 1 frequency 20 seconds Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value frequency value A number indicating the frequency of RTR p...

Page 599: ...ing command This command is automatically removed from the configuration when specifying no next hop Syntax interface keepalive bypass logic User Level read write Context rtr rtr type Related Commands dscp object tracking fail retries frequency next hop object tracking rtr source address success retries type wait interval next hop object tracking Use the next hop command to specify the next hop fo...

Page 600: ...ace name mac address mac address ip ip address Parameters User Level read write Context rtr rtr type Examples To specify the next hop for interface FastEthernet 10 2 is MAC address 00 04 d0 af 12 04 G450 001 config rtr icmp 1 next hop FastEthernet 10 2 interface name 00 04 d0 af 12 04 mac address Related Commands dscp object tracking fail retries frequency interface keepalive bypass logic rtr sour...

Page 601: ...s command Note Note By default the source address command is disabled and RTR operations use the output interface s address Syntax no source address ip address Parameters User Level read write Context rtr rtr type Examples To set the source IP address for RTR operations as IP address 135 64 102 5 G450 001 config rtr icmp 1 source address 135 64 102 5 Related Commands dscp object tracking fail retr...

Page 602: ...method and the IP address of the remote device before you can use the success retries command Syntax no sucess retries retries Parameters User Level read write Context rtr rtr type Example To specify that 3 consecutive answered probes changes the status of an RTR operation device from down to up G450 001 config rtr icmp 1 success retries 3 Related Commands dscp object tracking fail retries frequen...

Page 603: ...ice before you can use the wait interval command Note Note The value of wait interval cannot be greater than the value of frequency Syntax no wait interval wait value seconds milliseconds Parameters User Level read write Context rtr rtr type Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value wait value A number indicating how long to wait for a response to the probe before considering it an unans...

Page 604: ...TR operation Use the no form of this command to stop an RTR operation Once you activate an RTR operation it starts probing immediately and continues running unless stopped by the no rtr schedule command Syntax rtr schedule rtr id start time now life forever no rtr schedule rtr id Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To activate RTR operation 1 G450 001 config rtr schedule 1 sta...

Page 605: ...ad only Context general Examples To display all RTR configuration values G450 001 super show rtr configuration RTR 1 Type ipIcmpEcho Target Address 2 2 2 1 Frequency Milliseconds 5000 Wait Interval Milliseconds 5000 Success Retries 1 Failure Retries 5 DSCP 48 Source Address 149 49 70 119 Next Hop interface FastEthernet 10 2 Next Hop Mac Address 00 04 0d 17 28 4b RTR 2 Type tcpConnect Target Addres...

Page 606: ...The amount of time in milliseconds to wait for a response to a probe before considering it an unanswered probe Success Retries The number of successive answered probes that will change the status of the RTR operation from down to up Failure Retries The number of successive unanswered probes that will change the status of the RTR operation from up to down DSCP The DSCP value of the probe packet Sou...

Page 607: ...rational status of all RTR operations G450 001 super show rtr operational state Wait Last Change ID Type Dest Address State S C F C Freq Inter S R F R d h m s 1 ipIcmpEcho 149 49 70 1 up 2 0 5000 1000 2 4 0 0 45 16 2 tcpConnect 135 64 102 105 up 1 0 1000 1000 1 5 No change 3 ipIcmpEcho 1 1 1 1 Inactive 0 0 1000 1000 2 4 No change 4 ipIcmpEcho 1 1 1 2 down 0 0 1000 1000 2 4 No change Output fields ...

Page 608: ...uccessive answered retries F C Failure Counter the number of successive unanswered retries Freq Frequency the time in milliseconds between successive RTRs Wait Inter Wait Interval the amount of time in milliseconds to wait for a response to a probe before considering it an unanswered probe S R Success Retries how many successive answered probes will change the status of the RTR operation from down...

Page 609: ...rack 1 Type rtr RTR id 1 State up Operational Status Last Change d h m s 0 0 0 2 Registered Applications FastEthernet 10 2 Output fields Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value object id Object tracker id 1 50 detail Keyword indicating to display detailed tracking information Field Description ID The ID of the object tracker Type The type of object tracker rtr or list RTR id The ID of ...

Page 610: ...ed Note Note You cannot delete an object tracker which is a member of a track list You must first remove the object tracker from the track list using the no object command You cannot delete an object tracker which was linked to an application using the keepalive track command You must first use the no keepalive track command to disable the link Syntax no track track id rtr rtr id no track track id...

Page 611: ...two interfaces up means that both interfaces are up and down means that either interface is down or Keyword specifying that the list is up if at least one object is up For example when tracking two interfaces up means that either interface is up and down means that both interfaces are down threshold count Keyword specifying that the state of the tracked list is based on a threshold calculation as ...

Page 612: ...he description command to enter a description of an object tracker Use the no form of this command to use the default description which is the object tracker s ID Syntax no description text Parameters User Level read write Context track rtr track list Examples To specify the description for a simple object tracker tracking a single RTR as track rtr 2 G450 001 config track rtr 1 description track r...

Page 613: ...cked objects Syntax no object track id not Parameters User Level read write Context track list Example To add object tracker 3 to track list 2 G450 001 config track list 2 object 3 Related Commands description object tracking threshold count track show track Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value track id The object tracker ID 1 50 not Keyword that reverses the output value of the obj...

Page 614: ...pecify that for list 5 the state will change from down to up if 4 or more hosts are up G450 001 config track list 5 threshold count up 4 To specify that for list 5 the state will change from up to down if 2 or less hosts are up G450 001 config track list 5 threshold count down 2 Related Commands description object tracking object track show track Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value...

Page 615: ...ead write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 USP FR L2 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 PPP L2 PPP L2 L3 VLAN L2 L2 L3 Loopback L2 L2 L3 Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To manually set the bandwidth for the VLAN interface to 100 KB s G450 001 if Vlan 1 bandwidth 100 Related Commands idle character ignore dcd interface se...

Page 616: ...L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To set the OSPF authentication for the FastEthernet interface as message digest G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 ip ospf authentication message digest Related Commands ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to mul...

Page 617: ...L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To set the authentication password for the VLAN 1 interface as my_pass G450 001 if Vlan 1 ip ospf authentication key my_pass Related Commands ip ospf authentication ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ip ospf priority ip...

Page 618: ...3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To set the cost metric for the VLAN 1 interface to 10 G450 001 if Vlan 1 ip ospf cost 10 Related Commands ip ospf authentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ip ospf priority ip ospf router id router ospf show ip ospf sh...

Page 619: ...stEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To specify an interval of 15 seconds to wait before declaring a neighbor dead G450 001 if Vlan 1 ip ospf dead interval 15 Related Commands ip ospf authentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ip ...

Page 620: ... PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To specify an interval of 5 seconds between hello packets G450 001 if Vlan 1 ip ospf hello interval 5 Related Commands ip ospf authentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ...

Page 621: ...thernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To specify the message digest key to be 3 with password mypwd G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 ip ospf message digest key 3 md5 mypwd Related Commands ip ospf authentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf network point to multipoint ip...

Page 622: ... L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To specify a network type of point to multipoint for the VLAN 1 interface G450 001 if Vlan 1 ip ospf network point to multipoint Related Commands ip ospf authentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf priority ip ospf router id router ospf show ip os...

Page 623: ...tion key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ip ospf router id router ospf show ip ospf show ip ospf database show ip ospf interface show ip ospf neighbor show ip protocols ip ospf router id Use the ip ospf router id command to configure the IP address of the router interface Syntax ip ospf router id router_id Par...

Page 624: ...spf network point to multipoint ip ospf priority router ospf show ip ospf show ip ospf database show ip ospf interface show ip ospf neighbor show ip protocols router ospf Use the router ospf command to enable OSPF protocol on the system and to enter the router configuration context Use the no form of this command to restore the default value and disable OSPF globally Syntax no router ospf User Lev...

Page 625: ...elete the area ID Syntax no area area_id stub Parameters User Level read write Context Router OSPF Example To configure an area for this OSPF interface with IP address 192 168 49 1 G450 001 router ospf area 192 168 49 1 To configure a stub area for this OSPF interface with IP address 176 1 13 12 G450 001 router ospf area 176 1 13 12 stub To remove the area with IP address 192 168 49 1 G450 001 rou...

Page 626: ...uter OSPF Example To set the default metric for redistributed routes to 50 G450 001 router ospf default metric 50 Related Commands area network OSPF passive interface redistribute OSPF timers spf network OSPF Use the network command to enable OSPF in this network Use the no form of this command to disable OSPF in this network The default value is disabled Syntax network net_addr wildcard_mask area...

Page 627: ... 0 255 255 area 0 0 0 0 Related Commands area default metric OSPF passive interface redistribute OSPF timers spf passive interface Use the passive interface command to suppress OSPF routing updates on the interface Syntax passive interface interface_name net_address Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value net_addr The IP address wildcard_mask The wildcard mask area Keyword specifying a...

Page 628: ...t metric OSPF network OSPF redistribute OSPF timers spf redistribute OSPF Use the redistribute command to redistribute routing information from other protocols into OSPF Use the no form of this command to disable redistribution by OSPF Syntax no redistribute protocol Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_name Name of the interface on which to suppress routing upd...

Page 629: ...ed Commands Route redistribution default metric interface route metric value timers spf Use the timers spf command to configure the delay between SPF calculations when using OSPF Use the no form of this command to restore the default value Syntax timers spf spf_holdtime no timers spf Parameters User Level read write Context Router ospf Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value spf_holdti...

Page 630: ...mple To display IP OSPF routing information G450 001 super show ip ospf Routing Process OSPF with ID 149 49 75 71 Number of areas in this router is 1 Area 0 0 0 0 Number of Interfaces in this area 0 SPF algorithm executed 1 times SPF hold time is 3 sec Related Commands ip ospf authentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest...

Page 631: ...outer types G450 001 super show ip ospf database Showing 1 rows Area Type LSA ID Router ID Sequence Age Cksm 0 0 0 0 RTR 149 49 75 71 149 49 75 71 80000001 567 139b Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value asbr summary Keyword specifying to display information about the autonomous system boundary router summary LSAs router Keyword specifying to display information about the router LSAs ...

Page 632: ...name is specified information for all interfaces is displayed Syntax show ip ospf interface interface_name Parameters Note Note To specify an interface name that includes spaces enclose the entire name in quotation marks for example New York User Level read only Context general Example To display OSPF information for all interfaces G450 001 super show ip ospf interface sh ip ospf interface Showing...

Page 633: ... ip ospf neighbor show ip protocols show ip ospf neighbor Use the show ip ospf neighbor command to display OSPF neighbor information for a specific interface If no interface name is specified information for all interfaces is displayed Syntax show ip ospf neighbor interface_name neighbor_id Parameters Note Note To specify an interface name that includes spaces enclose the entire name in quotation ...

Page 634: ...tication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ip ospf priority ip ospf router id router ospf show ip ospf show ip ospf database show ip ospf interface show ip protocols show ip protocols Use the show ip protocols command to display parameters and statistics of a given IP routing protocol ...

Page 635: ...thentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ip ospf priority ip ospf router id router ospf show ip ospf show ip ospf database show ip ospf interface show ip ospf neighbor Related Commands RIP ip distribution access list ip rip authentication key ip rip authentication mode ip rip def...

Page 636: ...list name show capture show capture buffer hex capture buffer size Use the capture buffer size command to specify the maximum size of the packet sniffing buffer Note Note To activate the change in buffer size you must run copy running config startup config and reboot the device Syntax capture buffer size buffer_size Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value non_cyclic Keyword specifying ...

Page 637: ...ame show capture show capture buffer hex capture filter group Use the capture filter group command to apply the specified filter to the packet sniffer When a capture filter is applied packets must match the criteria for a rule whose action is capture in order to be saved to the buffer Syntax capture filter group capture_list_id Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values...

Page 638: ...Use the capture interface command to specify the interface on which to run the packet sniffing service Use the no form of the command to run packet sniffing on all routing interfaces Syntax capture interface interface_name no capture interface Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To specify that the packet sniffing service run on interface FastEthernet 10 2 G450 001 super captu...

Page 639: ...rocess decrypted plaintext or encrypted cyphertext Syntax capture ipsec cyphertext plaintext no capture ipsec Parameters User Level read write Context general Related Commands capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size capture start capture stop capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list name show capture show capture buffer hex ...

Page 640: ...t sniffer as 68 bytes G450 001 super capture max frame size 68 Related Commands capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture ipsec capture start capture stop capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list name show capture show capture buffer hex capture start Use the capture start command to start the packet sniffing service Note Note The capture st...

Page 641: ...uper capture start The sniffing service is not available To re enable use the capture service command in supervisor mode Related Commands capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture ipsec capture max frame size capture stop capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list name show capture show capture buffer hex capture stop Use the capture stop comm...

Page 642: ...ffer size capture filter group capture interface capture ipsec capture max frame size capture start capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list name show capture show capture buffer hex capture service Use the capture service command to enable the packet sniffing service Use the no form of the command to disable the packet sniffing service By disabling the service the administrator can pr...

Page 643: ...e start capture stop clear capture buffer ip capture list name show capture show capture buffer hex clear capture buffer Use the clear capture buffer command to clear the packet sniffing buffer Syntax clear capture buffer User Level read write Context general Example To clear the packet sniffing buffer G450 001 super clear capture buffer Related Commands capture buffer mode capture buffer size cap...

Page 644: ...ameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload the packet sniffing buffer to g450 cap on the FTP server at IP address 135 64 10 33 G450 001 super copy capture file ftp g450 cap 135 64 10 33 Related Commands composite operation cookie copy capture file scp copy capture file tftp copy announcement file usb ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show ip capture lis...

Page 645: ...arameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload the packet sniffing buffer to g450 cap on the FTP server at IP address 135 64 10 33 G450 001 super copy capture file scp g450 cap 135 64 10 33 Related Commands composite operation cookie copy capture file ftp copy capture file tftp copy announcement file usb ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show ip capture l...

Page 646: ...rameters User Level read write Context general Example To upload the packet sniffing buffer to g450 cap on the TFTP server at IP address 135 64 10 33 G450 001 super copy capture file tftp g450 cap 135 64 10 33 Related Commands composite operation cookie copy capture file ftp copy capture file scp copy announcement file usb ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show ip capture l...

Page 647: ...t general Example To upload g450 cap from the gateway to usb device0 G450 001 super copy capture file usb g450 cap usb device0 Related Commands backup config usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The logical name for the source file destination usb dev...

Page 648: ...mple To enter the capture list 501 context G450 001 super ip capture list 501 G450 001 super Cap 501 Related Commands capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture ipsec capture max frame size capture start capture stop capture service clear capture buffer name show capture show capture buffer hex cookie Use the cookie command to set the cookie for the curr...

Page 649: ...fing owner show ip capture list show upload status Related Commands Policy composite operation dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show isdn bri link show list ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing Use the ip rule command to enter configuration mode for the specified rule If the specified rule...

Page 650: ...show upload status Related Commands Policy based routing name owner show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in name owner show composite operation show isdn bri link show list composite operation Use the composite operation command to edit the specified composite operation If the composite operation does not exist it is c...

Page 651: ...ation ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port destination ip Use the destination ip command to specify the destination IP address of packets to which the current rule applies U...

Page 652: ...d routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy based routing dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that specifies the current r...

Page 653: ...o specify the DSCP value that is set by the current policy operation Use the not form of the command to specify that the current operation set any DSCP value other than requested value Use the no form of the command to specify that the current operation set the DSCP value to any Note Note In crypto lists this command is only applicable for rules whose action is no protect Syntax dscp dscp_value an...

Page 654: ...lue G450 001 Crypto 901 ip rule 10 no dscp Related Commands Packet sniffing destination ip icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy based routing destination ip next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip fragmen...

Page 655: ...n bri link Related Commands Policy composite operation dscp policy destination ip icmp show composite operation show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port cos name Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address ...

Page 656: ...G450 001 ACL 333 ip rule 27 icmp Echo Reply To specify that rule 33 applies to any ICMP packet type except type 1 code 2 G450 001 ACL 333 ip rule 33 not icmp 1 2 Related Commands Policy based routing destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Parameter Description ...

Page 657: ...on port udp source port ip protocol Use the ip protocol command to specify that the current rule applies to packets having the specified IP protocol Use the no form of the command to set the IP protocol to its default value Use the not form of this command to specify that the current rule applies to all packets except those having the specified IP protocol Syntax not ip protocol protocol_name prot...

Page 658: ... ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port show ip rule Use the show ip rule command to display the attributes of a specific rule Leave the rule_number parameter blank to display all rules Syntax...

Page 659: ... Permit Any Dst Any Any No Dos classification ip spoofing Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit Any Dst Any Any No Related Commands Policy based routing ip pbr list destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list Related Commands Policy based routing ip pbr list ip rule ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show list ...

Page 660: ...tax not source ip host ip_address any ip_address wildcard no source ip Parameters User Level read write Context ip pbr list ip rule ip qos list ip rule ip capture list ip rule ip access control list ip rule ip crypto list ip rule Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that indicates a specific host IP address ip_address The IP address of the host any Keyword that indicate...

Page 661: ... operation show dscp table show isdn bri link tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip ip crypto list ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map show ip crypto list tcp destination port Use the tcp destination port command to define a destination port with the TCP protocol for which to apply ...

Page 662: ... port eq 300 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value any Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that ...

Page 663: ...dress protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp source port udp destination port udp source port tcp source port Use the tcp source port command to define a source port with the TCP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the command to set the TCP source port to any If the protocol is not TCP the protocol is set to TCP and the destination port is set to its defa...

Page 664: ... 95 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value any Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies...

Page 665: ...protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port udp destination port udp source port udp destination port Use the udp destination port command to define a destination port with the UDP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the command to set the UDP destination port to any If the protocol is not UDP the protocol is set to UDP and the source port is s...

Page 666: ...cifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specif...

Page 667: ...cket sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port tcp source port udp source port udp source port Use the udp source port command to define a source port with the UDP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the command to set the UDP source port to any If the protocol is...

Page 668: ...t specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number port_name The name of the port for which to apply the ...

Page 669: ...posite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port tcp source port udp desti...

Page 670: ...ed Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size capture start capture stop capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list show capture show capture buffer hex Related Commands Policy based routing ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy comp...

Page 671: ...atus Related Commands Policy based routing ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name show composite operation show isdn bri link show list show capture Use the show capture command to display information abou...

Page 672: ...ber of frames in buffer 200 Size of capture file 50 KB 5 Related Commands capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture ipsec capture max frame size capture start capture stop capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list name show capture buffer hex show capture buffer hex Use the show capture buffer hex command to display the contents of the packet...

Page 673: ...es 0x44 Capture Length 128 bytes 0x80 0000000 d4c3 b2a1 0200 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000010 ffff 0000 0100 0000 ea71 8e3e e6ed 0b00 q 0000020 e300 0000 e300 0000 ffff ffff ffff 0010 0000030 a498 97ab 0800 4500 00d5 3a7d 0000 8011 E 0000040 ea9a 0a00 0002 0a00 00ff 008a 008a 00c1 type q to quit or space key to continue Note Note The right side of the hex dump is the octets converted to characters...

Page 674: ... list composite operation cookie copy capture file ftp copy capture file scp copy capture file tftp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show upload status Related Commands Packet sniffing ip capture list ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port...

Page 675: ...ample To display information on the fan tray unit G450 001 super show platform fans FAN TRAY UNIT 1 Type G450 FAN TRAY Description G450 FAN TRAY UNIT Serial Number xxxxxxxxxxxxx HW Vintage 1 HW Suffix A Faults No Fault Messages Related Commands show platform power show platform mainboard show platform power Use the show platform power command to display the power supply configuration and parameter...

Page 676: ...age 0 HW Suffix A Faults No Fault Messages POWER SUPPLY UNIT 2 Type G450 PSU Description G450 FR Power Supply 350W Serial Number xxxxxxxxxxxxx HW Vintage 0 HW Suffix A Faults No Fault Messages Related Commands show platform fans show platform mainboard show platform mainboard Use the show platform mainboard command to display the main board parameters and the list of media gateway equipment instal...

Page 677: ...ion DDR SDRAM memory with ECC Serial Number xxxxxxxxxxxxx HW Vintage 0 Faults No Fault Messages MEMORY SOCKET 2 Type UNKNOWN Description UNKNOWN Serial Number UNKNOWN HW Vintage UNKNOWN Faults NOT PRESENT MEDIA SOCKET 1 Type MP80 VoIP DSP Module Description VoIP DSP resource with 80 channels Serial Number xxxxxxxxxxxxx HW Vintage 0 HW Suffix A Faults No Fault Messages MEDIA SOCKET 2 Type UNKNOWN D...

Page 678: ...n UNKNOWN Serial Number UNKNOWN HW Vintage UNKNOWN HW Suffix UNKNOWN FW Version UNKNOWN Faults Not Installed Related Commands show platform fans show platform power PMI pmi Use the pmi command to define this interface as the Primary Management Interface for the system Syntax pmi User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L3 USP PP...

Page 679: ... Vlan 1 pmi Related Commands show pmi show pmi Use the show pmi command to view the current Primary Management Interface Syntax show pmi User Level read only Context general Example To view information about the current PMI G450 001 super show pmi Active PMI interface Vlan 1 172 16 1 139 Configured PMI interface Vlan 1 172 16 1 139 Related Commands pmi ...

Page 680: ...orm of the command to delete an access control list Syntax no ip access control list list_number Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create access control list 320 and enter its configuration mode G450 001 super ip access control list 320 G450 001 ACL 320 Related Commands ip access group ip policy list copy ip qos group ip qos list ip simulate pre classification show ip acc...

Page 681: ...40 cookie 257 Related Commands Packet sniffing composite operation copy capture file ftp copy capture file scp copy capture file tftp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show ip capture list show upload status Related Commands Policy composite operation dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operat...

Page 682: ...o ip fragments in Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list Example To execute the Deny Notify composite operation when IP fragmentation packets are received G450 001 ACL 330 ip fragments in Deny Notify Related Commands cookie ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show isdn bri link show list Parameter Description...

Page 683: ...ng packets with an IP option are permitted G450 001 ACL 330 ip option in permit Related Commands cookie ip fragments in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show isdn bri link show list ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing Use the ip rule command to enter configuration mode for the specified rule If the specified rule does not exist...

Page 684: ... list show upload status Related Commands Policy based routing name owner show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in name owner show composite operation show isdn bri link show list composite operation Use the composite operation command to edit the specified composite operation If the composite operation does not exist i...

Page 685: ...destination ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port destination ip Use the destination ip command to specify the destination IP address of packets to which the current rule app...

Page 686: ...y based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy based routing dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that specifies the cur...

Page 687: ...t dscp policy Use the dscp command to specify the DSCP value that is set by the current policy operation Use the not form of the command to specify that the current operation set any DSCP value other than requested value Use the no form of the command to specify that the current operation set the DSCP value to no change Syntax dscp dscp_value no change not dscp dscp_value no dscp Parameters User L...

Page 688: ...rce port cos name fragment Use the fragment command to apply the current rule for non initial fragments only Note Note You cannot specify TCP UDP ports or ICMP code type for a rule when using the fragment command Syntax fragment User Level read write Context ip qos list composite operation ip capture list ip rule ip pbr list ip rule ip access control list ip rule ip qos list ip rule ip crypto list...

Page 689: ...o list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port icmp Use the icmp command to specify that the current rule applies to a specific type of ICMP packet Use the not form of this command to specify that the rule applies to all packets except those of the requested ICMP attribute If th...

Page 690: ...ce port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie destination ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ...

Page 691: ...ist ip rule ip qos list ip rule crypto list ip rule Note Note The not form of the command is not relevant in the crypto list ip rule context Example To specify that rule 22 applies to all packets having an IP protocol of ICMP G450 001 ACL 330 ip rule 22 ip protocol icmp To specify that rule 22 applies to all packets having any IP protocol except ICMP G450 001 ACL 330 ip rule 22 not ip protocol icm...

Page 692: ...information about a specific composite operation Use the command without a parameter to display information about all composite operations Syntax show composite operation composite_operation_index Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip access control list ip rule ip qos list ip qos list ip rule ip qos list composite operation Example To display information about composi...

Page 693: ...le command to display the attributes of a specific rule Leave the rule_number parameter blank to display all rules Syntax show ip rule rule_number Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip access control list ip rule ip qos list ip qos list ip rule ip capture list ip capture list ip rule ip pbr list ip pbr list ip rule Example To display information about ip rule 22 in acc...

Page 694: ... Commands Policy based routing ip pbr list destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list Related Commands Policy based routing ip pbr list ip rule ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy ...

Page 695: ...ad write Context ip pbr list ip rule ip qos list ip rule ip capture list ip rule ip access control list ip rule ip crypto list ip rule Note Note The not form of the command is not relevant in the crypto list ip rule context Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that indicates a specific host IP address ip_address The IP address of packets to which the rule is applied any...

Page 696: ...ink tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip ip crypto list ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map show ip crypto list tcp destination port Use the tcp destination port command to define a destination port with the TCP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the co...

Page 697: ...to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified nam...

Page 698: ...lated Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp source port udp destination port udp source port tcp established Use the tcp established command to specify that the current rule applies only to packets that are part of an establ...

Page 699: ...CP the protocol is set to TCP and the destination port is set to its default value Note Note Issuing this command also sets the protocol to be TCP if it is not already Syntax not tcp source port any eq lt gt port_name port_number range start_port end_port no tcp source port Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value any Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port with an...

Page 700: ...cy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip r...

Page 701: ...ocol to be UDP if it is not already Syntax not udp destination port any eq lt gt port_name port_number range start_port end_port no udp destination port Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value any Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specifi...

Page 702: ...ed routing destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp source port Related Commands Policy composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp source port Related Comm...

Page 703: ...his command also sets the protocol to be UDP if it is not already Syntax not udp source port any eq lt gt port_name port_number range start_port end_port no udp source port Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value any Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches ex...

Page 704: ...based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port Related Commands Policy composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port Related Commands VPN description ip rule...

Page 705: ... Admin13 G450 001 ACL 330 name Admin13 Related Commands DHCP server bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option Related Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size capture st...

Page 706: ...rent list Syntax owner owner_name Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip qos list ip capture list ip pbr list ip crypto list Example To set the owner of access control list 330 as MGAdmin3 G450 001 ACL 330 owner MGAdmin3 Related Commands Packet sniffing composite operation cookie copy capture file ftp copy capture file scp copy capture file tftp ip rule policy policy ba...

Page 707: ... Context ip access control list ip access control list ip rule ip qos list ip qos list ip rule ip qos list composite operation Example To display information about composite operation 13 G450 001 QoS 440 show composite operation 13 Index Name CoS DSCP Trust 13 HSPackets cos3 1 No Related Commands composite operation cookie destination ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based rout...

Page 708: ...r list ip pbr list ip rule Example To display information about ip rule 22 in access control list 320 G450 001 ACL 320 ip rule 22 show ip rule 22 I D Protocol IP Wildcard Port Operation 22 Ip Src Any permit Dst Any Following is an example of the output that appears if DoS classification is configured Index Protocol IP Wildcard Port Operation DSCP Fragment rule 123 Any Src 1 2 3 4 Host Any Permit A...

Page 709: ...g packet sniffing name owner show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port u...

Page 710: ...packet sniffing name owner show isdn bri link Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list ip access group Use the ip access group command to activate a specific Access Control list for a specific direction on the current...

Page 711: ...out Related Commands ip access control list ip policy list copy ip qos group ip qos list ip simulate pre classification show ip access control list show ip qos list ip policy list copy Use the ip policy list copy command to copy an existing policy list to a new list Note Note The source and destination lists must be of the same type For example you cannot copy an access control list to a QoS list ...

Page 712: ... ip access control list show ip qos list ip simulate Use the ip simulate command to test the action of a policy on a simulated packet Syntax ip simulate policy_list_number direction priority dscp_value source destination protocol source_port destination_port established Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source_ list The list number of the policy list to copy For access control li...

Page 713: ...2 67 85 12 to IP address 192 67 54 25 G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 ip simulate 330 in 192 67 85 12 192 67 54 25 ip Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value policy_list_ number The number of the policy 1 999 For PBR 1 For ACL 300 For Qos 400 For Capture 500 direction The direction in out priority The priority fwd0 fwd7 dscp_value The DSCP value dscp0 dscp63 source The source IP address ...

Page 714: ...ut detailed Parameters User Level read write Context general interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 VLAN L2 L2 L3 Loopback L2 L2 L3 Tunnel L2 L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list_ number The access control list to display all Keyword specifying to display attributes for all ac...

Page 715: ... of access control list 330 G450 001 super show ip access control list 330 Index Name Owner 330 list 330 other ip options Permit ip fragments Permit Index Protocol IP Wildcard Port Operation 22 tcp Src Any Any Permit Dst Any Any Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit Dst Any Any To display detailed information about all access control lists on the VLAN 1 interface G450 001 if Vlan 1 show ip access control l...

Page 716: ...rc 3 3 3 3 Host Any Permit Any Dst Any Any No Dos classification ip spoofing Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit Any Dst Any Any No Related Commands ip access control list ip access group ip policy list copy ip qos group ip qos list ip simulate pre classification show ip qos list DoS classification Policy QoS lists ip policy list copy Use the ip policy list copy command to copy an existing policy list to...

Page 717: ...access control list show ip qos list ip qos group Use the ip qos group command to activate the specified QoS list on the given interface You must first create the QoS list using the ip qos list command Syntax no ip qos group policy_list direction Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source_ list The list number of the policy list to copy For access control lists 300 399 For QoS list...

Page 718: ...ds ip access control list ip access group ip policy list copy ip qos list ip simulate pre classification show ip access control list show ip qos list ip qos list Use the ip qos list command to enter configuration mode for the specified QoS list If the QoS list does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Syntax ip qos list list_number Parameters Parameter Description Poss...

Page 719: ...e classification show ip access control list show ip qos list composite operation Use the composite operation command to edit the specified composite operation If the composite operation does not exist it is created Syntax composite operation index Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip rule ip capture list ip rule ip qos list ip qos list dscp table ip qos list ip rule ...

Page 720: ...olicy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port cos Use the cos command to set the priority value for the current composite operation Use the no form of the command to reset the priority to the default value of no change Syn...

Page 721: ...that the current operation set any DSCP value other than requested value Use the no form of the command to specify that the current operation set the DSCP value to no change Syntax dscp dscp_value no change not dscp dscp_value no dscp Parameters User Level read write Context ip qos list composite operation Example To specify that composite operation 17 sets the DSCP value of packets to 55 G450 001...

Page 722: ...ed list or operation Use the no form of the command to return the name to the default value Syntax no name name Parameters User Level read write Context dhcp pool dhcp pool vendor specific dhcp pool option ip qos list ip qos list dscp table ip qos list composite operation ip access control list ip next hop list ip capture list ip pbr list ip crypto list Example To specify the name of access contro...

Page 723: ...r show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list cos dscp policy show composite operation Use the show composite operation command to display information about a specific composite operation Use the command wit...

Page 724: ...on port udp source port cos dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN name cookie Use the cookie command to set the cookie for the current list Syntax cookie cookie_number Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip qos list ip capture list ip pbr list ip crypto list Example To specify the cookie for QoS list 440 as 257 G450 001 QoS 440 cookie 257 Related Commands Packet...

Page 725: ...he current QoS list If the specified DSCP table entry does not exist the system creates it Syntax dscp table dscp_value Parameters User Level read write Context ip qos list capture list Example To enter configuration mode for DSCP table entry 21 G450 001 QoS 440 dscp table 21 Related Commands composite operation cookie ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show composite operat...

Page 726: ...01 QoS 440 composite operation 13 G450 001 QoS 440 CompOp 13 Related Commands Packet sniffing cookie copy capture file ftp copy capture file scp copy capture file tftp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show ip capture list show upload status Related Commands Policy cookie destination ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name own...

Page 727: ...n13 G450 001 ACL 330 name Admin13 Related Commands DHCP server bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option Related Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size capture start c...

Page 728: ...le Use the show dscp table command to display a specific entry in the DSCP table If no DSCP index is specified the entire DSCP table is displayed Syntax show dscp table index Parameters User Level read write Context ip qos list ip qos list dscp table ip qos list ip rule Example To display the entire DSCP table G450 001 QoS 444 show dscp table Trust configuration is trust cos DSCP Action Precedence...

Page 729: ...r show composite operation show isdn bri link show list ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing Use the ip rule command to enter configuration mode for the specified rule If the specified rule does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Syntax ip rule rule_index default Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip qos list ip capture lis...

Page 730: ...link show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in name owner show composite operation show isdn bri link show list composite operation Use the composite operation command to edit the specified composite operation If the composite operation does not exist it is created Syntax composite operation index Parameters User Level read write Context i...

Page 731: ...ion show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port destination ip Use the destination ip command to specify the destination IP address of packets to which the current rule applies Use the not form of the command to specify that the current rule applies to all packets that do not have this destination ...

Page 732: ... capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy based routing dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Related Commands Policy composite operation dscp policy show dscp table icmp show composite operation show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination ...

Page 733: ... command to specify that the current operation set the DSCP value to no change Syntax dscp dscp_value no change not dscp dscp_value no dscp Parameters User Level read write Context ip qos list composite operation Example To specify that composite operation 17 sets the DSCP value of packets to 55 G450 001 QoS 440 CompOp 17 dscp 55 To specify that composite operation 17 sets the DSCP value of packet...

Page 734: ...ule ip access control list ip rule ip qos list ip rule ip crypto list ip rule Example To apply the rule for non initial fragments G450 001 super Capture 520 ip rule 15 fragment Related Commands Packet sniffing dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN destination ip icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related...

Page 735: ...CMP attribute If the IP protocol is not ICMP it is set to ICMP Use the no form of the command to specify that the current rule applies to any type of ICMP packet Note Note The icmp command also sets the IP protocol to ICMP Syntax not icmp name icmp_type icmp_code no icmp Parameters User Level read write Context ip capture list ip rule ip access control list ip rule ip pbr list ip rule ip qos list ...

Page 736: ... policy based routing packet sniffing owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN fragment ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map sou...

Page 737: ...l except ICMP G450 001 ACL 330 ip rule 22 not ip protocol icmp Related Commands destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip rule VPN local ...

Page 738: ...qos list composite operation Example To display information about composite operation 13 G450 001 QoS 440 show composite operation 13 Index Name CoS DSCP Trust 13 HSPackets cos3 1 No Related Commands composite operation cookie destination ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source i...

Page 739: ...SCP table G450 001 QoS 444 show dscp table Trust configuration is trust cos DSCP Action Precedence Name 0 No Change mandatory DSCP 0 1 No Change mandatory DSCP 1 2 No Change mandatory DSCP 2 3 No Change mandatory DSCP 3 4 No Change mandatory DSCP 4 5 No Change mandatory DSCP 5 6 No Change mandatory DSCP 6 7 No Change mandatory DSCP 7 8 No Change mandatory DSCP 8 9 No Change mandatory DSCP 9 10 No ...

Page 740: ... to display all rules Syntax show ip rule rule_number Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip access control list ip rule ip qos list ip qos list ip rule ip capture list ip capture list ip rule ip pbr list ip pbr list ip rule Example To display information about ip rule 22 in access control list 320 G450 001 ACL 320 ip rule 22 show ip rule 22 I D Protocol IP Wildcard Por...

Page 741: ...cy based routing ip pbr list destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list Related Commands Policy based routing ip pbr list ip rule ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing ...

Page 742: ... read write Context ip pbr list ip rule ip qos list ip rule ip capture list ip rule ip access control list ip rule ip crypto list ip rule Note Note The not form of the command is not relevant in the crypto list ip rule context Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that indicates a specific host IP address ip_address The IP address of packets to which the rule is applied ...

Page 743: ...ation port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip ip crypto list ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map show ip crypto list tcp destination port Use the tcp destination port command to define a destination port with the TCP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the command to set t...

Page 744: ...es to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified ...

Page 745: ...et sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp source port udp destination port udp source port tcp source port Use the tcp source port command to define a source port with the TCP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the command to set the TCP source port to any If the protocol is n...

Page 746: ...t gt 95 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value any Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that speci...

Page 747: ... protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port udp destination port udp source port udp destination port Use the udp destination port command to define a destination port with the UDP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the command to set the UDP destination port to any If the protocol is not UDP the protocol is set to UDP and the source port is ...

Page 748: ...cifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specif...

Page 749: ...cket sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port tcp source port udp source port udp source port Use the udp source port command to define a source port with the UDP protocol for which to apply the current rule Use the no form of the command to set the UDP source port to any If the protocol is...

Page 750: ...t specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number port_name The name of the port for which to apply the ...

Page 751: ...posite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN fragment icmp ip crypto list ip protocol ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list tcp destination port tcp source port udp desti...

Page 752: ...ted Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size capture start capture stop capture service clear capture buffer ip capture list show capture show capture buffer hex Related Commands Policy based routing ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy com...

Page 753: ...pture list show upload status Related Commands Policy based routing ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name show isdn bri link show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name show composite operation show isdn bri link show list pre classification Use the pre classificatio...

Page 754: ...show ip qos list show composite operation Use the show composite operation command to display information about a specific composite operation Use the command without a parameter to display information about all composite operations Syntax show composite operation composite_operation_index Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value tag_type The type of priority tag used with da...

Page 755: ...ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port cos dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN name show dscp table Use the show dscp table command to display a specific entry in the DSCP tabl...

Page 756: ... DSCP 4 5 No Change mandatory DSCP 5 6 No Change mandatory DSCP 6 7 No Change mandatory DSCP 7 8 No Change mandatory DSCP 8 9 No Change mandatory DSCP 9 10 No Change mandatory DSCP 10 11 No Change mandatory DSCP 11 63 No Change mandatory DSCP 63 Related Commands composite operation cookie dscp table ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show isdn b...

Page 757: ...on 22 Ip Src Any permit Dst Any Following is an example of the output that appears if DoS classification is configured Index Protocol IP Wildcard Port Operation DSCP Fragment rule 123 Any Src 1 2 3 4 Host Any Permit Any Dst Any Any No Dos classification other attack 234 Any Src 2 2 2 2 Host Any Permit Any Dst Any Any No Dos classification fraggle 345 Any Src 3 3 3 3 Host Any Permit Any Dst Any Any...

Page 758: ...g packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands DoS DoS classification show ip access control list show list Use the show list command to display information about a given list Syn...

Page 759: ...e operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list ip simulate Use the ip simulate command to test the action of a policy on a simulated packet Syntax ip simulate policy_list_number direction priority dscp_value source destination protocol source_port destination_port established Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value policy_list_ number The number of the policy 1 999...

Page 760: ... Related Commands ip access control list ip access group ip policy list copy ip qos group ip qos list pre classification show ip access control list show ip qos list show ip qos list Use the show ip qos list command to display the attributes about a specific QoS list or all QoS lists for the current interface Note Note To specify an interface name that includes spaces enclose the entire name in qu...

Page 761: ... show ip qos list all List Number 400 List Name Default QoS List Default Action No Change Owner other List Trust trust cos Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list_number The QoS list to display all Keyword specifying to display all QoS lists active list in Keyword specifying to display lists for the in direction active list out Keyword specifying to display lists for the out direc...

Page 762: ... Dst Any Any Related Commands ip access control list ip access group ip policy list copy ip qos group ip qos list ip simulate pre classification show ip access control list interface fastethernet interface serial set qos bearer set qos bearer set qos control set qos signal show queue show voip parameters Policy based routing ip next hop list Use the ip next hop list command to enter the context of...

Page 763: ... lists show ip active pbr lists show ip pbr list next hop interface Use the next hop interface command to add the specified interface to the next hop path for the current next hop list Use the no form of this command to delete an interface from the next hop list Syntax next hop interface index interface_name track track index no next hop interface index Parameter Description Possible Values Defaul...

Page 764: ...ed Commands next hop ip show next hop Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value index The index in the array of next hops belonging to the specific next hop list 1 20 interface_name The specified next hop interface name The layer2 interfaces Serial GRE Tunnel Dialer null0 WAN FastEthernet running PPPoE or DHCP client track Keyword that applies tracking to monitor the route Note Object tr...

Page 765: ... write Context ip next hop list Example To add the IP address of 149 49 200 2 to the next hop path for the current next hop list applying object tracker 3 G450 001 super next hop ip 2 149 49 200 2 track 3 Related Commands next hop interface show next hop Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value index The index in the array of next hops belonging to the specific next hop list 1 20 ip_add...

Page 766: ...t G450 001 super next hop list 1 show next hop List index 1 List name NH1 Index Interface Next Hop Status Track Track Status 1 Vlan 78 149 49 78 9 up 1 up 2 Tunnel 7 7 0 0 2 up N A N A Related Commands next hop interface next hop ip ip pbr group Use the ip pbr group command to apply the specified PBR list to the current interface The PBR list is applied to ingress packets only Use the no form of t...

Page 767: ... next hop list ip pbr list show ip active lists show ip active pbr lists show ip pbr list ip pbr list Use the ip pbr list command to enter context of the specified PBR list If the list does not exist it is created Use the no form of the command to suspend the specified PBR list Syntax ip pbr list list_number Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list_number The list number...

Page 768: ...ctive lists show ip active pbr lists show ip pbr list cookie Use the cookie command to set the cookie for the current list Syntax cookie cookie_number Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip qos list ip capture list ip pbr list ip crypto list Example To specify the cookie for QoS list 440 as 257 G450 001 QoS 440 cookie 257 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Va...

Page 769: ... type of ICMP packet Use the not form of this command to specify that the rule applies to all packets except those of the requested ICMP attribute If the IP protocol is not ICMP it is set to ICMP Use the no form of the command to specify that the current rule applies to any type of ICMP packet Note Note The icmp command also sets the IP protocol to ICMP Syntax not icmp name icmp_type icmp_code no ...

Page 770: ...estination port udp source port Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie destination ip dscp policy dscp table icmp ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule desti...

Page 771: ...ri link show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in name owner show composite operation show isdn bri link show list destination ip Use the destination ip command to specify the destination IP address of packets to which the current rule applies Use the not form of the command to specify that the current rule applies to all packets that do n...

Page 772: ...50 001 QoS 460 rule 17 not destination ip 176 13 0 0 0 0 255 255 Related Commands Packet sniffing dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that specifies the current rule applies to a single host IP address i...

Page 773: ...e ip show ip crypto list dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN Use the dscp command to specify the DSCP value that is set by the current policy operation Use the not form of the command to specify that the current operation set any DSCP value other than this value Use the no form of the command to specify that the current operation set the DSCP value to any Note Note In crypto lists this c...

Page 774: ...1 match any DSCP value G450 001 Crypto 901 ip rule 10 not dscp 56 Related Commands Packet sniffing destination ip icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy based routing destination ip next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Related Commands VPN description ip rule...

Page 775: ...ng packet sniffing VPN destination ip next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Related Commands Policy composite operation dscp policy destination ip icmp show composite operation show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port cos name Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp p...

Page 776: ...450 001 ACL 330 ip rule 22 ip protocol icmp To specify that rule 22 applies to all packets having any IP protocol except ICMP G450 001 ACL 330 ip rule 22 not ip protocol icmp Related Commands destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip r...

Page 777: ...be used for the current rule G450 001 super next hop list 1 G450 001 super next hop DBR Related Commands destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list Keyword indicating that a next hop list will be specified to be used for the current rule list_number The next hop list to be used for t...

Page 778: ...entire next hop list G450 001 super show ip next hop list all Index Name 1 list 1 3 list 3 To show the details of entry 3 in the next hop list G450 001 super show ip next hop list 3 next hop list does not exist Related Commands destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show isdn bri link Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value next_hop_n...

Page 779: ...r list ip rule Example To display information about ip rule 22 in access control list 320 G450 001 ACL 320 ip rule 22 show ip rule 22 I D Protocol IP Wildcard Port Operation 22 Ip Src Any permit Dst Any Following is an example of the output that appears if DoS classification is configured Index Protocol IP Wildcard Port Operation DSCP Fragment rule 123 Any Src 1 2 3 4 Host Any Permit Any Dst Any A...

Page 780: ...tion in ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link show list composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands DoS DoS classification show ip access control list source ip Use the source ip command to ...

Page 781: ... 104 102 G450 001 QoS 460 rule 22 not source ip host 135 64 104 102 Related Commands Policy based routing destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that indicates a specific host IP address ip_address The...

Page 782: ... TCP destination port to any If the protocol is not TCP the protocol is set to TCP and the source port is set to its default value Use the not form of the command to specify that the rule applies to all TCP ports other than the requested ports If the protocol is not TCP the protocol is set to TCP and the source port is set to its default value Note Note Issuing this command also sets the protocol ...

Page 783: ...mmands Policy based routing destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp source port udp destination port udp source port lt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number gt Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than th...

Page 784: ...TCP source port to any If the protocol is not TCP the protocol is set to TCP and the destination port is set to its default value Use the not form of the command to specify that the rule applies to all TCP ports other than the requested ports If the protocol is not TCP the protocol is set to TCP and the destination port is set to its default value Note Note Issuing this command also sets the proto...

Page 785: ... policy based routing packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands Policy composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established udp destination port udp source port gt Keyword that specifies to app...

Page 786: ...pplies to all UDP ports other than the requested ports If the protocol is not UDP the protocol is set to UDP and the source port is set to its default value Note Note Issuing this command also sets the protocol to be UDP if it is not already Syntax udp destination port any eq lt gt port_name port_number range start_port end_port no udp destination port Parameters Parameter Description Possible Val...

Page 787: ...mp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp source port Related Commands Policy composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip dscp policy based routing pack...

Page 788: ...suing this command also sets the protocol to be UDP if it is not already Syntax udp source port any eq lt gt port_name port_number range start_port end_port no udp source port Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value any Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port with any name or number eq Keyword that specifies to apply the rule to a port whose name or number matches...

Page 789: ...g packet sniffing VPN icmp ip protocol show ip capture list source ip tcp destination port tcp source port udp destination port Related Commands Policy composite operation destination ip dscp policy icmp show composite operation show dscp table show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination...

Page 790: ...30 as Admin13 G450 001 ACL 330 name Admin13 Related Commands DHCP server bootfile client identifier default router dns server domain name end ip addr lease next server option server name show ip dhcp pool start ip addr subnet mask value vendor specific option Related Commands Packet sniffing capture buffer mode capture buffer size capture filter group capture interface capture max frame size captu...

Page 791: ...ntax owner owner_name Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip qos list ip capture list ip pbr list ip crypto list Example To set the owner of access control list 330 as MGAdmin3 G450 001 ACL 330 owner MGAdmin3 Related Commands Packet sniffing composite operation cookie copy capture file ftp copy capture file scp copy capture file tftp ip rule policy policy based routing ...

Page 792: ...r parameter blank to display all rules Syntax show ip rule rule_number Parameters User Level read write Context ip access control list ip access control list ip rule ip qos list ip qos list ip rule ip capture list ip capture list ip rule ip pbr list ip pbr list ip rule Example To display information about ip rule 22 in access control list 320 G450 001 ACL 320 ip rule 22 show ip rule 22 I D Protoco...

Page 793: ...licy based routing ip pbr list destination ip dscp policy based routing packet sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list Related Commands Policy based routing ip pbr list ip rule ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show list Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ip option in ip rule policy policy based routin...

Page 794: ...t Index Name Owner 330 SplitPriority Admin ip options Permit ip fragments Permit Index Protocol IP Wildcard Port Operation 22 tcp Src Any Any Permit Dst Any Any Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit Dst Any Any Related Commands Policy based routing ip rule policy policy based routing packet sniffing name owner show isdn bri link Related Commands Policy composite operation cookie dscp table ip fragments in ...

Page 795: ...erface Name Dir Type Idx List Name FastEthernet 10 2 In ACL 300 Default ACL List FastEthernet 10 2 In QoS 400 Default QoS List FastEthernet 10 2 Out ACL 300 Default ACL List FastEthernet 10 2 Out QoS 400 Default QoS List FastEthernet 10 2 Crypto 901 list 901 Vlan 1 In ACL 300 Default ACL List Vlan 1 In QoS 400 Default QoS List Vlan 1 Out ACL 300 Default ACL List Vlan 1 Out QoS 400 Default QoS List...

Page 796: ...ace Name The name of the interface on which the list is operating Dir The direction of traffic on which the list is operating Options are In The list is operating on incoming traffic Out The list is operating on outgoing traffic Type The type of list Options are ACL Access Control List Controls which packets are authorized to pass through the interface QoS QoS List Can change the value of the QoS ...

Page 797: ...rmation about all PBR lists G450 001 super show ip active pbr lists Interface Name Index List Name Vlan 1 801 Voice PBR List Vlan 2 803 Data PBR List Related Commands ip next hop list ip pbr group ip pbr list show ip active lists show ip pbr list show ip pbr list Use the show ip pbr list command to display information about the specified pbr list Syntax show ip pbr list list_number all detailed Pa...

Page 798: ...ow ip pbr list 801 detailed Related Commands ip next hop list ip pbr group ip pbr list show ip active lists show ip active pbr lists Port classification set port classification Use the set port classification command to set the port classification to either regular or valuable Any change in the Spanning Tree state from Forwarding for a valuable port will erase all learned MAC addresses in the medi...

Page 799: ...ssification command to display a port s classification If no port is specified information for all ports is displayed Syntax show port classification module port Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module The module number port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for both ETH LAN ports 5 6 on the front panel ...

Page 800: ...mands set port classification Port mirroring clear port mirror Use the clear port mirror command to delete a port mirroring pair Syntax clear port mirror source_module source_port dest_module dest_port Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for...

Page 801: ...ing source destination pair The second port receives a copy of all packets sent to and received by the first port Syntax set port mirror source port module port mirror port module port sampling sampling_value direction direction_value Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source_ module The module number of the source mirrored port source_ port The port number of the source mirrored ...

Page 802: ...e show port mirror command to display mirroring information for the specified port If no port is specified information for all ports is displayed Syntax show port mirror module port Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for ETH LAN ports 5 6 o...

Page 803: ...ndancy command to define or remove redundancy pairs A redundancy port acts as a backup port in case the primary port fails The port can be any port that does not belong to a LAG or a LAG interface Ensure that there is no redundancy scheme already defined on any of the ports Syntax set port redundancy prim_module prim_port second_module second_port on off redundancy_name Parameter Description Possi...

Page 804: ...me which includes spaces you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks for example new york Related Commands set port redundancy enable disable set port redundancy intervals show port redundancy Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value prim_module The module number of the primary port prim_port Primary port of the redundancy scheme second_module The module number of the backup por...

Page 805: ...dundancy enable disable Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To globally enable port redundancy G450 001 super set port redundancy enable All redundancy schemes are now enabled Related Commands set port redundancy set port redundancy intervals show port redundancy Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Keyword specifying to enable port redundancy on the devi...

Page 806: ...port be up for 20 milliseconds before control is returned G450 001 super set port redundancy intervals 100 20 Related Commands set port redundancy set port redundancy enable disable show port redundancy Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value min_time_ between_ switchovers The minimum time in milliseconds between redundancy switchovers for each pair 0 65000 switchback_ interval The per...

Page 807: ...per show port redundancy Redundancy Name Primary Port Secondary Port Status bud 3 48 3 47 secondary jack 3 46 3 45 secondary tony 3 1 3 2 primary wayne 3 34 3 33 secondary Minimum Time between Switchovers 1 Switchback interval 3 Related Commands set port redundancy set port redundancy enable disable set port redundancy intervals Port status show port Use the show port command to display port statu...

Page 808: ... 10 100 1000BaseT Port Output fields Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for both ETH LAN ports 5 6 on the front panel Name Description Port Module and port number Name Name of port Status Status of the port connected faulty disabled no link...

Page 809: ...lay interfaces The command fails for USP interfaces and when higher or lower layers are defined for that interface Syntax no interface Serial module if_number if_link_type For USP interfaces if_number has the syntax port ip_interface sub_interface ip_interface For DS1 interfaces if_number has the syntax port channel_group ip_interface sub_interface ip_interface Parameters Speed Speed setting for t...

Page 810: ...By default the Serial interface has PPP encapsulation Use the no form of this command which has no parameters to return to the default Use the encapsulation frame relay option to create a frame relay interface of the IETF RFC1490 RFC2427 type or non IETF type This command deletes the PPP interface associated with the current Serial interface The PPP interface cannot be deleted if at least one IP i...

Page 811: ...ulation frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address Related Commands PPP encapsulation ip address keepalive PPP ppp timeout ncp ppp timeout retry show interfaces Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ppp Keyword indicating that the encapsu...

Page 812: ... To assign the IP address 192 168 22 33 with mask 255 255 255 0 to the FastEthernet interface G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 ip address 192 168 22 33 255 255 255 0 Related Commands description interface interface console interface fastethernet interface loopback interface serial interface tunnel interface USB modem interface vlan ip admin state ip broadcast address load interval show ip interface b...

Page 813: ...x no keepalive seconds Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 USP FR L2 Example To enable PPP keepalive and generate a message every 300 seconds G450 001 if Serial 3 1 keepalive 300 Related Commands encapsulation ip address ppp timeout ncp ppp timeout retry show interfaces Parameter Description Possible Values Default V...

Page 814: ...x no ppp timeout ncp seconds Parameters User Level read write Context Interface Console FastEthernet PPP L2 PPP L2 L3 Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 USB modem Example To specify that PPP will allow 60 seconds for negotiation of a network protocol G450 001 super ppp timeout ncp 60 Related Commands encapsulation ip address keepalive PPP ppp timeout retry sho...

Page 815: ... PPP L2 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 USB modem Example To specify that PPP will wait up to 30 seconds for a response during negotiation G450 001 super ppp timeout retry 30 Related Commands encapsulation ip address keepalive PPP ppp timeout ncp show interfaces show interfaces Use the show interfaces command to display interface configuration and statistics for a particular interface or all interfaces The Fra...

Page 816: ...dwidth 100000 kbit Reliability 255 255 txLoad 1 255 rxLoad 1 255 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_type The type of interface DIaler FastEthernet Serial Vlan Loopback Console Tunnel USB interface_ identifier The interface number The format varies depending on the value of interface_type For FastEthernet module port For Serial module port channel group For Vlan Vlan id F...

Page 817: ...Timeout 04 00 00 Dynamic CAC BBL 1500 kbps Dynamic CAC activation priority 50 Dynamic CAC interface status active Last input never Last output never Last clearing of show interface counters never 5 minute input rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec 5 minute output rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec 0 input drops 0 output drops 0 unknown protocols 0 packets input 0 bytes 0 broadcasts received 0 giants 0 input e...

Page 818: ...p class frame relay fragment show frame relay pvc brief Related Commands PPP encapsulation interface dialer interface fastethernet interface serial Related Commands Verifying WAN configuration show controllers show frame relay fragment show frame relay lmi show frame relay pvc show frame relay traffic show interfaces show ip interface show map class frame relay PPPoE PPP over Ethernet interface Fa...

Page 819: ...n state ip broadcast address ip crypto group load interval show ip interface brief encapsulation pppoe Use the encapsulation pppoe command to enable the PPPoE client Use the no form of the command to return to disable the PPPoE client Note Note The encapsulation pppoe command fails if ip address is configured on the interface The interface is part of a backup scheme Dynamic CAC is configured on th...

Page 820: ...vice name pppoe client wait for ipcp ip address negotiated Use the ip address negotiated command to enable obtaining an IP address via PPP IPCP negotiation Use the no form of this command to disable IP address negotiation Note Note The ip address negotiated command is intended primarily for PPPoE and dialer modem Note Note When you release a negotiated IP address using no ip address negotiated any...

Page 821: ...to its default value Note Note The size_in_bytes parameter specifies the Layer 3 packet size Layer 2 headers are added to the packet afterwards The Layer 2 headers vary in size depending on the type of interface Thus the total size of the MTU is the sum of the size_in_bytes value and the Layer 2 headers Syntax no mtu size_in_bytes Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L...

Page 822: ...tempts pppoe client service name pppoe client wait for ipcp ppp chap hostname Use the ppp chap hostname command to override the device hostname for PPP CHAP authentication Syntax ppp chap hostname string no ppp chap hostname Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To set the hostname for PPP CHAP authentication to avaya32 G450 001 super if FastEthern...

Page 823: ...owngrade to version 3 x or earlier you need to reconfigure this command on the gateway Note Note This command sets the CHAP secret for cases where the device is a CHAP responder and the console port ppp chap secret command sets the CHAP secret for cases where the device is a CHAP initiator Syntax no ppp chap password secret Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Dialer L2 ...

Page 824: ...allow authentication with CHAP Syntax no ppp chap refuse User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To prevent authentication with CHAP G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 ppp chap refuse Related Commands ppp pap refuse ppp ipcp dns request Use the ppp ipcp dns request command to enable requesting DNS information from the remote peer during the PPP IPCP session Us...

Page 825: ...g the PPP IPCP session G450 001 config if FastEthernet 10 2 ppp ipcp dns request Related Commands ip address negotiated ppp pap refuse Use the ppp pap refuse command to prevent authentication with PAP even when a pap sent password is configured Syntax ppp pap refuse no ppp pap refuse User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To prevent authentication with PAP G45...

Page 826: ...ername password password no ppp pap sent username Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To set the PAP password to avaya32 with password 123456 G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 ppp pap sent username avaya32 password 123456 Related Commands encapsulation pppoe mtu ppp chap hostname ppp chap password pppoe client persistent delay pppoe client pers...

Page 827: ...ontext interface FastEthernet Example To configure the interval between ppp E client dial attempts as 1 second G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 pppoe client persistent delay 1 Related Commands encapsulation pppoe mtu ppp chap hostname ppp chap password ppp pap sent username pppoe client persistent max attempts pppoe client service name pppoe client wait for ipcp Parameter Description Possible V...

Page 828: ...ecutive connection establishment retries This means the PPPoE client does not stop trying to establish connections Syntax pppoe client persistent max attempts number no pppoe client persistent max attempts Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Example To limit the number of consecutive connection establishment retries to 0 G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 pppoe client ...

Page 829: ...ver the service name by initiating PADI frames with a blank service name Syntax no pppoe client service name string Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Example To set the PPPoE Client service name to isp1 G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 pppoe client service name isp1 Related Commands encapsulation pppoe mtu ppp chap hostname ppp chap password ppp pap sent username p...

Page 830: ...inates the LCP the pppoe client wait for ipcp command terminates the PPPoE tunnel Syntax no pppoe client wait for ipcp seconds Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet Example To configure the amount of time between PPPoE tunnel establishment and IPCP tunnel establishment as 30 seconds G450 001 super if FastEthernet 10 2 pppoe client wait for ipcp 30 Related Commands encapsu...

Page 831: ...queue command WFVQ is re enabled Syntax no priority queue User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 when Frame Relay Traffic Shaping is configured Serial DS1 FR L2 USP FR L2 when Frame Relay Traffic Shaping is not configured Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To enable priority queueing G450 001 if Serial 3 1 1 priority queue Relate...

Page 832: ...meters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 when Frame Relay Traffic Shaping is configured Serial DS1 FR L2 USP FR L2 when Frame Relay Traffic Shaping is not configured Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To specify a size of 200 for queue 1 G450 001 if Serial 3 1 1 queue limit 1 200 Related Commands priority queue show queueing...

Page 833: ...arameters User Level read Context general Note Note This command is also used for the FastEthernet interface when traffic shaping has been configured Example To display the priority queue size in packets G450 001 super show queueing Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_type The type of interface Serial Fast Ethernet if_number The port number of this interface in the form p...

Page 834: ...ueing delay for a specific VoIP codec By default this is estimated for the G 729 codec and is 20 ms It can be configured through the voip queue delay command If VoIP queueing is not enabled the Est Delay column displays OFF Q 1 The size in packets of the highest priority queue Q 2 The size in packets of the second highest priority queue Q 3 The size in packets of the second lowest priority queue Q...

Page 835: ... all FastEthernet interfaces for which traffic shaping is enabled If you disable custom queueing by using the no form of the voip queue command WFVQ is re enabled Syntax no voip queue User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L2 DS1 FR L2 USP FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 when traffic shaping is configured Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To enable VoIP que...

Page 836: ...abled Instead this command is now applicable under map class frame relay context to control the specific DLCI queueing parameters Syntax no voip queue delay queue_delay_ms codec frames per packet Parameters User Level admin Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value queue_delay_ms The maximum queue delay in milliseconds for which to estimate the high priority queue size The queue delay is...

Page 837: ...thernet context when traffic shaping is configured Example To set the maximum query delay to 30 milliseconds G450 001 super voip queue delay 30 Related Commands priority queue queue limit show queueing voip queue Proxy ARP ip proxy arp Use the ip proxy arp command to enable proxy ARP on an interface Use the no form of this command to disable proxy ARP on an interface Syntax no ip proxy arp User Le...

Page 838: ...rameter Description Possible Values Default Value bbedscp Keyword specifying that the following value is the BBE differentiated services code point 0 63 43 efdscp Keyword specifying that the following value is the EF differentiated services code point 0 63 46 802p Keyword specifying that the following value is the 802 priority value 0 7 6 rtpmin Keyword specifying that the following value is the R...

Page 839: ... for QoS control parameters The source can be either local where the user configures the values via the CLI or remote in which case the values are obtained from the media gateway controller The default value is remote Syntax set qos control local remote Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value local Keyword that specifies to configure QoS...

Page 840: ...ameters DSCP or 802 1Q for the Media Gateway Processor Syntax set qos signal dscp 802p value Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set up DSCP parameter 43 G450 001 super set qos signal dscp 43 Related Commands set qos bearer set qos control show qos rtcp Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value dscp Keyword that specifies to setup DSCP parameters 802p Keyword that...

Page 841: ...ARAMETERS LOCALLY SET DOWNLOADED Signal 802 Priority 7 0 Signal DSCP 34 0 Bearer 802 Priority 6 6 Bearer BBE DSCP 43 43 Bearer EF DSCP 46 46 Minimum RTP Port 3 2048 Maximum RTP Port 65535 65535 RSVP PARAMETERS LOCALLY SET DOWNLOADED State Enabled Disabled Retry on Failure Yes Yes Retry Delay secs 15 15 Service Profile Guaranteed Guaranteed RTCP MON PARAMETERS LOCALLY SET DOWNLOADED State Enabled D...

Page 842: ...tcp show voip parameters Use the show voip parameters command to display information about the VoIP engine Syntax show voip parameters User Level read only Context general Examples To display VoIP information G450 001 super show voip parameters VOIP ENGINE PARAMETERS IP PMI 149 49 78 140 DSP Firmware Version N A Fault Status No Fault Messages Additional Status No Status Messages ...

Page 843: ...oip dsp campon busyout voip dsp release voip dsp reset voip dsp show voip dsp test voip dsp Related Commands QoS set qos bearer set qos control set qos signal show qos rtcp RADIUS authentication clear radius authentication server Use the clear radius authentication server command to clear the primary or secondary RADIUS server IP address Syntax clear radius authentication server primary secondary ...

Page 844: ... retry time set radius authentication secret set radius authentication server set radius authentication udp port show radius authentication set radius authentication Use the set radius authentication command to enable or disable RADIUS authentication Syntax set radius authentication enable disable Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ...

Page 845: ...d to set the number of times to resend an access request when there is no response Syntax set radius authentication retry number number Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the number of retries for RADIUS authentication to 3 G450 001 set radius authentication retry number 3 Related Commands clear radius authentication server set radius authentication set radius authenti...

Page 846: ... G450 001 set radius authentication retry time 5 Related Commands clear radius authentication server set radius authentication set radius authentication retry number set radius authentication secret set radius authentication server set radius authentication udp port show radius authentication set radius authentication secret Use the set radius authentication secret command to enable secret authent...

Page 847: ... udp port show radius authentication set radius authentication server Use the set radius authentication server command to set the IP address of the primary or secondary RADIUS Authentication server Syntax set radius authentication server ip_addr primary secondary Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value string The text password Parameter Description Possible Values Default Va...

Page 848: ...tion secret set radius authentication udp port show radius authentication set radius authentication udp port Use the set radius authentication udp port command to set the RFC 2138 approved UDP port number Normally the UDP port number should be set to its default value of 1812 Some early implementations of the RADIUS server used port number 1645 Syntax set radius authentication udp port number Para...

Page 849: ...S authentication configurations Shared secrets are not displayed Syntax show radius authentication User Level read only Context general Example To show RADIUS authentication information G450 001 super show radius authentication Mode Disable Primary server 0 0 0 0 Secondary server 0 0 0 0 Retry number 4 Retry time 5 UDP port 1812 Related Commands clear radius authentication server set radius authen...

Page 850: ...ry password Note Note This command can only be issued via the console port not via a modem port Syntax set terminal recovery password action Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To disable the recovery password G450 001 super set terminal recovery password disable Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value action The state of the recovery password enable disable ...

Page 851: ...e machine you backed up from first delete the VPN license file from the USB device Otherwise the restore operation will fail Syntax restore usb usb device backup name Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To restore gateway files from directory gatewaybackup1on usb device0 G450 001 super restore usb usb device0 gatewaybackup1 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value u...

Page 852: ...el read only Context general Example To display information regarding the status of a gateway file restore operation G450 001 super show restore status Files restored Type FileName Status swComponent g450_sw_26_23_0 bin OK startup config startup_config cfg OK auth file auth file cfg OK license file vpn_license cfg OK swWebImage g450_emweb_3_1_8 bin OK phone script 46xxupgrade scr OK phone script 4...

Page 853: ...r a specific RIP distribution access list Syntax ip distribution access default action list_number default_action Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To specify that the default action for distribution access list 1 is to deny packets G450 001 super ip distribution access default action 1 default action deny Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list_number The d...

Page 854: ...dex action router_ip router_wildcard any no ip distribution access list access_list_number access_list_index Note Note If a list index is not given in the no ip distribution access list command all rules are deleted Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value access_list_number The access list number 1 99 access_list_index The access list in...

Page 855: ...tribution and learning of all networks G450 001 super ip distribution access list 20 4 permit any Related Commands ip rip authentication key ip rip authentication mode ip rip default route mode ip rip poison reverse ip rip rip version ip rip send receive mode ip rip split horizon router rip show ip protocols ip distribution access list cookie Use the ip distribution access list cookie command to s...

Page 856: ... destination_list Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To copy distribution list 1 to list 3 G450 001 super ip distribution access list copy 1 3 ip distribution access list name Use the ip distribution access list name command to set the distribution list name Syntax ip distribution access list name distribution_list_number name Parameter Description Possible Values Default Val...

Page 857: ...ob G450 001 super ip distribution access list name 22 Daily Job ip distribution access list owner Use the ip distribution access list owner command to set the distribution list owner Syntax ip distribution access list owner policy_list_number owner Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value distribution_ list_number The number of the distribution list 1 99 name The distribution...

Page 858: ...ntication key command to set the authentication string used on the current interface Use the no form of this command to clear the password Syntax ip rip authentication key password no ip rip authentication key Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L...

Page 859: ...ckets Use the no form of this command to restore the default value none Syntax ip rip authentication mode simple none no ip rip authentication mode Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To...

Page 860: ...ute mode mode no ip rip default route mode Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To specify that the RIP protocol sends but does not receive default route updates on the VLAN 1 interface G...

Page 861: ...prevents routing loops Poison reverse updates explicitly indicate that a network or subnet is unreachable Poison reverse updates are sent to defeat large routing loops Syntax no ip rip poison reverse User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Loopback L2 L3 L3 T...

Page 862: ...ibution access list ip rip authentication key ip rip authentication mode ip rip default route mode ip rip poison reverse ip rip send receive mode ip rip split horizon router rip show ip protocols ip rip send receive mode Use the ip rip send receive mode command to set the RIP send and receive modes on an interface Use the no form of this command to set the RIP to talk that is send report Syntax ip...

Page 863: ...zon router rip show ip protocols ip rip split horizon Use the ip rip split horizon command to enable the split horizon mechanism on the current interface Use the no form of this command to disable the split horizon mechanism By default split horizon is enabled The split horizon mechanism prevents information about routes from exiting the router interface through which the information was received ...

Page 864: ...ip rip rip version ip rip send receive mode router rip show ip protocols router rip Use the router rip command to enable the RIP and to enter the router configuration context Use the no form of this command to restore the default value and disable RIP Syntax no router rip User Level read write Context general Example To enable RIP and enter the router configuration context G450 001 super router ri...

Page 865: ...tributed routes to 5 G450 001 router rip default metric 5 Related Commands default metric RIP distribution list network RIP redistribute RIP timers basic distribution list Use the distribution list command to apply a distribution access list for incoming or outgoing routing information in route updates Use the no form of this command to deactivate the list Syntax no distribution list access_list_n...

Page 866: ...ter updates from OSPF G450 001 router rip distribution list 40 out ospf Related Commands default metric RIP network RIP redistribute RIP timers basic network RIP Use the network command to specify a list of networks on which the RIP is running Use the no form of this command to remove an entry Syntax no network ip_address wildcard_mask Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value access_lis...

Page 867: ...istribute command to redistribute routing information from another protocol into RIP Use the no form of this command to restore the default value disable redistribution by RIP Syntax no redistribute protocol Parameters User Level read write Context Router RIP Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip_address The IP address of the network of directly connected networks wildcard_mask Th...

Page 868: ...ic Use the timers basic command to set RIP timers Use the no form of this command to set the RIP timers to their default values Syntax timers basic update invalid no timers basic Parameters User Level read write Context Router rip Example To set the update timer to 30 seconds and the invalid route timer to 180 seconds G450 001 router rip timers basic 30 180 Parameter Description Possible Values De...

Page 869: ...read only Context general Example To display the content of distribution list 1 G450 001 super show ip distribution access lists 1 To display the content of all current distribution lists G450 001 super show ip distribution access lists show ip protocols Use the show ip protocols command to display parameters and statistics of a given IP routing protocol If no protocol is specified all running pro...

Page 870: ...ces Gateway Last Update Related Commands OSPF ip ospf authentication ip ospf authentication key ip ospf cost ip ospf dead interval ip ospf hello interval ip ospf message digest key ip ospf network point to multipoint ip ospf priority ip ospf router id router ospf show ip ospf show ip ospf database show ip ospf interface show ip ospf neighbor Related Commands RIP ip distribution access list ip rip ...

Page 871: ...ow rmon alarm show rmon event show rmon history show rmon statistics rmon alarm Use the rmon alarm command to create an RMON alarm entry Use the no form of this command to destroy a specific RMON alarm Note Note The rising_event and falling_event events must be defined before using the rmon alarm command refer to rmon event on page 873 Syntax rmon alarm alarm_num variable interval sample_type risi...

Page 872: ... history show rmon alarm show rmon event show rmon history show rmon statistics Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value alarm_num The index number of this alarm variable The OID of the statistic to monitor interval The number of seconds sample_type The type of sample used for the alarm absolute delta rising_ threshold_ value The value above which the rising_event will be triggered risi...

Page 873: ... Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create an RMON event entry with a resetTrap trap event number 32 for owner config G450 001 super rmon event 32 trap description resetTrap owner config event 32 was created successfully Related Commands clear rmon statistics rmon alarm rmon history show rmon alarm show rmon event show rmon history show rmon statistics Parameter Descriptio...

Page 874: ...d port 3 for 20 seconds saved over 100 time intervals for owner config G450 001 super rmon history 32 10 2 interval 20 buckets 100 owner config history index 32 was created successfully Related Commands clear rmon statistics rmon alarm rmon event show rmon alarm show rmon event show rmon history show rmon statistics Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value history_index The index of the...

Page 875: ...sting RMON alarms G450 001 super show rmon alarm alarm 1 is active owned by billp Monitors ifEntry 1 218106371 every 20 seconds Taking delta samples last value was 0 Rising threshold is 500 assigned to event 1 Falling threshold is 100 assigned to event 2 On startup enable rising or_falling alarms Related Commands clear rmon statistics rmon alarm rmon event rmon history show rmon event show rmon hi...

Page 876: ...read only Context general Example To display RMON event information for all events G450 001 super show rmon event Event 32 is active owned by config Description is resetTrap Event firing causes trap to community public last fired 0 0 0 Related Commands clear rmon statistics rmon alarm rmon event rmon history show rmon alarm show rmon history show rmon statistics Parameter Description Possible Valu...

Page 877: ...t 10 2 every 20 seconds Requested of time intervals ie buckets is 100 Granted of time intervals ie buckets is 100 Sample 47 began measuring at 8 32 17 Received 664636 octets 1912 packets 2 broadcast and 0 multicast packets 0 undersize and 0 oversize packets 22 fragments and 0 jabbers 0 CRC alignment errors and 3 collisions of dropped packet events due to a lack of resources 0 Network utilization i...

Page 878: ...1344680977 packets 3301887234 broadcast and 3286425893 multicast packets 3088727251 undersize and 3613263278 oversize packets 1062765319 fragments and 3882972139 jabbers 1956639312 CRC alignment errors and 725598320 collisions of dropped packet events due to a lack of resources 181377479 of packets received of length in octets 64 1508486650 65 127 3587014782 128 255 1989866214 256 511 378421598 51...

Page 879: ... PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L3 L3 Example To set the default metric to 10 G450 001 if FastEthernet 10 2 default metric 10 default metric OSPF Use the default metric command to set the default metric of redistributed routes for the OSPF protocol Use the no form of this co...

Page 880: ...ute OSPF timers spf default metric RIP Use the default metric command to set the default metric of redistributed routes for the RIP protocol Use the no form of this command to restore the default value Syntax default metric default_metric no default metric Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value default_ metric The default metric of redistributed routes 1 65535 20 Parameter ...

Page 881: ... basic redistribute OSPF Use the redistribute command to redistribute routing information from other protocols into OSPF Use the no form of this command to disable redistribution by OSPF Syntax no redistribute protocol Parameters User Level read write Context Router ospf Example To redistribute static routing information into OSPF G450 001 router ospf redistribute static Parameter Description Poss...

Page 882: ...nto RIP Use the no form of this command to restore the default value disable redistribution by RIP Syntax no redistribute protocol Parameters User Level read write Context Router RIP Example To redistribute OSPF routing information into RIP G450 001 router rip redistribute ospf Related Commands RIP default metric RIP distribution list network RIP timers basic Related Commands Route redistribution ...

Page 883: ...outing entry of IP address 192 168 49 1 with IP mask of 255 255 255 0 G450 001 super clear ip route 192 168 49 1 255 255 255 0 Related Commands ip default gateway ip netmask format ip redirects ip route ip routing show ip route show ip route best match show ip route static show ip route summary show ip route track table traceroute Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value all Keyword spe...

Page 884: ...ss 132 55 4 45 having a cost value of 4 with high preference and applying object tracker 20 G450 001 super ip default gateway 132 55 4 45 4 high track 20 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip_address The IP address of the router interface_type The interface type interface_number The interface number cost The path cost 1 preference The preference High Low Low permanent Keyword that...

Page 885: ...command output Use the no form of this command to restore the format to the default format Syntax ip netmask format mask_format no ip netmask format Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To display netmasks in bitcount format G450 001 super ip netmask format bitcount Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mask_format The format of the netmasks bitcount addresses are...

Page 886: ...nterface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L3 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 FR SUB L3 USP PPP L2 L3 USP PPP L3 FastEthernet L2 L3 L3 PPP L2 PPP L2 L3 PPP L3 Tunnel L2 L3 L3 VLAN L2 L3 L3 Dialer L2 L2 L3 L3 Related Commands clear ip route ip default gateway ip netmask format ip route ip routing show ip route show ip route best match show ip route static show ip route summary show ip route track table traceroute ...

Page 887: ... or on a permanent route Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ip_addr The IP address of the network mask The mask of the static route next_hop The next hop address in the network interface_type The interface type interface_number The interface number cost The path cost 1 preference The preference of the route High Low Low permanent Keyword that speci...

Page 888: ...atic route over the WAN Fast Ethernet when running DHCP client G450 001 ip route 1 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 FastEthernet 10 2 Related Commands clear ip route ip default gateway ip netmask format ip redirects ip routing show ip route show ip route best match show ip route static show ip route summary show ip route track table traceroute ip routing Use the ip routing command to enable IP routing Syntax i...

Page 889: ...terface Next Hop Cost TTL Source 0 0 0 0 0 FastEth 10 2 10 0 0 1 1 n a DHCP 1 0 0 0 8 Vlan 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 n a LOCAL 2 2 0 0 16 Dialer 1 9 9 9 50 1 n a STAT LO P 3 3 0 0 16 Dialer 1 9 9 9 50 1 n a STAT HI P 7 0 0 0 8 FastEth 10 2 10 0 0 1 DHCP 1 n a STAT LO 8 0 0 0 8 Vlan 1 2 8 0 0 1 1 n a LOCAL 9 0 0 0 8 FastEth 10 2 10 0 0 1 DHCP 1 n a STAT LO 10 0 0 0 8 Vlan 1 0 1 0 0 2 20 n a OSPF E2 10 0 0 0 24...

Page 890: ... 32 50 13 To display a range from route 137 44 50 13 to 255 255 255 0 G450 001 super show ip route 137 44 50 13 255 255 255 0 Related Commands clear ip route ip default gateway ip netmask format ip redirects ip route ip routing show ip route best match show ip route static show ip route summary show ip route track table traceroute show ip route best match Use the show ip route best match command t...

Page 891: ...p routing show ip route show ip route static show ip route summary show ip route track table traceroute show ip route static Use the show ip route static command to display static routes If no routes are specified all routes are displayed Syntax show ip route static ip_addr mask Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display all static routes G450 001 super show ip route static...

Page 892: ...ult gateway ip netmask format ip redirects ip route ip routing show ip route show ip route best match show ip route summary show ip route track table traceroute show ip route summary Use the show ip route summary command to display the number of routes known to the device Syntax show ip route summary User Level read only Context general Example To display a summary of routes G450 001 super show ip...

Page 893: ...Track Pref State 1 1 1 0 24 Tunnel 8 Via Tun 8 1 low Down Related Commands clear ip route ip default gateway ip netmask format ip redirects ip route ip routing show ip route show ip route best match show ip route summary traceroute traceroute Use the traceroute command to trace the route packets are taking to a particular host by displaying the hops along the path Note Note Pressing any key while ...

Page 894: ...epeated for a traceroute 1 5 3 dest port The destination port of the first probe sent 1 024 65 535 33 434 increment An integer that determines by how much the destination port is incremented for each probe sent starting from base port 0 254 1 source port The source port of the traceroute probes 1 024 65 535 33 434 timeout The duration in milliseconds that traceroute waits for a response for each p...

Page 895: ...ms 111 111 111 114 ESP tunnel 2 6 ms 5 ms 6 ms 60 60 60 1 GRE tunnel Trace complete Related Commands clear ip route ip default gateway ip netmask format ip redirects ip route ip routing show ip route show ip route best match show ip route static show ip route summary show ip route track table include tunnel hops Keyword that specifies that traceroute display the route taken by the probes as they t...

Page 896: ...e setup is local Syntax set qos rsvp enable disable refresh secs failure retry noretry profile guaranteed controlled Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Keyword indicating to enable RSVP in the router disable Keyword indicating to disable RSVP in the router secs The refresh time in seconds 1 99 15 retry Keyword indicating to r...

Page 897: ...uper set qos rsvp enable Related Commands show qos rtcp show qos rtcp Use the show qos rtcp command to display QoS RTCP and RSVP parameters Syntax show qos rtcp User Level admin Context general Example To display QoS RSVP and RTCP parameters G450 001 super show qos rtcp PARAMETERS IN EFFECT Downloaded QOS PARAMETERS LOCALLY SET DOWNLOADED Signal 802 Priority 7 0 Signal DSCP 34 0 Bearer 802 Priorit...

Page 898: ... 0 0 Listening Port 5005 5005 Report Period secs 5 5 Related Commands RSVP set qos rsvp Related Commands RTCP set qos rtcp RTCP set qos rtcp Use the set qos rtcp command to permit the setup of RTCP parameters The parameters that can be set are enabling or disabling RTCP reporting capability setting the IP address of the monitor setting the reporting period and defining the listening port number Sy...

Page 899: ... listenport 5000 To enable reporting capability G450 001 super set qos rtcp enable Related Commands RTCP show qos rtcp show qos rtcp Use the show qos rtcp command to display QoS and RTCP parameters Syntax show qos rtcp Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Keyword that specifies to enable RTCP reporting capability disable Keyword that specifies to disable RTCP reporting capabi...

Page 900: ...er 802 Priority 6 6 Bearer BBE DSCP 43 43 Bearer EF DSCP 46 46 Minimum RTP Port 3 2048 Maximum RTP Port 65535 65535 RSVP PARAMETERS LOCALLY SET DOWNLOADED State Enabled Disabled Retry on Failure Yes Yes Retry Delay secs 15 15 Service Profile Guaranteed Guaranteed RTCP MON PARAMETERS LOCALLY SET DOWNLOADED State Enabled Disabled IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Listening Port 5005 5005 Report Period secs...

Page 901: ...Syntax rtp stat clear User Level read write Context general Example To reset the RTP statistics application G450 001 super rtp stat clear Related Commands rtp stat event threshold rtp stat fault rtp stat min stat win rtp stat qos trap rtp stat qos trap rate limit rtp stat service rtp stat threshold show rtp stat config show rtp stat detailed show rtp stat sessions show rtp stat summary show rtp st...

Page 902: ...ds to a customer s actual experience of QoS problems during the stream Syntax rtp stat event threshold all codec loss codec rtt echo return loss loss remote loss rtt jitter remote jitter ssrc change num no rtp stat event threshold all codec loss codec rtt echo return loss loss remote loss rtt jitter remote jitter ssrc change Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value all Keywor...

Page 903: ...threshold show rtp stat config show rtp stat detailed show rtp stat sessions show rtp stat summary show rtp stat thresholds show rtp stat traceroute rtt Keyword specifying to set the event threshold for the rtt metric jitter Keyword specifying to set the event threshold for the jitter metric remote jitter Keyword specifying to set the event threshold for the remote jitter metric ssrc change Keywor...

Page 904: ...ault trap boundary to 1 and the clear trap boundary to 0 G450 001 super rtp stat fault 1 0 The fault trap boundary was set to 1 default 3 The clear trap boundary was set to 0 Related Commands rtp stat clear rtp stat event threshold rtp stat min stat win rtp stat qos trap rtp stat qos trap rate limit rtp stat service rtp stat threshold show rtp stat config show rtp stat detailed show rtp stat sessi...

Page 905: ... loss estimation to the next interval if the number of received packets is less than the minimum statistic window Syntax no rtp stat min stat win packets Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the minimum statistic window to 50 G450 001 super rtp stat min stat win 50 Related Commands rtp stat clear rtp stat event threshold rtp stat fault rtp stat qos trap rtp stat qos trap...

Page 906: ...ed to Syslog messages and stored in the messages file on the MGC Use the no form of this command to disable QoS traps By default QoS traps are enabled Syntax no rtp stat qos trap User Level read write Context general Example To enable QoS traps G450 001 super rtp stat qos trap The RTP statistics QoS trap is enabled Related Commands rtp stat clear rtp stat event threshold rtp stat fault rtp stat mi...

Page 907: ... bucket size limits the trap burst size Syntax rtp stat qos trap rate limit token interval bucket size Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To limit the QoS trap rate to a token every 10 hundredths of a second up to 50 tokens G450 001 super rtp stat qos trap rate limit 10 50 Related Commands rtp stat clear rtp stat event threshold rtp stat fault rtp stat min stat win rtp stat q...

Page 908: ...rtp stat config show rtp stat detailed show rtp stat sessions show rtp stat summary show rtp stat thresholds show rtp stat traceroute rtp stat threshold Use the rtp stat threshold command to set thresholds for QoS metrics sampled by the RTP statistics application An event counter for each metric increments every time the metric exceeds its threshold during an RTP session Use the rtp stat threshold...

Page 909: ...he RTP stream loss Keyword specifying to set the estimated network RTP packet loss The VoIP engine evaluates the current received packet loss every RTCP interval usually 5 to 8 seconds The VoIP engine postpones loss estimation until the next interval if the number of packets received is less than the minimum statistic window The minimum statistic window is configured with the CLI command rtp stat ...

Page 910: ...voice channel including the network delay and internal delays Round Trip Time is the time taken for a message to get to the remote peer and back to the local receiver rtt Keyword specifying to set the network RTT This metric does not include internal delay The device learns of the RTT from RTCP messages jitter Keyword specifying to set the variation in delay of packet delivery to the local peer re...

Page 911: ...er Token Interval 10 00 seconds Bucket Size 5 Session Table Size 128 Reserved 64 Min Stat Win 50 Note Note For an explanation of the output fields see the table describing the output of the show rtp stat config command in the chapter Configuring monitoring applications in Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03 602055 Related Commands rtp stat clear rtp stat event threshold rtp stat fau...

Page 912: ...7 End Time Duration 00 03 11 CName gwp 135 8 118 252 Phone Local Address 135 8 118 252 2045 SSRC 154611212 Remote Address 135 8 76 107 2061 SSRC 2989801899 0 Samples 38 5 sec Codec G723 62B 30mS Off Silence suppression Tx Rx Disabled Not Supported Play Time 186 690sec Loss 0 0 1 Avg Loss 0 1 RTT 816mS 18 Avg RTT 463mS JBuf under overruns 0 2 0 0 Jbuf Delay 60mS Max Jbuf Delay 60mS Received RTP Pac...

Page 913: ... rate limit rtp stat service rtp stat threshold show rtp stat config show rtp stat sessions show rtp stat summary show rtp stat thresholds show rtp stat traceroute show rtp stat sessions Use the show rtp stat sessions command to display a summary of the active and or terminated RTP sessions in the session table If no parameters are specified a summary of all RTP session information is displayed Sy...

Page 914: ...g to display only sessions to this destination subnet remote subnet The destination subnet remote subnet mask The destination subnet mask host Keyword specifying to display only sessions to this specific address rem addr The specific IP address last Keyword specifying to display only the last N entries in the history last N The number of entries in the history to display Parameter Description Poss...

Page 915: ...76 107 00015 2004 10 18 11 20 23 11 20 53 G723 135 8 76 107 00016 2004 10 18 11 21 04 11 21 55 G723 135 8 76 107 00017 2004 10 18 11 22 11 11 23 02 G729 135 8 76 64 00018 2004 10 18 11 22 42 11 23 02 G729 135 8 76 62 00019 2004 10 18 11 40 12 11 42 10 G723 135 8 76 107 00020 2004 10 18 11 46 43 11 50 33 G723 135 8 76 107 00021 2004 10 18 11 47 07 11 50 33 G723 135 8 76 107 00022 2004 10 18 11 47 2...

Page 916: ... in Administration for the Avaya G450 Media Gateway 03 602055 Related Commands rtp stat clear rtp stat event threshold rtp stat fault rtp stat min stat win rtp stat qos trap rtp stat qos trap rate limit rtp stat service rtp stat threshold show rtp stat config show rtp stat detailed show rtp stat summary show rtp stat thresholds show rtp stat traceroute show rtp stat summary Use the show rtp stat s...

Page 917: ...e limit rtp stat service rtp stat threshold show rtp stat config show rtp stat detailed show rtp stat sessions show rtp stat thresholds show rtp stat traceroute show rtp stat thresholds Use the show rtp stat thresholds command to display the configured thresholds and event thresholds for QoS metrics sampled by the RTP statistics application during RTP streams Syntax show rtp stat thresholds User L...

Page 918: ...te show rtp stat traceroute If the RTP statistics application is enabled see rtp stat service the G450 VoIP engine issues a UDP traceroute for every active RTP session The traceroute is performed 10 seconds after the session begins A traceroute is not performed if there is another active session to the same destination for which a traceroute was already performed within the last 5 seconds Use the ...

Page 919: ...n ID 1234 From 123 21 11 5 To 10 2 4 15 At 2004 12 26 12 21 55 TTL HOP ADDRESS DELAY 1 123 21 11 1 2ms 2 212 201 233 102 65ms 3 213 21 51 12 110ms 4 10 2 4 15 175ms Session ID 1234 From 123 21 11 5 To 10 2 4 5 At 2004 12 26 13 30 15 TTL HOP ADDRESS DELAY 1 123 21 11 1 2ms 2 212 201 233 102 65ms 3 213 21 51 12 110ms 4 10 2 4 5 145ms last Keyword indicating to display only the last N entries in the ...

Page 920: ...n be performed See the description for session on page 562 for more information The server must configure the SAT port to 5023 Syntax sat Field Description Session ID The RTP statistics index for the RTP session From The IP address of the G450 To The IP address of the session destination in this case a destination within the specified subnet At The time the traceroute is performed TTL The hop coun...

Page 921: ...e sls context help SLS administration While in the sls context type these commands to enter the respective subcontexts station extension class to enter the station context trunk group tgnum group type to enter the trunk group context ds1 port address to enter the ds1 context sig group sgnum to enter the sig group context bri port address to enter the bri context dial pattern dialed string to enter...

Page 922: ... group station trunk group set sls Use the set sls command to enable or disable SLS Note Note If the SLS survivable call engine is currently running you can issue this command to stop SLS from operating Note Note If you enabled SLS and then entered additional administration you must first disable SLS and then re enable it This will cause the SLS application to resynchronize its administrative data...

Page 923: ...mands clear survivable config show sls sls show sls Use the show sls command to display SLS status enabled or disabled Syntax show sls User Level read write Context general Example To display SLS status G450 001 super show sls Survivable Call Engine is enabled Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Keyword indicating to enable SLS disable Keyword indicating to disable SLS ...

Page 924: ... and return to the sls context Syntax bri slot address Parameters Note Note The BRI slot address must agree with the slot assignment administration see set slot config on page 992 User Level read write Context sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value slot address The physical module address on the gateway G450 Table 109 Table 109 G450 slot and board matrix for SLS G450 Media Module ...

Page 925: ...ar bri set sls show bri show sls sls set bearer capability Use the set bearer capability command to set the Information Transfer Rate field of the Bearer Capability IE in SLS Note Note This command is only valid for a DS1 or BRI circuit employed with ISDN BRI sub commands set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set in...

Page 926: ...ility set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls set country protocol Use the set country protocol command to specify the ISDN Layer 3 country protocol type in SLS Note Note This command is only valid for a BRI circuit or DS1 circuit emp...

Page 927: ...try protocol type 1 United States AT T mode also called 5ESS 2 Australia Australia National PRI 3 Japan 4 Italy 5 Netherlands 6 Singapore 7 Mexico 8 Belgium 9 Saudi Arabia 10 United Kingdom ETSI 11 Spain 12 France ETSI 13 Germany ETSI 14 Czech Republic 15 Russia 16 Argentina 17 Greece 18 China 19 Hong Kong 20 Thailand 21 Macedonia 22 Poland 23 Brazil 24 Nordic countries 25 South Africa etsi ETSI n...

Page 928: ...able set name set side set spid a set spid b set sls set tei assignment show bri show bri show sls sls set directory number a Use the set directory number a command to assign a directory number to the B1 channel of the BRI interface in SLS Important Important This number must be identical to the provisioned number that the network provider has assigned to this circuit Note Note This command is val...

Page 929: ... directory number b command to assign a directory number to the B2 channel of the BRI interface in SLS Important Important This number must be identical to the provisioned number that the network provider has assigned to this circuit Note Note This command is valid only for a BRI circuit employed with ISDN Syntax set directory number b number Parameters User Level read write Context sls bri Exampl...

Page 930: ...rts endpoint initialization in SLS Note Note This command is valid only for a BRI circuit employed with ISDN Syntax set endpoint init yes no Note Note The default for this command is no User Level read write Context sls bri Example To determine that the far end does not support endpoint initialization G450 001 sls bri port address set endpoint init no Related Commands bri clear bri set bearer capa...

Page 931: ... command is only valid for a DS1 or BRI circuit Syntax set interface glare mode Parameters User Level read write Context sls ds1 sls bri Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value glare mode The glare handling convention for a DS1 or BRI link For non QSIG calls network If the gateway is connected to a host computer and encounters glare it overrides the far end user If the gateway is conne...

Page 932: ... protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set side set spid a set spid b set sls set tei assignment show ds1 show bri show bri sls set interface companding Use the set interface companding command to set the interface to agree with the companding method used by the far end of the DS1 circuit for SLS mode Syntax set...

Page 933: ...untry protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set layer1 stable set name set side set spid a set spid b set sls set tei assignment show bri show bri show sls sls set layer1 stable Use the set layer1 stable command to determine whether or not to keep the physical layer active stable between calls in SLS Some European countries France for example requir...

Page 934: ...pid a set spid b set sls set tei assignment show bri show bri show sls sls set name Use the set name command to identify the username for a station a trunk group a DS1 or ISDN facility in SLS Syntax set name name Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value name The name as specified on the corresponding Communication Manager form add trunk group n This name...

Page 935: ...ber set supervision set tac set trunk hunt show trunk group show trunk group trunk group Related Commands DS1 commands clear ds1 set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set protocol version set side set signaling mode show ds1 show ds1 Related Commands BRI commands bri clear bri set bearer capab...

Page 936: ...apability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set signaling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls Related BRI commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding...

Page 937: ...text sls bri Example To assign SPID number 30353810041111 to the B1 channel of a North American BRI trunk G450 001 sls bri port address set spid a 30353810041111 Related Commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set side set spid b set sls set te...

Page 938: ...rite Context sls bri Example To assign SPID number 30353810041111 to the B2 channel of a North American BRI trunk G450 001 sls bri port address set spid b 30353810041111 Related Commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set side set spid a set sl...

Page 939: ...rotocol obtains its TEI address as automatic G450 001 sls bri port address set tei assignment auto Related Commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set side set spid a set spid b set sls show bri show bri show sls sls Parameter Description Possi...

Page 940: ...Name Willow Steet 2 BRI Interface Sid Country Bearer Compand TEI Endpt Init Layer1 Stable v401 user a country1 speech ulaw auto yes yes Dir NumberA Dir NumberB Spid A Spid B 3035381002 3035381003 30353810021111 30353810031111 Output fields Field Description BRI The physical module address Interface The glare handling convention if the equipment at the far end of the link has been administered as p...

Page 941: ...d Possible values alaw A law companding ulaw U law companding TEI The method by which the Layer 2 LAPD protocol obtains its Terminal Endpoint Identification TEI address Possible values auto TEI is assigned by the network provider zero TEI is fixed Endpt Init Whether or not the far end supports endpoint initialization Layer1 Stable Whether or not to keep the physical layer active stable between cal...

Page 942: ...text sls Example To delete attendant provisioning G450 001 super sls clear attendant Related Commands set attendant show attendant show sls sls clear bri Use the clear bri command to delete the administration for a given BRI channel in SLS Syntax clear bri slot address Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value slot address The administered slot address ...

Page 943: ...id b set sls set tei assignment show bri show sls sls clear dial pattern Use the clear dial pattern command to delete a single dialed string pattern entry in the SLS data set Syntax clear dial pattern dialed string Parameters User Level read write Context sls Example To delete dialed string pattern entry 49139 G450 001 super sls clear dial pattern 49139 Dial Pattern 49139 was removed Parameter Des...

Page 944: ...e To delete the administration for DS1 channel v4 G450 001 super sls clear ds1 v4 Related Commands set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls clear extension Use the clear extension command to delete a ...

Page 945: ... removed Related Commands set cor set expansion module set name set password set port set sls set swhook flash set trunk destination set type station show extension show sls station sls clear fac Use the clear fac command to delete an administered Feature Access Code for SLS Syntax clear fac feature Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value extnum Specifies the extension number to delete...

Page 946: ... show sls sls clear incoming routing Use the clear incoming routing command to delete an entry for a particular incoming routed string that is associated with a given trunk group in SLS This removes administration from the incoming routing subcontext Syntax clear incoming routing tgnum mode pattern length Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value feature The type of feature for which the...

Page 947: ...lear sig group command to delete the administration for a given ISDN signaling group in SLS Syntax clear sig group sgnum Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value tgnum ISDN t1isdn or e1isdn or bri trunk group number 1 2000 mode Protocol for receiving incoming digits enbloc All digits in SETUP message overlap Not all digits available in the SETUP message some digits delivered in subseque...

Page 948: ...ary dchannel set sls set trunk group chan select show sig group show sig group show sls sig group sls clear slot config Use the clear slot config command to delete the slot configuration administration in the media gateway for SLS Syntax clear slot config slot number Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value sgnum Signaling group number 1 650 Parameter Description Possible Val...

Page 949: ... slot v1 in the media gateway G450 001 super sls clear slot config v1 Related Commands set slot config set sls show slot config show sls sls clear station Use the clear station command to delete a particular extension number in the SLS data set The extension number that you want to clear must have been previously administered in the station subcontext Syntax clear station extension Parameters User...

Page 950: ...e config Use the clear survivable config command to set the SLS parameters to their default values Syntax clear survivable config User Level read write Context sls Example To set the SLS parameters to their default values G450 001 super sls clear survivable config Survivable Configuration is cleared Related Commands set sls show sls sls clear trunk group Use the clear trunk group command to delete...

Page 951: ...ing destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group dial pattern Use the dial pattern command within the sls context to enter a second level subcontext for administering ARS dial patterns for SLS After issuing this command the ...

Page 952: ...are inside the sls dial pattern context Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value dialed string The dialed string It can contain a maximum of 28 characters You can configure a maximum of 30 patterns 0 9 and X or x as a pre string or mid string replacement X or x cannot be used at the end of a dialed string Dial pattern sub commands set delete digits set deny set insert digits dial patter...

Page 953: ... read write Context sls dial pattern Example To specify that 1 digit be deleted from the beginning of the dialed string for an outbound call G450 001 sls dial pattern dialed string set delete digits 1 Related Commands clear dial pattern dial pattern set deny set insert digits dial pattern set max length set min length set sls set tgnum set type dial pattern show dial pattern show dial pattern show...

Page 954: ...an outgoing analog loop start trunk call G450 001 sls dial pattern dialed string set deny yes Done Related Commands clear dial pattern dial pattern set delete digits set insert digits dial pattern set max length set min length set sls set tgnum set type dial pattern show dial pattern show dial pattern show sls sls set insert digits dial pattern Use the set insert digits command to specify the digi...

Page 955: ... show dial pattern show sls sls set max length Use the set max length command to establish the maximum length of the dialed string in SLS Syntax set max length length Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value digits 0 36 digits special characters to insert at the beginning of the dialed string Note The special character comma designates that a pause of X seconds is to be sent between the...

Page 956: ... sls set tgnum set type dial pattern show dial pattern show dial pattern show sls sls set min length Use the set min length command to establish the minimum length of the dialed string in SLS Note Note The maximum length must be set using set max length prior to setting the minimum length if the minimum length is longer than the default value Syntax set min length length Parameter Description Poss...

Page 957: ...et type dial pattern show dial pattern show dial pattern show sls sls set tgnum Use the set tgnum command to designate the trunk group number in SLS Syntax set tgnum tgnum Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value length A numeric value equal to the minimum dialed string value see dial pattern and a maximum value equal to the number of dialed digits established by the set max ...

Page 958: ...Use the set type command to administer the type of outbound call in SLS The SLS call engine uses the dial pattern as part of its ARS routing for outbound trunk calls Syntax set type dial type Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value dial type The dial pattern as part of its ARS routing for outbound trunk calls emer Emergency call fnpa 10 digit North American Numbering Plan NA...

Page 959: ...teway The station is also able to dial calls that match dial patterns with dial type set to emergency COR set to Local enables the station to place calls that match dial patterns with dial types set to local operator service or hnpa In addition the station may place calls to the Emergency and Internal classes COR set to Toll enables the station to place calls that match dial patterns with dial typ...

Page 960: ...ial pattern dial pattern set delete digits set deny set insert digits dial pattern set max length set min length set sls set tgnum show dial pattern show sls sls Unrestricted and ETR In Country Toll Local Internal local public network local number call operator service or hnpa 7 digit NANP call fnpa 10 digit NANP call or 1 10 digit NAMP or natl non NANP call intra switch calls default Emergency Em...

Page 961: ...nsert Length Group Digits 95381000 n 9 9 locl 2 1 303 Output fields Field Description Dialed String Deny The administered ARS dial string and whether the call should be permitted n or denied y Min Max Length The minimum and maximum number of digits in the dial string Type The type of dial string Possible types include emer emergency call fnpa 10 digit NANP call hnpa 7 digit NANP call intl public n...

Page 962: ...o the sls context Syntax ds1 slot address Parameters Note Note The DS1 port address must agree with the slot assignment administration see set slot config on page 992 User Level read write Trunk group The trunk group number Delete Insert Digits The number of digits to add or remove from a dialed string Field Description 2 of 2 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value slot address The ph...

Page 963: ... sls ds1 v4 Sub commands The following commands are available once you are inside the sls ds1 context Additional SLS commands set sls show ds1 show sls sls DS1 sub commands set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode show ds1 ...

Page 964: ...ech for DS1 G450 001 sls ds1 port address set bearer capability speech To set the Information Transfer Rate field to speech for BRI G450 001 sls bri port address set bearer capability speech Related Commands clear ds1 set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode se...

Page 965: ...d Syntax set bit rate rate Parameters User Level read write Context sls ds1 Example To set the maximum transmission rate to 2 048 Mbps G450 001 sls ds1 port address set bit rate 2048 Related Commands clear ds1 set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set sig...

Page 966: ...g method for B channels to seq G450 001 sls ds1 port address set channel numbering seq Related Commands clear ds1 set bearer capability set bit rate set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value method The chan...

Page 967: ...ss set connect network Related Commands clear ds1 set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value far end The equipment at the far end of the DS1 link host Data applic...

Page 968: ...fault Value country code The ISDN Layer 3 country protocol type 1 United States AT T mode also called 5ESS 2 Australia Australia National PRI 3 Japan 4 Italy 5 Netherlands 6 Singapore 7 Mexico 8 Belgium 9 Saudi Arabia 10 United Kingdom ETSI 11 Spain 12 France ETSI 13 Germany ETSI 14 Czech Republic 15 Russia 16 Argentina 17 Greece 18 China 19 Hong Kong 20 Thailand 21 Macedonia 22 Poland 23 Brazil 2...

Page 969: ...bearer capability set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set side set spid a set spid b set sls set tei assignment show bri show bri show sls sls set interface Use the set interface command to specify the glare handling convention for a DS1 or BRI link in SLS This command also determines the polarity of the ...

Page 970: ...bility set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set side set spid a set spid b set sls set tei assignment show ds1 show bri show bri sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value glare mode The glare handling convention for a DS1 or BRI link For non QSIG calls network If the gateway is connect...

Page 971: ...ce companding alaw Related DS1 commands clear ds1 set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls Related BRI commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoi...

Page 972: ...001 sls ds1 port address set long timer yes Related Commands clear ds1 set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls Parameter Description Possible values Default value yes Keyword specifying to extend the T303 timer fro...

Page 973: ...nsion set name Joe Smith Related Commands Station commands set cor set expansion module set password set port set swhook flash set trunk destination set type station show station station Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value name The name as specified on the corresponding Communication Manager form add trunk group n This name is typically used to identify an individual a service prov...

Page 974: ... set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set protocol version set side set signaling mode show ds1 show ds1 Related Commands BRI commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set side set spid a set spid b set te...

Page 975: ...ocol For Country 1 United States a AT T mode also known as 5ESS b National ISDN 1 c Nortel mode also known as DMS d Telecordia NI 2 For Country 2 Australia a Australia National PRI b ETSI c invalid d invalid For Country 10 United Kingdom a DASS b ETSI c invalid d invalid For Country 12 France a French National PRI b ETSI c invalid d invalid For Country 13 Germany a German National PRI b ETSI c inv...

Page 976: ...ling mode set sls show ds1 show ds1 show sls sls set side Use the set side command to specify the glare handling conditions when the set interface command has been administered as peerMaster or peerSlave for the ISDN link in SLS Note Note This command is only valid for ISDN Syntax set side side Parameters User Level read write Context sls ds1 sls bri Examples To set the glare handling conditions t...

Page 977: ... set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set spid a set spid b set sls set tei assignment show bri show bri show sls sls set signaling mode Use the set signaling mode command to set the signaling mode for the DS1 facility in SLS Note Note This command is only valid for DS1 If this command is invoked to change the transmission rate and the DS1 facility an...

Page 978: ...w command to list the administered DS1 parameters for SLS for this trunk interface Syntax show Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value mode type The signaling mode for the DS1 facility cas Out of band signaling for E1 service yielding thirty 64kbps B channels for voice transmission robbedbit In band signaling for T1 service yielding twenty four 56kbps B channels for voice transmission ...

Page 979: ...eway Rate The maximum transmission rate for the DS1 facility Possible values 1 544 Mbps T1 2 048 Mbps E1 Signaling The signaling mode for the DS1 facility Possible values cas robbedbit idsnpri isdnextshowmgc Channel The channel numbering method for B channels on an E1 interface Possible values seq sequential codes of B channels 1 30 in the ISDN Channel Identification IE tslot timeslot method Conne...

Page 980: ... as peerMaster or peerSlave Possible values a b Protocol The ISDN Layer 3 country protocol type Ver The protocol version for countries whose public networks allow for multiple ISDN Layer 3 country protocols for ISDN Primary Rate service Bearer The Information Transfer Rate field of the Bearer Capability IE Possible values 3khz 3 1kHz audio encoding speech speech encoding Cmpd The far end compandin...

Page 981: ...nt INFO message enbloc overlap Each entry must be an enbloc match pattern entry If you administer the mode as enbloc you may use the set insert digits dial pattern command to administer the inserted dial string and the set delete digits command to administer the number of digits to be deleted from the received digit string There is a maximum of 50 entries for enbloc receiving mode Either the set d...

Page 982: ...tional SLS commands clear incoming routing set sls show incoming routing show sls sls set delete digits Use the set delete digits command to specify number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the dialed string for an inbound trunk call in SLS Important Important This command is required to complete the incoming routing administration in which the mode is set to enbloc The command is opti...

Page 983: ... routing show sls sls set insert digits incoming routing Use the set insert digits command to specify number of digits to be inserted at the beginning of the dialed string for an inbound trunk call in SLS Important Important This command is required to complete the incoming routing administration in which the mode is set to enbloc The command is optional when the mode is set to overlap Syntax set ...

Page 984: ...o specify the length of the dialed string in SLS Note Note There is an actual service offered in some public networks such as in Japan where the ISDN Called Party Number IE s Number Digits table entry in octet 4 has no information In order to program the Incoming Routing Table to handle this case the pattern field in set match pattern should be set to and the length field in set length should be s...

Page 985: ...s set match pattern Use the set match pattern command to specify the beginning digit pattern of the incoming alphanumeric dial string to be matched against in SLS Syntax set match pattern pattern Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value length The length of the dialed string expressed as a numeric string of 0 21 digits If the pattern field in set match pattern is set to the empty string...

Page 986: ...insert digits incoming routing set length set sls show incoming routing show incoming routing show sls sls show incoming routing Use the show command to display all of the administered dial patterns in SLS Syntax show User Level read write Context sls incoming routing Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value pattern Incoming alphanumeric string of 0 16 characters The empty string entry ...

Page 987: ...position In addition stations in the branch office may directly dial this attendant using the access code Syntax set attendant access code extension Field Description Match pattern The beginning digit pattern of the incoming alphanumeric dial string to be matched Length The length of the dialed string Del The number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the dialed string for an inbound tru...

Page 988: ... set date format Use the set date format command to set a date format for the SLS data set The default date format is mm dd yy Syntax set date format mm dd yy dd mm yy yy mm dd User Level read write Context sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value access code The dial access code which is recognized as the attendant feature 1 3 digit string extension The station serving as the branc...

Page 989: ...nd issue this command you will enter the hard hold state If you issue the command again you will return to the active call Syntax set fac feature fac Parameters User Level read write Context sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value feature The type of feature for which the FAC code applies ars1 ars2 hold contact open contact close contact pulse fac The unique 1 to 4 digit dial strin...

Page 990: ... an IP codec set within the SLS data set Note Note When you use this command silence is set to no and the frame size is set to 20 mSec Syntax set ip codec set codec Parameters User Level read write Context sls Example To configure IP codec set g 711mu within the SLS data set G450 001 super sls set ip codec set g 711mu IP codec g 711mu is set Related Commands set sls show ip codec set show sls sls ...

Page 991: ...mum number of IP registrations to 10 G450 001 super sls set max ip registrations 10 Maximum IP Registrations is set to 10 Related Commands set sls show max ip registrations show sls sls set pim lockout Use the set pim lockout command to prevent or enable Provisioning and Installation Manager PIM updates while you are working on SLS administration or the gateway Syntax set pim lockout yes no Parame...

Page 992: ...et slot config command to define the slot and the board type in the media gateway for SLS Syntax set slot config slot number board type Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value yes Keyword specifying to prevent PIM updates no Keyword specifying to enable PIM updates This is the default Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value slot number Identifies the slot number ...

Page 993: ...v3 v4 v5 v6 v7 v8 Yes MM712 Eight DCP telephone ports v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 v7 v8 Yes MM714 Four analog trunk ports and four analog station ports v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 v7 v8 Yes MM716 Twenty four analog telephone ports May alternatively be used as DID trunk ports v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 v7 v8 Yes MM717 Twenty four high density DCP telephone ports v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 v6 v7 v8 Yes MM720 Eight BRI trunk ports v1 v2 v3 ...

Page 994: ...ls Example To display attendant provisioning G450 001 super sls show attendant Attendant Access Code Station extension 00 23456 Related Commands clear attendant clear survivable config set attendant show sls sls show bri Use the show bri command to list the administered BRI parameters for SLS If no channel parameters are specified information about all BRI channels is displayed Syntax show bri lis...

Page 995: ...EI Endpt Init Layer1 Stable v402 user a country1 speech ulaw auto yes yes Dir NumberA Dir NumberB Spid A Spid B 3035381004 3035381005 30353810041111 30353810051111 Related Commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set name set side set spid a set spid b s...

Page 996: ... set Syntax show date format User Level read write Context sls Example To display the current date format G450 001 super sls show date format Date Format is mm dd yy Related Commands set date format set sls show sls sls show dial pattern Use the show dial pattern command to list all dial pattern strings in the SLS data set in tabular format Syntax show dial pattern list ...

Page 997: ...ter Description Possible Values Default Value list Dial pattern strings in the SLS data set in tabular format all Lists all administered dial patterns dialed string Lists only the parameters for a specific dialed string dialed string n List starts with the specific dialed string n entries all dialed string dialed string n all Field Description Dialed String Deny The administered ARS dial string an...

Page 998: ... sls Type The type of dial string Possible types include emer emergency call fnpa 10 digit NANP call hnpa 7 digit NANP call intl public network international number call iop international operator call locl public network local number call natl non NANP call op operator svc service Delete Insert Digits The number of digits to add or remove from a dialed string Field Description 2 of 2 Parameter De...

Page 999: ...umbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set name set protocol version set side set signaling mode set sls show sls sls show extension Use the show extension command to display extension specific SLS data parameters If no extension parameters are specified information for all extensions is displayed Note Note It is preferable to use the show s...

Page 1000: ...If an IP station or Softphone is currently registered when the command is run the Port column shows the IP address of the IP station or Softphone Output fields Field Description Extension The extension number of the phone 1 13 digits Type The station type Port The module port location Cor The Class of Restriction Possible classes include emergency internal local toll unrestricted Trk Des Indicates...

Page 1001: ... read write Context sls Example To list the administered Feature Access Codes G450 001 super sls show fac Feature Access Code contact pulse 84 contact close 85 contact open 86 hold 87 ars1 88 ars2 89 Done Flash Yes means that SLS will recognize the switchhook flash on this station no means that flashing the switchhook has no effect Passwd Asterisks indicate an administered password See set passwor...

Page 1002: ...ll of the administered dial patterns G450 001 super sls show incoming routing Match pattern Length Del Insert Digits Mode tgnum 234 7 3 5381000 enbloc 99 235 7 3 5381001 enbloc 98 Related Commands clear incoming routing set sls show sls sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list The administered dial patterns to list all Lists all administered dial patterns tgnum Lists the dial p...

Page 1003: ...odec g 711 mu priority 1 frames 2 Output fields Related Commands set ip codec set set sls show sls sls Field Description IP codec The administered codec type g 711 mu or g 711 a Priority The numeric priority of the codec SLS supports a single priority level designated as priority 1 Frames The frame size The frames supported are 20 milliseconds in size Since the incremental building size is in term...

Page 1004: ... server is located Syntax show last pim update User Level read write Context sls Example To display when the last update occurred G450 001 super sls show last pim update Last PIM update occured at 15 47 0 on 2 28 2005 Related Commands set sls show sls sls show max ip registrations Use the show max ip registrations command to display the maximum IP registration administration in the SLS data on the...

Page 1005: ...m lockout command to display the current status of the setting for the Provisioning and Installation Manager PIM lockout feature Syntax show pim lockout User Level read only Context sls Example To display the current status of the PIM lockout feature G450 001 super sls show pim lockout PIM lockout yes Related Commands set pim lockout set sls show sls sls show sig group Use the show sig group comma...

Page 1006: ...00 G450 001 super sls show sig group all Sig group Tg Select Assoc Sig Prime Dchan Nfas Modules Nfas Id 10 98 yes 005v424 12 100 no 005v524 005v5 0 005v6 1 Related Commands add nfas interface clear sig group remove nfas interface set associated signaling set primary dchannel set sls set trunk group chan select show sls sig group sls show slot config Use the show slot config command to list the slo...

Page 1007: ... v5 mm717 mm717 v6 mm717 mm717 v7 mm710 mm710 v8 mm710 mm710 Note Note If there is no module administered for a slot the display shows and if an unknown media module is inserted the display shows unknown Related Commands clear slot config set slot config set sls show sls sls show station Use the show station command to display extension specific SLS data parameters If no extension parameters are s...

Page 1008: ... Joe Smith Note Note If an IP station or Softphone is currently registered when the command is run the Port column shows the IP address of the IP station or Softphone Output fields Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list The extension specific SLS data parameters to list all Lists all administered extensions extension Lists only the numbered extension extension n Lists the numbere...

Page 1009: ... that an expansion module is administered for this station no means that there is no expansion module associated with this station Flash Yes means that SLS will recognize the switchhook flash on this station no means that flashing the switchhook has no effect Passwd Asterisks indicate an administered password See set password for password requirements on IP endpoints If the field is blank no passw...

Page 1010: ... or dtmf Tac The Trunk Access Code 1 to 4 digits and are valid entries and are only allowed as the first character of the TAC Port The virtual integrated port assignment Supervision Incoming signaling supervision mode immediate wink Treat The digit treatment blank absorb 1 5 insert 1 4 Insert The digits to insert in the dial string Codeset Display The Q 931 codeset that sends display information t...

Page 1011: ...um Digit Handling Defines how the inbound outbound calls handle the transmission reception of the dialed pattern enbloc enbloc enbloc overlap overlap enbloc overlap overlap Japan Discon Whether to perform a disconnect sequence CONNECT message followed by a DISCONNECT message Send Name Whether the calling connected called or busy party s administered name is sent to the network on outgoing or incom...

Page 1012: ...inside the sig group context Related SLS commands clear sig group set sls show sig group show sls sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value sgnum Signaling group number If you have created more than one trunk group within a single DS1 circuit it is possible that one signaling group can support multiple trunk groups 1 650 Signaling groups sub commands add nfas interface remove nfas in...

Page 1013: ...faces of this NFAS group to be fractionalized into 2 or more uses It must be dedicated to this given customer Therefore the following usage rules apply All members of an NFAS DS1 that are administered must belong to the same trunk group All members of this trunk group must belong to a single signaling group Syntax add nfas interface gateway module interface id Parameters User Level read write Para...

Page 1014: ...terface command to remove a member from a NFAS managed DS1 group in SLS This command removes the add nfas interface gateway and module administration Note Note This command applies only to ISDN PRI trunks in a NFAS managed group Note Note This command is not valid unless the slot configuration has already been administered see set slot config and the set associated signaling command is set to no N...

Page 1015: ...ecify whether the D channel is physically present in the DS1 interface in SLS Note Note If this command is invoked to change the transmission rate and the DS1 facility and associated signaling group have already been provisioned the command is blocked and a warning message Administrative change is in violation with existing trunk member provisioning is displayed Syntax set associated signaling yes...

Page 1016: ...l number in SLS Syntax set primary dchannel circuit number Parameters User Level read write Context sls sig group Example To identify the D channel number for gateway 005 slot v4 in a T1 ISDN line G450 001 sls sig group 100 set primary dchannel 005v424 Related Commands add nfas interface clear sig group remove nfas interface set associated signaling set sls set trunk group chan select show sig gro...

Page 1017: ...t sls sig group Example To specify that trunk group 99 can accept incoming calls G450 001 sls sig group 100 set trunk group chan select 99 To clear any previously set value for trunk group selection G450 001 sls sig group 100 set trunk group chan select 0 Related Commands add nfas interface clear sig group remove nfas interface set associated signaling set primary dchannel set sls show sig group s...

Page 1018: ...me Dchan Nfas Modules Nfas Id 10 98 yes 005v424 Output fields Field Description Sig group Signaling group number Tg Select The trunk group number that can accept incoming calls in cases where the Information Channel Selection field does not specify a preferred channel for bearer transport Assoc Sig Whether the D channel is physically present in the DS1 interface Prime Dchan The D channel number Nf...

Page 1019: ...xt Syntax station extension class Parameters User Level read write Context sls Example To enter the second level context of sls station for analog station extension 23456 G450 001 super sls station 23456 analog G450 001 super sls station extension Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value extension A 1 13 digit unique numeric string 0 through 9 an extension can begin with the digit 0 cla...

Page 1020: ...mmand Analog DCP IP set cor X X X set expansion module X X set name X X X set password X X set port X X set swhook flash X set trunk destination X X X set type station X X X show station X X X Parameter Description Possible Values As the class of restriction moves from emergency to unrestricted each level increases the range of dialing abilities for this station For example toll level includes loc...

Page 1021: ...y this gateway The station is also able to dial calls that match dial patterns with dial type set to emergency COR set to Local enables the station to place calls that match dial patterns with dial types set to local operator service or hnpa In addition the station may place calls to the Emergency and Internal classes COR set to Toll enables the station to place calls that match dial patterns with...

Page 1022: ...xpansion module set name set password set port set sls set swhook flash set trunk destination set type station show station show sls station sls Unrestricted and ETR In Country Toll Local Internal local public network local number call operator service or hnpa 7 digit NANP call fnpa 10 digit NANP call or 1 10 digit NAMP or natl non NANP call intra switch calls default Emergency Emergency Internati...

Page 1023: ...ion set expansion module yes Related Commands set cor set name set password set port set sls set swhook flash set trunk destination set type station show station show sls station sls set name Use the set name command to identify the username for a station a trunk group a DS1 or ISDN facility in SLS Syntax set name name Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value yes Keyword indicating that...

Page 1024: ...ent set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt show trunk group show trunk group trunk group Related Commands DS1 commands clear ds1 set bearer capability set bit rate set channel numbering set connect set country protocol set interface set interface companding set long timer set prot...

Page 1025: ...administer a station password for DCP and IP station sets in SLS If an IP Softphone in RoadWarrior mode is using the administrative identity of a DCP phone then the password is required Syntax set password password Parameters User Level read write Context sls station Example To set a given station password to 12345 G450 001 sls station extension set password 12345 Related Commands set cor set expa...

Page 1026: ...s Default Value module port The virtual integrated port assignment for the module in G450 Depends on class administered with the set type station command see below Table 112 Module port values in SLS station configuration mode Gateway Media module Analog station ports You cannot select these modules ports if they are already assigned as DID trunks DCP G450 MM711 8 possible ports MM712 8 possible p...

Page 1027: ...gnize the switchhook flash signal from a particular analog station and to provide subsequent transfer service Note Note This command is valid only when the station type is analog2500 Syntax set swhook flash yes no Parameters User Level read write Context sls station Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value yes Keyword indicating that SLS recognizes the switchhook signal and transfers th...

Page 1028: ...ded in a pool of stations that can receive incoming analog loop start trunk calls in circular queueing in SLS Note Note This command does not apply to analog DID trunks Syntax set trunk destination yes no Parameters User Level read write Context sls station Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value yes Keyword indicating that this extension can receive incoming analog loop start trunk ca...

Page 1029: ... set password set port set sls set swhook flash set type station show station show sls station sls set type station Use the set type command to administer specific phone models for SLS Note Note The new Avaya 96xx IP phone family is not directly referenced in the CLI When you administer these phones via the CLI use the following mapping Syntax set type model Module name CLI interface name 9610 460...

Page 1030: ...ssword set port set sls set swhook flash set trunk destination show station show sls station sls Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value model Model type Analog DCP IP analog 2500 dcp2402 dcp2410 dcp2420 dcp6402 dcp6402D dcp6408 dcp6408 dcp6408D dcp6408D dcp6416D dcp6424D dcp8403B dcp8405B dcp8405B dcp8405D dcp8405D dcp8410B dcp8410D dcp8411B dcp8411D dcp8434D ip4601 ip4602 ip4602sw ip...

Page 1031: ...ation G450 001 sls station extension show Extension Type Port Co Trk Des Exp Mod Flash Passwd 49138 ip4620 111 222 223 200 unrestr yes no Name Joe Smith Note Note If an IP Softphone or an IP phone is currently registered when the command is run the Port column shows the IP address of the IP Softphone or IP phone Output fields Field Description Extension The extension number of the phone 1 13 digit...

Page 1032: ...ion assigned to the station which determines the range of dialing ability for the station Possible values ranging from most restricted to unrestricted are emergency internal local toll unrestricted Less restricted classes include all dialing abilities included in more restricted classes Trk Des Whether or not to permit the station to receive incoming analog loop start trunk calls in circular queue...

Page 1033: ...og station or as an analog DID trunk but not BOTH The maximum limits for a given trunk type are defined by the slot configuration assignment for the G450 The maximum number of ports allowed per interface module is defined in Table 113 for the G450 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value tgnum The required trunk group number 1 2000 group type The trunk group type This argument is requir...

Page 1034: ...ng B1 and B2 channels bri MM722 4 Two physical ports each offering B1 and B2 channels t1 isdn MM710 23 D channel is associated with this facility FAS t1 isdn MM710 24 D channel is not associated with this facility NFAS and the DS1 s signaling mode is set to isdnext e1 isdn MM710 30 D channel is associated with this facility FAS e1 isdn MM710 31 D channel is not associated with this facility NFAS a...

Page 1035: ...tac X X X X remove port X X X X set cbc X set cbc parameter X set cbc service feature X set channel preference X set codeset display X set codeset national X set dial X X X set digits X X set digit handling X set digit treatment X X set incoming destination X X set incoming dialtone X set japan disconnect X set name X X X X set numbering format X set send name X set send number X set supervision X...

Page 1036: ...group type parameter for the trunk group command Syntax add port module port sig group Note Note The sig group argument is only necessary for Digital trunks Parameters Analog trunks G450 see Table 114 255 trunks per trunk group Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module port The virtual integrated port assignment for this group type See either Analog trunks Digital trunks sig group...

Page 1037: ...unk is to be administered for port 4 then add port V304 administers an analog loop start trunk through port V304 G450 001 sls trunk group tgnum add port v304 Digital trunks G450 255 trunks per trunk group see Table 115 The number of ISDN channels depends on whether the signaling D channel is associated with this facility FAS or not NFAS Table 114 G450 SLS analog port assignments Group type Media M...

Page 1038: ...lated Commands clear tac clear trunk group remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set s...

Page 1039: ... remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk gr...

Page 1040: ...t treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group set cbc Use the set cbc command to specify whether the ISDN trunk group is to operate by declaring the service type explicitly on a call by call basis in ...

Page 1041: ... number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group set cbc parameter Use the set cbc command to define what class of service is being specified as part of the scocs service in the Network Services Facility information element sent to the network service provider on outgoing calls in SLS Note Note This command only applies to ISDN Prima...

Page 1042: ...ted Commands add port clear tac clear trunk group remove port set cbc set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show tru...

Page 1043: ...f set cbc is set to yes Syntax set cbc service feature type Parameters User Level read write Context sls trunk group Example To specify that the scocs service will be specified in the Network Services Facility information element G450 001 sls trunk group tgnum set cbc service feature scocs Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value type The type of service or feature being specified in th...

Page 1044: ...Use the set channel preference command to define how the Channel Identification IE field is encoded in SLS Note Note This command only applies to ISDN trunks Syntax set channel preference type Parameters User Level read write Context sls trunk group Example To define that the Channel Identification IE field is encoded to preferred status G450 001 sls trunk group tgnum set channel preference prefer...

Page 1045: ... allowed to send display information to the user phone in SLS Note Note This command only applies to ISDN trunks Syntax set codeset display codeset Parameters User Level read write Context sls trunk group Example To identify that codeset6 is allowed to send display information to the user phone G450 001 sls trunk group tgnum set codeset display codeset6 Related Commands add port clear tac clear tr...

Page 1046: ...eset6 is allowed to send National Information Elements to the user phone G450 001 sls trunk group tgnum set codeset national codeset6 Related Commands add port clear tac clear trunk group remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone s...

Page 1047: ...t codeset display set codeset national set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group set digit handling Use the set digit handling command to define how the inbou...

Page 1048: ...ion set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value method How the inbound outbound calls handle the reception transmission of the dialed pattern Enbloc requires sending the entire collec...

Page 1049: ...oup remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls ...

Page 1050: ... group tgnum set digit treatment blank Related Commands add port clear tac clear trunk group remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervisio...

Page 1051: ...ear tac clear trunk group remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk gr...

Page 1052: ...t clear tac clear trunk group remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show t...

Page 1053: ... no Related Commands add port clear tac clear trunk group remove port set cbc set cbc parameter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls sho...

Page 1054: ...tion extension set name Joe Smith Related Commands Station commands set cor set expansion module set password set port set swhook flash set trunk destination set type station show station station Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value name The name as specified on the corresponding Communication Manager form add trunk group n This name is typically used to identify an individual a ser...

Page 1055: ...show ds1 Related Commands BRI commands bri clear bri set bearer capability set country protocol set directory number a set directory number b set endpoint init set interface set interface companding set layer1 stable set side set spid a set spid b set tei assignment show bri show bri Related Commands SLS commands set sls show sls sls set numbering format Use the set numbering format command to spe...

Page 1056: ... send name set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group set send name Use the set send name command to define whether or not the calling connected called or busy party s administered name is sent to the network on outgoing or incoming calls in SLS Note Note Leave the setting of method to be no since sending a Calling Part...

Page 1057: ...destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send number set supervision set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value method Specifies whether or not the calling connected called or busy party s administered name is sent to the network on outgoing or incoming...

Page 1058: ...el read write Context sls trunk group Example To define that the calling connected called or busy party s administered number is sent to the network on outgoing or incoming calls G450 001 sls trunk group tgnum set send number yes Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value method Specifies whether or not the calling connected called or busy party s administered number is sent to the networ...

Page 1059: ...and to define the incoming signaling supervision mode for analog DID trunks or DS1 tie trunks only in SLS Syntax set supervision sup type Parameters User Level read write Context sls trunk group Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value sup type For analog did group types The incoming signaling supervision mode for analog DID trunks immediate wink wink For t1inband and e1inband group typ...

Page 1060: ...tion set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set tac set trunk hunt set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group set tac Use the set tac command to administer the trunk access codes for SLS You must issue this command before the trunk group is enabled in the SLS database Syntax set tac tac Parameters User Level re...

Page 1061: ... hunt Use the set trunk hunt command to specify the trunk hunting search within a facility in an ISDN trunk group or through a non ISDN digital trunk group in SLS Note Note This command only applies to DS1 trunks Syntax set trunk hunt type Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value type The trunk hunting search type within a facility in an ISDN trunk group or through a non ISDN...

Page 1062: ...ter set cbc service feature set channel preference set codeset display set codeset national set dial set digits set digit handling set digit treatment set incoming destination set incoming dialtone set japan disconnect set name set numbering format set send name set send number set supervision set tac set sls show trunk group show sls show trunk group sls trunk group show trunk group Use the show ...

Page 1063: ...t Japan Display National Preference Handling Discon codeset6 codeset6 exclusive enbloc enbloc no Send Send Number Trunk Name Number Format Hunt yes yes public ascend This example shows twelve ports assigned as T1inband signalling G450 001 sls trunk group tgnum show Group Type Dial Tac Supervision Treat Insert 1 t1 inband dtmf 96 wink immediate Name Willow Street 2 Ports v401 v402 v403 v404 v405 v4...

Page 1064: ...nd Send Number Trunk Name Number Format Hunt yes yes public ascend Cbc Cbc service feature Cbc parameter yes sdn Output fields Field Description Group The trunk group index Type The trunk group type Possible values loop start analog loopstart did analog DID Dial The method for sending outbound digits Possible values rotary dtmf Tac The trunk access code a unique dial string that identifies the tru...

Page 1065: ... SNMP traps However users can change SNMP configuration settings even when the agent is disabled Syntax ip snmp no ip snmp User Level admin Insert The dial string that is added to the start of the received DID incoming dial string Incoming Dest The extension to receive an incoming trunk call Incoming Dial Whether a dial tone is set in response to far end trunk group seizures Trunk Hunt The trunk h...

Page 1066: ...able frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager set snmp community Use the set snmp community command to set or modify the media gateway s SNMP community strings Syntax set snmp community read only read write community_string Parameters User L...

Page 1067: ...er group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager set snmp retrie...

Page 1068: ...ngineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs set snmp timeout Use the set snmp timeout command to specify the time...

Page 1069: ...gineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs show snmp Use the show snmp command to display SNMP configuration info...

Page 1070: ...eout show snmp user show snmp usertogroup show snmp view snmp server community snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server ho...

Page 1071: ...remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager show snmp group Use the show snmp gr...

Page 1072: ...ser show snmp usertogroup show snmp view snmp server community snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server i...

Page 1073: ...e disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs show snmp timeout Use the show snmp timeout command to display the time to wait before resending a communication Syntax show snmp timeout User Level read only Context general Example To display the timeout value G450 001 super ...

Page 1074: ... all SNMP users or for a specified SNMP user Syntax show snmp user username Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To display configuration information for SNMP user john G450 001 super show snmp user john EngineId 00 11 22 33 44 User Name john Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Group for Security Model v1 RestrictedGroup Group for Security Model v2 RestrictedGroup Gro...

Page 1075: ...p enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager show snmp usertogroup Use the show snmp usertogroup command to show the mapping table between SNMPv3 users and groups Syntax show snmp usertogroup us...

Page 1076: ...p server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic t...

Page 1077: ...roup snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager snmp server communi...

Page 1078: ...w snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dyna...

Page 1079: ...P access configuration ip snmp set snmp community set snmp retries set snmp timeout show snmp show snmp engineID show snmp group show snmp retries show snmp timeout show snmp user show snmp usertogroup show snmp view snmp server community snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable a...

Page 1080: ... group instance is removed Syntax snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 level read read view write write view notify notify view no snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 level Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value groupname A character string specifying the group name A string of up to 32 characters v1 Keyword indicating that the group is limited to SNMP v1 functionality v...

Page 1081: ... disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs read view A character string specifying the view name for the read view Users of this group have read access to the set of MIB objects specified in the read view If no view is specified the default is an empty view A string of up to 64 characters write view A ch...

Page 1082: ...ters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value username A character string specifying the username of this user A string of up to 32 characters engineID The remote device Engine ID for this user groupname A character string specifying the groupname this user is associated with A string of up to 32 characters md5 Keyword specifying to use the MAC MD5 96 authentication protocol sha Keyword...

Page 1083: ...ineID snmp server group snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager snmp server user Use the...

Page 1084: ...s user is associated with A string of up to 32 characters v1 Keyword specifying that the user is authorized for SNMP v1 functionality in the specified group v2c Keyword specifying that the user is authorized for SNMP v2c functionality in the specified group v3 Keyword specifying that the user is authorized for SNMP v3 functionality in the specified group md5 Keyword specifying to use the MAC MD5 9...

Page 1085: ... SNMP MIB view If the view does not exist it is created An MIB view specifies a particular section or subsection of the MIB tree You can create a view that includes a particular subsection or excludes one Use the no form of the command to delete the current view Syntax snmp server view view name oid subtree included excluded no snmp server view view name oid subtree Parameters User Level admin Par...

Page 1086: ... snmp usertogroup show snmp view snmp server community snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands D...

Page 1087: ...er group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager Parameter Description Possibl...

Page 1088: ...es show snmp timeout show snmp user show snmp usertogroup show snmp view snmp server community snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server inf...

Page 1089: ...nmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs show port trap Use the show port trap command to display information on SNMP generic link up down traps sent for a specific port If no port is specified information for all ports is displayed Syntax show port trap module port Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display trap information...

Page 1090: ...mands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host snmp server informs show snmp Use the show snmp command to display SNMP configuration information Syntax show snmp User Level read only Context general Example To display SNMP configuration informati...

Page 1091: ...mp server informs Related Commands Dynamic trap manager snmp server dynamic trap manager snmp trap link status Use the snmp trap link status command to enable Link Up and Link Down traps Use the no form of this command to restore the default value interface traps deactivated Syntax no snmp trap link status User Level read write Context Interface Console Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 DS...

Page 1092: ...ifications Use the snmp server enable notifications command to enable the sending of all traps and informs from the G450 Use the no form of the command to disable the sending of all traps and informs from the G450 Note Note This command overrides the enabling of individual notifications using the snmp server host command Syntax no snmp server enable notifications User Level admin Context general E...

Page 1093: ...to disable a particular set of notification types Note Note If you use the no snmp server host command without a notification type list all notification types are disabled Syntax snmp server host host_address traps informs v1 v2c community name v3 level username udp port port notification list no snmp server host host_address traps informs notification list Parameters Parameter Description Possibl...

Page 1094: ...specifying to use SNMP v3 functionality with this host level The level of authentication to apply to messages to this host auth authenticate messages to this host noauth do not authenticate messages to this host priv authenticate and encrypt messages to this host noauth username The username to use for authentication on the specified host port Which port of the target host to use 162 Parameter Des...

Page 1095: ...ia gateway media gateway traps security security traps config configuration change notifications eth port faults notifications of Ethernet port faults sw redundancy software redundancy notifications temperature temperature warning notifications cam change notifications about changes in CAM l3 events notifications about L3 faults duplicate IP VLAN violations lag event notifications about link aggre...

Page 1096: ...et snmp timeout show snmp show snmp engineID show snmp group show snmp retries show snmp timeout show snmp user show snmp usertogroup show snmp view snmp server community snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay sh...

Page 1097: ...show snmp view snmp server community snmp server engineID snmp server group snmp server remote user snmp server user snmp server view Related Commands SNMP trap configuration set port trap set snmp trap enable disable auth set snmp trap enable disable frame relay show port trap show snmp snmp trap link status snmp server enable notifications snmp server host Related Commands Dynamic trap manager s...

Page 1098: ...5 edge port Related Commands set port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement set port duplex set port enable disable set port flowcontrol set port level set port name set port negotiation set port point to point admin status set port speed show port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement show port edge state show port flowcontrol Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module N...

Page 1099: ...s automatically detected G450 001 super set port point to point admin status 6 5 auto Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for both ETH LAN ports 5 6 on the front panel admin_status The connection type of the port force true specify that the ...

Page 1100: ...ge state show port flowcontrol set port spantree Use the set port spantree command to enable or disable spanning tree for specific ports Syntax set port spantree enable disable module port Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To enable spanning tree on port 6 5 G450 001 super set port spantree enable 6 5 port 6 5 was enabled on spantree Parameter Description Possible Values Def...

Page 1101: ...spantree cost command to set the spanning tree cost of a port This value defines which port is allowed to forward traffic if two ports with different costs cause a loop Syntax set port spantree cost module port value Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the spanning tree cost of port 6 5 to 4096 G450 001 super set port spantree cost 6 5 4096 port 6 5 spantree cost is 409...

Page 1102: ...port to send a rapid spanning tree hello packet Bridge Protocol Data Unit Syntax set port spantree force protocol migration module port Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To force port 6 5 to send a hello packet G450 001 super set port spantree force protocol migration 6 5 Related Commands set port spantree set port spantree cost set port spantree priority set spantree defaul...

Page 1103: ...port spantree priority 6 5 128 port 6 5 spantree priority is 128 Related Commands set port spantree set port spantree cost set port spantree force protocol migration set spantree default path cost set spantree enable disable set spantree forward delay set spantree hello time set spantree max age set spantree priority set spantree tx hold count set spantree version show spantree Parameter Descripti...

Page 1104: ... rapid spanning tree Spanning tree default path costs is set to rapid spanning tree Related Commands set port spantree set port spantree cost set port spantree force protocol migration set port spantree priority set spantree enable disable set spantree forward delay set spantree hello time set spantree max age set spantree priority set spantree tx hold count set spantree version show spantree Para...

Page 1105: ...able disable Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To enable spanning tree G450 001 set spantree enable bridge spanning tree enabled Related Commands set port spantree set port spantree cost set port spantree force protocol migration set port spantree priority set spantree default path cost set spantree forward delay set spantree hello time set spantree max age set spantree prio...

Page 1106: ...lated Commands set port spantree set port spantree cost set port spantree force protocol migration set port spantree priority set spantree default path cost set spantree enable disable set spantree hello time set spantree max age set spantree priority set spantree tx hold count set spantree version show spantree set spantree hello time Use the set spantree hello time command to specify the time in...

Page 1107: ...port spantree priority set spantree default path cost set spantree enable disable set spantree forward delay set spantree max age set spantree priority set spantree tx hold count set spantree version show spantree set spantree max age Use the set spantree max age command to specify the time to keep an information message before it is discarded Syntax set spantree max age seconds Parameter Descript...

Page 1108: ...e set spantree forward delay set spantree hello time set spantree priority set spantree tx hold count set spantree version show spantree set spantree priority Use the set spantree priority command to set the bridge priority for the spanning tree Syntax set spantree priority bridge_priority Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value seconds The value must be between 2 Bridge hel...

Page 1109: ...ost set spantree enable disable set spantree forward delay set spantree hello time set spantree max age set spantree tx hold count set spantree version show spantree set spantree tx hold count Use the set spantree tx hold count command to set the value in packets used by the spanning tree in order to limit the maximum number of BPDU s transmitted during a hello time period Syntax set spantree tx h...

Page 1110: ... spantree priority set spantree version show spantree set spantree version Use the set spantree version command to set the version of the spanning tree protocol used by the device Syntax set spantree version version Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To use the rapid spanning tree version of spanning tree G450 001 set spantree version rapid spanning tree Spanning tree version...

Page 1111: ...t edge state module port Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To show edge state for all ports G450 001 super show port edge state Related Commands set port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement set port enable disable set port duplex set port edge admin state set port enable disable set port flowcontrol set port level set port name set port negotiation set port point to po...

Page 1112: ...tatus module port Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display point to point information for all ports G450 001 super show port point to point status Related Commands show port show spantree Use the show spantree command to display spanning tree information If no port is specified information for all ports is displayed Syntax show spantree module port Parameter Description P...

Page 1113: ...ID MAC ADDR 00 04 0d ea b0 2d Bridge ID priority 32768 Bridge Max Age 20 Bridge Hello Time 2 Bridge Forward Delay 15 Tx Hold Count 3 Spanning Tree Version is rapid spanning tree Spanning Tree Default Path Costs is according to common spanning tree Port State Cost Priority 10 5 not connected 4 128 10 6 not connected 4 128 Output fields Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Numb...

Page 1114: ...t bridge Designated Root Cost Total path cost to reach the root Designated Root Port Port through which the root bridge can be reached shown only on non root bridges Root Max Age Amount of time a BPDU packet should be considered valid Hello Time Number of times the root bridge sends BPDUs Bridge ID MAC ADDR Bridge MAC address used in the sent BPDUs Bridge ID Priority Bridge Priority Port Port numb...

Page 1115: ...in Context general Example To clear the SSH known host file content G450 001 super clear ssh client known hosts Related Commands crypto key generate disconnect ssh ip ssh show ip ssh crypto key generate Use the crypto key generate command to generate an SSH host key pair You must generate the host key pair before the SSH service can be used Stations that are currently active receive a warning mess...

Page 1116: ...command may take a few minutes Key was created Key version SSH2 DSA Key Fingerprint dd 60 59 fa e0 47 b8 db e3 1c 17 8d 4c 14 9a 0f root avaya Related Commands clear ssh client known hosts disconnect ssh ip ssh show ip ssh disconnect ssh Use the disconnect ssh command to disconnect an existing SSH session Syntax disconnect ssh session_id Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value bit numb...

Page 1117: ...istration information If the device is registered the current media gateway number appears If the device is not registered question marks are displayed Use the hostname command with no parameters to display the current prompt value Use the no form of this command to return the CLI prompt to the default Syntax hostname hostname_string no hostname Parameters User Level read write Parameter Descripti...

Page 1118: ...les you to establish a remote session over a secured tunnel also called a remote shell Use the no form of the command to disable the SSH service and close any open connections currently using SSH When disabling the service the G450 issues a message listing all current management interfaces If SSH is currently the only enabled management interface the user is warned that the remote connection will ...

Page 1119: ...sts crypto key generate disconnect ssh show ip ssh show ip ssh Use the show ip ssh command to display general SSH information and information about the currently active connections that are using SSH Syntax show ip ssh User Level admin Context general Example To display SSH information G450 001 super show ip ssh Max Sessions 2 Key type DSA 512 bit Listen Port 22 Ciphers List 3des cbc Session Versi...

Page 1120: ...ted before the secondary interface is disassociated Syntax clear sync interface primary secondary Name Description Max Sessions The maximum number of concurrent sessions Key type The type of SSH key always DSA and the key length Listen Port The SSH server listening port always 22 Ciphers List List of supported ciphers Session Session ID of each currently active session Version The version of the S...

Page 1121: ...command to define the specified module and port as a potential source for clock synchronization for the media gateway Syntax set sync interface primary secondary mmID portID Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value primary Keyword specifying the primary clock synchronization source secondary Keyword specifying the secondary clock synchronization source Parameter Description P...

Page 1122: ...t sync source command to specify which clock source is the active clock source The identity of the current synchronization source is not stored in persistent storage Syntax set sync source primary secondary local Parameters mmID The Media Module ID number of a stratum clock source of the form vn where n is the slot number portID Port or port range for an ISDN clock source candidate Parameter Descr...

Page 1123: ... to be the active clock source Related Commands clear sync interface set sync interface set sync switching show sync timing set sync switching Use the set sync switching command to toggle automatic failover and failback between designated primary and secondary synchronization sources Syntax set sync switching enable disable secondary Keyword specifying to set the secondary clock source to be activ...

Page 1124: ...show sync timing show sync timing Use the show sync timing command to display the status of the primary secondary and local clock sources Syntax show sync timing User Level read only Context general Example To display clock source information G450 001 super show sync timing Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value enable Keyword specifying to enable automatic sync source switching disab...

Page 1125: ...c interface set sync interface set sync source set sync switching SYN cookies clear tcp syn cookies counters Use the clear tcp syn cookies counters command to clear the SYN cookies counters Syntax clear tcp syn cookies counters User Level read only Context general Examples To clear the SYN cookies counters G450 001 super clear tcp syn cookies counters Related Commands show tcp syn cookies tcp syn ...

Page 1126: ... address state Last access sec 192 113 241 201 60342 111 211 131 1 80 IN_PROGRESS 1 192 113 241 201 23 221 2 11 11 432 ESTABLISHED 1200 192 113 241 201 23 121 192 171 121 7311 CLOSING 10 Output fields Field Description Status The operational status of the TCP SYN cookies defense mechanism Enabled or Disabled SYN rcvd The total number of TCP SYN packets received since the last time the counters wer...

Page 1127: ... or disabling SYN cookies you are prompted to copy the running configuration to the start up configuration using the copy running config startup config command and then to reset the device Syntax no tcp syn cookies User Level read write Context general remote address The remote IP address and port of the connection state The state of the connection IN_PROGRESS connection is in progress ESTABLISHED...

Page 1128: ...disable SYN cookies G450 001 config no tcp syn cookies To disable tcp syn cookies copy the running configuration to the start upconfiguration file and reset the device Related Commands clear tcp syn cookies counters show tcp syn cookies Syslog files copy syslog file ftp Use the copy syslog file ftp command to copy the Syslog file to a remote server using FTP Syntax copy syslog file ftp filename ip...

Page 1129: ...syslog file scp command to copy the Syslog file to a remote server using SCP Syntax copy syslog file scp filename ip Parameters User Level admin Context general Example To copy the Syslog file syslog1 to the host with IP address 192 168 49 10 G450 001 super copy syslog file scp syslog1 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy announcement file usb copy syslog file ftp copy syslog file tftp show upload ...

Page 1130: ... 49 10 G450 001 super copy syslog file tftp syslog1 192 168 49 10 Related Commands copy announcement file usb copy syslog file ftp copy syslog file scp show upload syslog file status copy syslog file usb Use the copy syslog file usb command to upload the Syslog file from the gateway to the USB mass storage device Syntax copy syslog file usb source filename destination usb device destination filena...

Page 1131: ...b show backup status show restore status show usb show upload syslog file status Use the show upload syslog file status command to view the status of the upload operation of a Syslog file Syntax show upload syslog file status User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value source filename The logical name for the source file destination usb device The desti...

Page 1132: ... No warning In this example an upload command has been issued but the upload fails G450 001 super Show upload syslog file status Module 10 Module 10 Source file syslog file Destination file d zion run cfg Host 135 64 102 39 Running state Idle Failure display SCP Permission denied Last warning No warning In this example no upload command has been issued G450 001 super Show upload syslog file status...

Page 1133: ...rameters User Level read write Context general Example To set the contact information of the system to Larry Williams G450 001 set system contact Larry Williams Set system contact system contact set Related Commands set system location set system name Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value string The contact name string should be typed inside double quotes The name is cleared if you l...

Page 1134: ... location tech support Set system location system location set Related Commands set system contact set system name set system name Use the set system name command to specify the name of the media gateway system Note Note Set the name of the media gateway to be consistent with the Name field on the Media Gateway administration form in Avaya Communication Manager add media gateway Parameter Descript...

Page 1135: ...t system contact set system location Telnet access ip telnet Use the ip telnet command to enable the Telnet server on all interfaces except the Services interface Use the no form of the command to disable the Telnet server Note Note For security reasons this command can only be executed from the Console port Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value string The system name string typed in...

Page 1136: ...elnet ip telnet client Use the ip telnet client command to enable the Telnet client Use the no form of the command to disable the Telnet client Note Note For security reasons this command can only be executed from the console port Note Note The ip telnet command is a secured command and will not be displayed together with the running configuration using the show running config command To see the s...

Page 1137: ... the Services interface Use the no form of the command to disable the Telnet server on the Services interface Syntax ip telnet services no ip telnet services User Level admin Context general Related Commands ip telnet ip telnet client ip telnet services show ip telnet show protocol telnet show ip telnet Use the show ip telnet command to display the configuration and status of the Telnet server and...

Page 1138: ...ble Max Sessions 5 Listen Port 23 Session Id User IP Port 0 root 135 64 102 29 1059 Related Commands ip telnet ip telnet client ip telnet services telnet telnet Use the telnet command to initiate a login session via Telnet to a network host Syntax telnet ipaddress port_number Parameters User Level read only Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value ipaddress The Telnet IP...

Page 1139: ...stics Syntax clear ip tftp server statistics User Level read write Context general Example To clear TFTP server statistics G450 001 clear ip tftp server statistics Related Commands copy ftp phone image copy ftp phone script copy running config startup config copy scp phone script copy tftp phone image copy tftp phone script erase phone image ip tftp server file system size show application memory ...

Page 1140: ... system size Use the ip tftp server file system size command to set the TFTP file system size Use the no ip tftp server file system size command to reset the TFTP file system size to its default size Note Note It is possible to increase the memory allocation for the Sniffer cache application at the expense of the TFTP file system size The Sniffer cache application may have been configured to use u...

Page 1141: ...mage copy ftp phone script copy running config startup config copy scp phone script copy tftp phone image copy tftp phone script erase phone image show application memory show ip tftp server files show upload phone script file status ip tftp server show application memory Use the show application memory CLI command to show the configured and allocated application memory Syntax show application mem...

Page 1142: ...show ip tftp server files show upload phone script file status Traffic shaping interface serial Use the interface serial command to enter Serial interface or sub interface configuration mode If the specified interface or sub interface does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Use the no form of the command to delete the interface The no form can only be used to delete ...

Page 1143: ...frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics Related Commands Traffic shaping frame relay traffic shaping map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show map class frame relay show traffic shape show traffic shape queue show traffic shape statistics traffic shape rate Related Commands description interface inter...

Page 1144: ...l map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show map class frame relay show traffic shape show traffic shape queue show traffic shape statistics traffic shape rate Related Commands Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay counters interface serial encapsulation frame relay class dlci frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte fr...

Page 1145: ...w traffic shape show traffic shape queue show traffic shape statistics traffic shape rate Related Commands Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay counters interface serial encapsulation frame relay class dlci frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip add...

Page 1146: ...ir out fragment show map class frame relay show traffic shape show traffic shape queue show traffic shape statistics traffic shape rate Related Commands Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay counters interface serial encapsulation frame relay class dlci frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority...

Page 1147: ...itted burst rate and BE is the excess burst size Syntax be out bits no be out Parameters User Level read write Context map class frame relay Example To configure outbound BE to be 64 Kbit G450 001 map class be out 64000 Related Commands Traffic shaping interface serial frame relay traffic shaping map class frame relay bc out cir out fragment show map class frame relay show traffic shape show traff...

Page 1148: ...command to configure the Committed Information Rate CIR in bits per second for the outbound direction Use the no form of this command to return the CIR to its default value Note Note This command fails if the map class is currently associated with a DLCI Syntax cir out cir no cir out Parameters User Level read only Context map class frame relay Example To configure outbound CIR to be 64 Kbps G450 ...

Page 1149: ...RF 12 fragmentation and configure the fragment size Use the no form of this command to disable FRF 12 fragmentation By default FRF 12 fragmentation is disabled Syntax no fragment size Parameters User Level read write Context map class frame relay Example To enable FRF 12 fragmentation and set the fragment size to 63 G450 001 super map class fragment 63 Related Commands Traffic shaping interface se...

Page 1150: ... map class Frame Relay table Syntax show map class frame relay User Level read only Context general Example To display the map class Frame Relay table G450 001 super show map class frame relay Showing 3 frame relay map class entries Map Class Name CIR BC BE Fragment default 56000 7000 0 OFF orna1 56000 7000 0 OFF stam 56000 7000 0 OFF Related Commands Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay co...

Page 1151: ...N configuration show frame relay fragment show frame relay lmi show frame relay map show frame relay pvc show frame relay traffic show interfaces show traffic shape Use the show traffic shape command to display traffic shaping and Frame Relay Traffic Shaping configuration information Syntax show traffic shape interface name number Parameters User Level read only Context general Parameter Descripti...

Page 1152: ...rget Byte Sustain Excess Interval Increment Interface VC Rate Limit bits int bits int ms bytes Serial 5 0 11 11 16 24000 12375 24000 96000 125 375 Serial 5 0 11 11 20 24000 12375 24000 96000 125 375 Output fields Field Description Interface Interface or sub interface type and number VC Virtual circuit which is the DLCI number Target Rate Rate that traffic is shaped to in bits per second This is th...

Page 1153: ...bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics show traffic shape queue Use the show traffic shape queue command to display information about the real time status of traffic shaping and Frame Relay Traffic Shaping queues Syntax show traffic shape queue interface name number Parameters User Level read only C...

Page 1154: ...mands Frame relay encapsulation clear frame relay counters interface serial encapsulation frame relay class dlci frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc b...

Page 1155: ...e Packets Bytes Packets Bytes Shaping Interface VC Depth Delayed Delayed Active Serial 4 1 11 11 16 0 455 220218 375 182250 No Output fields Field Description Interface Interface or sub interface type and number VC Virtual circuit which is the DLCI number Queue Depth Number of frames currently in the VC Virtual Circuit queue Packets Number of packets sent through the VC Bytes Number of bytes sent ...

Page 1156: ...elay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling traffic shape rate Use the traffic shape rate command to configure traffic shaping for outbound traffic on the current interface Syntax traffic shape rate bit_rate P...

Page 1157: ... storage device backup config usb Use the backup config usb command to back up the gateway configuration to a USB mass storage device Syntax backup config usb usb device backup name Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To back up the gateway configuration in the form of file gatewaybackup1 to usb device0 G450 001 super backup config usb usb device0 gatewaybackup1 Parameter Desc...

Page 1158: ...loaded to the media gateway using the G450 001 Download interface and the SNMP MIB The files in the USB mass storage device Syntax dir module_number file system directory Parameters User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module_number Displays downloaded files for the specified module only file system Displays files on the USB mass storage device ...

Page 1159: ... Script Nv Ram 46xxupgrade scr 10 phone ScriptC N A Phone Script Nv Ram N A 10 phone ScriptD N A Phone Script Nv Ram N A 10 phone ImageA N A Phone Image Ram N A 10 phone ImageB N A Phone Image Ram N A 10 phone ImageC N A Phone Image Ram 4601dbte1_82 bin 10 phone ImageD N A Phone Image Ram 4602dbte1_82 bin 10 phone ImageE N A Phone Image Ram 4602dape1_82 bin 10 phone ImageF N A Phone Image Ram 4601...

Page 1160: ...Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb copy usb announcement file restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb restore usb Use the restore usb command to restore gateway files from a USB mass storage device Note Note The restore operation does not fail if a specific file is missing or incompatible with the MM hardware Parameter Description Possible Va...

Page 1161: ...G450 001 super restore usb usb device0 gatewaybackup1 Related Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb copy usb announcement file erase usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status show usb safe removal usb Use the safe removal usb command to safely remove the USB mass storage device Use the command before unplugging the USB mass storage device Syntax safe removal usb f...

Page 1162: ...ow restore status show usb show backup status Use the show backup status command to display information regarding the status of a backup of the gateway configuration to a USB mass storage device Syntax show backup status User Level read only Context general Example To display information regarding the status of a backup G450 001 super show backup status Backup operation in progress Do not remove u...

Page 1163: ...l usb show restore status show usb show restore status Use the show restore status command to display information regarding the status of a restore operation of gateway files from a USB mass storage device The output displays the list of files restored so far Syntax show restore status User Level read only Context general Example To display information regarding the status of a gateway file restor...

Page 1164: ... announcement A01100 wav OK announcement Ann7 wav OK swRuntimeImage MM710V11 FDL OK Files missing error swRuntimeImage MB 1T 2L Analog Missing Related Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show usb show usb Use the show usb command to display the USB devices connected to the gateway Syntax show usb...

Page 1165: ...Vendor Product Device Serial Number FileSystem Storage Free FS Dev Id ID ID Ver MB MB 1 0x0 0x0 0 0 N A N A N A N A N A 2 0x8ec 0x12 2 0 0870974092E3A8D8 usbdevice0 61 44 FAT32 257 0x0 0x0 0 0 N A N A N A N A N A Related Commands backup config usb copy announcement file usb copy usb announcement file erase usb restore usb safe removal usb show backup status show restore status Users show username ...

Page 1166: ...efault there is only a single user account named root with password root which accesses the administrator level You cannot delete this basic user account nor modify its access level However you can modify its basic password Note Note For security reasons you should change the root password immediately Syntax username name password passwd asg secret secret access type access_type no username name P...

Page 1167: ...ccess type of the root user G450 001 super username root password verysecret access type read write ERROR User account root has always an administrator access type Note Note If you wish to define a username which includes spaces you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks for example new york Related Commands login authentication lockout show username secret ASG secret key of a dadmin user...

Page 1168: ...mmand fails for USP interfaces and when higher or lower layers are defined for that interface Syntax no interface Serial module if_number if_link_type For USP interfaces if_number has the syntax port ip_interface sub_interface ip_interface For DS1 interfaces if_number has the syntax port channel_group ip_interface sub_interface ip_interface Parameters User Level read write Context general interfac...

Page 1169: ...the bandwidth parameter manually for this interface Use the no form of this command to restore the bandwidth parameter to its default value The manually specified bandwidth value overrides the dynamically calculated bandwidth during route cost calculations Syntax bandwidth kilobits no bandwidth Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 DS1 FR SUB ...

Page 1170: ...ommand to restore the default value For E1 and USP interfaces the default value is flags For T1 interfaces the default is marks Syntax idle character flags marks no idle character Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 USP FR L2 Example To set the idle character to marks G450 001 if Serial 3 1 idle character marks Param...

Page 1171: ...d to specify that DCD signals are used to determine line status Syntax no ignore dcd User Level read write Context interface Serial USP FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 Example To ignore DCD signals on an interface G450 001 if Serial 3 1 1 ignore dcd Related Commands bandwidth idle character interface serial invert txclock nrzi encoding transmitter delay invert txclock Use the invert txclock command...

Page 1172: ... nrzi encoding command to enable the non return to zero inverted NRZI line coding format on the specified interface Use the no form of the command to disable NRZI encoding Syntax no nrzi encoding User Level read write Context interface Serial USP FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 transmitter delay Use the transmitter delay command to set the minimum number of flags to be sent between successive packe...

Page 1173: ...nvert txclock nrzi encoding Van Jacobson header compression clear ip tcp header compression Use the clear ip tcp header compression command to clear TCP compression statistics either for all enabled interfaces or for a specific interface To clear TCP compression statistics for all enabled interfaces do not enter an interface type and number Note Note There is no renegotiation of parameters Syntax ...

Page 1174: ... compression show ip rtp header compression show ip rtp header compression brief show ip tcp header compression ip tcp compression connections Use the ip tcp compression connections command to specify the total number of TCP header compression connections supported on the current interface Use the no form of this command to restore the default value of 16 connections Syntax no ip tcp compression c...

Page 1175: ...s clear ip rtp header compression clear ip tcp header compression ip rtp compression connections ip rtp header compression ip rtp max period ip rtp max time ip rtp non tcp mode ip rtp port range ip tcp header compression show ip rtp header compression show ip rtp header compression brief show ip tcp header compression ip tcp header compression Use the ip tcp header compression command to enable TC...

Page 1176: ...p tcp compression connections show ip rtp header compression show ip rtp header compression brief show ip tcp header compression Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value iphc format Keyword specifying the header compression format Note For a PPP or Dialer interface specifying the iphc format parameter activates IPHC compression while not specifying the command activates VJ compression u...

Page 1177: ...mpression interface_name Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display TCP header compression statistics for all interfaces G450 001 super show ip tcp header compression IP TCP header compression statistics Interface Serial 3 1 1 1 Rcvd 0 Full Headers 0 Compressed 0 Errors Sent 85 Full Headers 34 Compressed 1139 Bytes Saved 4335 Bytes Sent 1 26 Efficiency Improvement Factor Co...

Page 1178: ...e_name Name Description Rcvd Information on received TCP packets as follows Full Headers the number of TCP packets with full headers received Compressed the number of TCP packets with compressed headers received Errors the number of packets discarded during de compression due to errors Sent Information on sent TCP packets as follows Full Headers the number of TCP packets with full headers sent Com...

Page 1179: ...rface_name The name of the interface Name Description Interface The interface on which TCP header compressions is being applied Active Whether TCP header compression is active and working on this interface Slots The number of Rx and Tx slots That is the total number of TCP header compression connections supported on this interface Packets Sent The number of compressed packets sent the number of fu...

Page 1180: ...sion brief show ip tcp header compression VLAN configuration clear port static vlan Use the clear port static vlan command to delete statically configured VLANs from the port Syntax clear port static vlan module port_range vlan_id Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To remove VLAN 5 from port 6 5 G450 001 super clear port static vlan 6 5 5 VLAN 5 is unbound from port 6 5 Param...

Page 1181: ...default VLAN Syntax clear vlan vlan_id name vlan_name Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To delete VLAN 100 G450 001 super clear vlan 100 This command will assign all ports on vlan 100 to their default in the entire management domain do you want to continue Y N y VLAN 100 deletion successful Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value vlan_id The VLAN number name Keyw...

Page 1182: ...interface If the specified interface does not exist the system creates it and enters its configuration mode Syntax no interface vlan vlan_id ip_interface Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create VLAN 2 and enter its configuration context G450 001 super interface Vlan 2 To create a sub interface 1 on VLAN 2 G450 001 if Vlan 2 interface Vlan 2 1 Parameter Description Possib...

Page 1183: ...et port vlan binding mode set trunk set vlan show cam vlan show port vlan binding mode show trunk show vlan icc vlan Use the icc vlan command to set the current VLAN as the ICC VLAN Syntax icc vlan User Level read write Context interface VLAN L2 L2 L3 Example To set VLAN 2 as the ICC VLAN G450 001 super interface vlan 2 G450 001 if Vlan 2 icc vlan Related Commands ICC configuration show icc vlan R...

Page 1184: ... 10 6 in the G450 to VLAN 2 G450 001 set port static vlan 10 5 6 2 VLAN 2 is bound to port 10 5 VLAN 2 is bound to port 10 6 Related Commands clear port static vlan clear vlan icc vlan interface vlan set port vlan set port vlan binding mode set trunk set vlan show cam vlan show port vlan binding mode show trunk show vlan Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module The module number ...

Page 1185: ...super set port vlan 1 10 3 Port 10 3 added to VLAN 1 Related Commands clear port static vlan clear vlan icc vlan interface vlan set port static vlan set port vlan binding mode set trunk set vlan show cam vlan show port vlan binding mode show trunk show vlan Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value vlan_num Number identifying the VLAN module The module number port Number of the port on t...

Page 1186: ...ually configured for those ports G450 001 set port vlan binding mode 10 5 6 static Set Port vlan binding method 10 5 Set Port vlan binding method 10 6 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module The module number port_list The port to bind to VLANs You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for both ETH LAN ports 5 6 on the front panel value The typ...

Page 1187: ...5 in the G450 G450 001 super set trunk 6 5 dot1q Dot1Q VLAN tagging set on port 6 5 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a range of ports separated by a dash for example 10 5 6 for both ETH LAN ports 5 6 on the front panel off Keyword that specifies to force the port to become a non tagging port a...

Page 1188: ...VLAN Syntax set vlan vlan_id name vlan_name Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create VLAN number 3 named gregory G450 001 set vlan 3 name gregory VLAN id 3 vlan name gregory created Note Note If you wish to define a name which includes spaces you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks for example new york Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value vlan_i...

Page 1189: ...ers User Level read only Context general Example To display all MAC entries in the CAM table for VLAN 54 G450 001 super show cam vlan 54 Total Matching CAM Entries Displayed 3 Dest MAC Route Dest VLAN Destination Ports 00 01 02 dd 2f 9f 54 6 13 00 02 2d 47 00 6f 54 10 2 00 02 4b 5b 28 40 54 6 13 Related Commands clear port static vlan clear vlan icc vlan interface vlan set port static vlan set por...

Page 1190: ... only Context general Example To display VLAN binding information for all ports G450 001 super show port vlan binding mode port 10 5 is statically bound port 10 6 is statically bound Related Commands clear port static vlan clear vlan icc vlan interface vlan set port static vlan set port vlan set port vlan binding mode set trunk set vlan show cam vlan show port vlan binding mode show trunk show vla...

Page 1191: ...ay binding information for port 10 5 to port 10 6 G450 001 super show trunk 10 5 6 Port Mode Binding mode Native vlan Vlans allowed on trunk 10 5 off statically bound 1 1 Port Mode Binding mode Native vlan Vlans allowed on trunk 10 6 off statically bound 1 1 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module Number of the module port Number of the port on the module You can also specify a ...

Page 1192: ...ll VLANs is displayed Syntax show vlan vlan_id name vlan_name Parameters Field Description Port Module and port numbers Mode VLAN tagging status of the port Possible values dot1q the port uses dot1Q tagging mode off the port uses clear tagging mode Binding mode Binding mode of the port Possible values statically bound bound to configured Native vlan Number of the Port VLAN ID This is the VLAN to w...

Page 1193: ...5 V25 To display information for VLAN 1 G450 001 super show vlan 1 VLAN ID Vlan name 1 V1 Switch Ports currently bound to this vlan In module 10 5 Switch Ports statically bound to this vlan None Related Commands clear port static vlan clear vlan icc vlan interface vlan set port static vlan set port vlan set port vlan binding mode set trunk set vlan show cam vlan show port vlan binding mode show tr...

Page 1194: ...al Example To camp on busyout the entire VoIP engine G450 001 super campon busyout voip dsp To camp on busyout DSP childboard 3 G450 001 super campon busyout voip dsp 3 To camp on busyout DSP childboard 3 Core 2 G450 001 super campon busyout voip dsp 3 2 Related Commands busyout voip dsp release voip dsp reset voip dsp show voip dsp show voip parameters test voip dsp Parameter Description Possible...

Page 1195: ...ildboard in slot 2 G450 001 super reset voip dsp 2 Related Commands busyout voip dsp campon busyout voip dsp release voip dsp show voip dsp show voip parameters test voip dsp show voip dsp Use the show voip dsp command to display information about the DSP and DSP cores parameters status and occupancy Syntax show voip dsp dsp id Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value dsp id The slot nu...

Page 1196: ...0 used State InUse Admin State Release Core Channels Admin state State Error In Use Msg 1 4 of 20 Release InUse No Status Messages 2 1 of 20 Camp on InUse No Status Messages 3 5 of 20 Release InUse No Status Messages 4 0 of 20 Busyout Idle No Status Messages Related Commands busyout voip dsp campon busyout voip dsp release voip dsp reset voip dsp show voip parameters test voip dsp Parameter Descri...

Page 1197: ...t Messages Additional Status No Status Messages CURRENT STATE In Use 20 of 100 channels 240 of 1200 points 0 0 used VoIP DSPs PARAMETERS VoIP Child CODE SUFFIX HW FW Chan Admin Oper Fault Slot Board VINTAGE VINTAGE InUse State State Status 1 VOIP 8122 A 3 235 20 80 Release InUse No Error 2 VOIP 7119 A 5 215 0 20 Busyout Idle No Error 3 Not Installed 4 SYNC Related Commands VoIP busyout voip dsp ca...

Page 1198: ... create SNMP traps Syntax busyout voip dsp dsp id core id Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To busyout DSP childboard 3 G450 001 super busyout voip dsp 3 To busyout DSP childboard 1 Core 2 G450 001 super busyout voip dsp 1 2 Related Commands campon busyout voip dsp release voip dsp reset voip dsp show voip dsp show voip parameters test voip dsp Parameter Description Possible...

Page 1199: ... core id Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To release the entire VoIP engine G450 001 super release voip dsp To release DSP childboard 2 G450 001 super release voip dsp 2 To release core 4 in DSP childboard 1 G450 001 super release voip dsp 1 4 Related Commands busyout voip dsp campon busyout voip dsp reset voip dsp show mm show voip dsp show voip parameters test voip dsp Pa...

Page 1200: ...t Status No Fault Messages Additional Status No Status Messages CURRENT STATE In Use 20 of 100 channels 240of 1200 points 0 0 used VoIP DSPs PARAMETERS VoIP Child CODE SUFFIX HW FW Chan Admin Oper Fault Slot Board VINTAGE VINTAGE InUse State State Status 1 VOIP 8122 A 3 235 20 80 Release InUse No Error 2 VOIP 7119 A 5 215 0 20 Busyout Idle No Error 3 Not Installed 4 SYNC Related Commands VoIP busy...

Page 1201: ...n disruptive tests will run Note Note Status changes during the test create SNMP traps Syntax test voip dsp dsp id core id Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To start a BTR test on all DSPs at once G450 001 super test voip dsp DSP Core Result Error Code 1 1 PASS 1 2 FAIL Error Code 1 1 3 FAIL Error Code 3 1 4 PASS 2 1 PASS 3 Not Present 4 Not a VoIP DSP childboard Parameter D...

Page 1202: ...RE TEST RESULTS DSP Core Result Error Code 1 2 FAIL Error Code 1 Related Commands busyout voip dsp campon busyout voip dsp release voip dsp reset voip dsp show voip dsp show voip parameters VPN clear crypto isakmp Use the clear crypto isakmp command to flush a specific ISAKMP SA or all the ISAKMP SAs Tip Tip Use the command show crypto isakmp sa to display the connection IDs Tip Tip It is recommen...

Page 1203: ...crypto isakmp peer show crypto isakmp peer group show crypto isakmp policy show crypto isakmp sa show crypto map show ip active lists show ip crypto list clear crypto sa Use the clear crypto sa command to clear all or specific IPSec SAs Security Association structures Syntax clear crypto sa all list crypto_list_id peer peer_ip_address spi peer_ip_address esp spi number Parameter Description Possib...

Page 1204: ...eer group show crypto isakmp policy show crypto isakmp sa show crypto map show ip active lists show ip crypto list Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value all Keyword specifying that all IPSec SAs should be cleared list Keyword specifying that all crypto IPSec SAs associated with crypto_list_id should be cleared peer Keyword specifying that all crypto IPSec SAs associated with crypto p...

Page 1205: ...show ip crypto list crypto ipsec df bit Use the crypto ipsec df bit command to set the Don t Fragment bit to one of the following modes clear the DF bit of the encapsulated packet is never set and PMTUD is not maintained for the IPSec tunnel Packets traversing an IPSec tunnel are pre fragmented according to the MTU of the SA regardless of their DF bit In case packets are fragmented the DF bit is c...

Page 1206: ...p crypto ipsec minimal pmtu Use the crypto ipsec minimal pmtu command to set the minimal PMTU value which can be applied to an SA when the G450 participates in Path MTU Discovery PMTUD for the tunnel pertaining to that SA Use the no form of the command to restore the minimal PMTU to the default value 300 Syntax no crypto ipsec minimal pmtu bytes Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Def...

Page 1207: ...bit ip crypto group crypto ipsec nat transparency udp encapsulation NAT Traversal is enabled in the device by default Use the crypto ipsec nat transparency udp encapsulation command to re enable NAT Traversal if it was disabled Use the no form of the command to completely disable NAT Traversal in the device Syntax no crypto nat transparency udp encapsulation User Level read write Context general E...

Page 1208: ...ption Possible Values Default Value name The transform set name 1 32 characters no spaces esp des Keyword specifying the following encryption type Encapsulation Security Protocol and Data Encryption Standard esp 3des Keyword specifying the following encryption type Encapsulation Security Protocol and Triple Data Encryption Standard esp aes Keyword specifying the following encryption type Encapsula...

Page 1209: ...nsform set ts3 esp null esp md5 hmac G450 001 config transform ts3 To enter the crypto IPSec transform set context G450 001 super crypto ipsec transform set ts1 G450 001 config transform ts1 esp null Keyword specifying the following encryption type Encapsulation Security Protocol without encryption Note This option is intended for lab testing esp md5 hmac Keyword specifying the following authentic...

Page 1210: ...sulation mode which is tunnel mode Note Note Transport mode cannot be used unless the remote VPN peer supports Transport mode and is configured to use it Syntax no mode tunnel transport Parameters User Level read write Context crypto ipsec transform set Example To set the IPSec encapsulation mode to tunnel G450 001 config transform ts1 mode tunnel Parameter Description Possible Values Default Valu...

Page 1211: ...either the long term secrets nor the other session keys Use the no form of the command to disable PFS for IKE phase 2 default setting Syntax no set pfs group1 group2 group5 group14 Note Note Using set pfs with no parameters sets the PFS group to 1 Parameters User Level read write Context crypto ipsec transform set Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value group1 Keyword specifying that I...

Page 1212: ...he no form of the command to disable the SA lifetime Syntax no set security association lifetime seconds seconds kilobytes kilobytes disable Parameters User Level read write Context crypto ipsec transform set Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value seconds Keyword indicating to specify the lifetime in seconds seconds The lifetime in seconds 120 86 400 kilobytes Keyword indicating to sp...

Page 1213: ... isakmp invalid spi recovery User Level read write Context general Example To enable invalid SPI recovery G450 001 super no crypto isakmp invalid spi recovery Related Commands ip crypto group crypto isakmp nat keepalive NAT Traversal keepalive is enabled in the device by default Use the crypto isakmp nat keepalive command to re enable NAT Traversal keepalive if it was disabled and configure the ke...

Page 1214: ...peer command to enter the crypto ISAKMP peer context and create or edit an ISAKMP peer Use the no form of the command to delete a remote VPN peer Note Note You cannot delete an ISAKMP peer that is referenced by a crypto map you must first delete the peer from the crypto map by entering crypto map context using the crypto map command and then delete the peer using the no set peer command Syntax no ...

Page 1215: ...list isakmp policy keepalive VPN keepalive track pre shared key self identity show crypto isakmp peer suggest key continuous channel Use the continuous channel command in a crypto ISAKMP peer context to enable continuous channel IKE which keeps the IKE phase1 session always up and running even if there is no traffic Use the no form of this command to disable continuous channel IKE default setting ...

Page 1216: ...VPN crypto isakmp peer description ISAKMP peer crypto isakmp peer initiate mode isakmp policy keepalive VPN keepalive track pre shared key self identity show crypto isakmp peer suggest key Related Commands VPN crypto map crypto map description crypto map set transform set set dscp set peer crypto map set peer group show crypto map description ISAKMP peer Use the description command to enter a desc...

Page 1217: ...akmp peer suggest key initiate mode Use the initiate mode command to specify which IKE Phase 1 mode to use when communicating with the peer Use the no form of this command to restore the default setting which is main mode Note Note Aggressive mode is one of the prerequisites for working with dynamic IP addresses Syntax no initiate mode main aggressive none Parameter Description Possible Values Def...

Page 1218: ...cy for the ISAKMP peer Use the no form of the command to delete the ISAKMP policy for the ISAKMP peer Note Note You cannot delete an ISAKMP policy that is referenced by an ISAKMP peer that is in turn referenced by an active crypto map Syntax no isakmp policy id Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value main Keyword specifying that the device operate in IKE main mode aggressive Keyword sp...

Page 1219: ...VPN Use the keepalive command in crypto isakmp peer interface context to enable DPD Dead Peer Detection keepalives that check whether the remote peer is up Use the no form of this command to disable DPD keepalives default setting Syntax no keepalive seconds retry retry seconds on demand periodic Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value id The ID of the ISAKMP policy 1 20 Para...

Page 1220: ... the remote peer or the interface is up Use the no form of this command to disable this mechanism default setting Note Note When configuring VPN you can use the keepalive track command instead of the keepalive command when the remote peer does not support DPD or when you want to monitor servers behind the VPN remote peer Note Note You cannot configure both keepalive track and ip address dhcp DHCP ...

Page 1221: ...terface with object tracker 2 G450 001 config if FastEthernet 10 2 keepalive track 2 Related Commands VPN description ISAKMP peer continuous channel crypto isakmp peer initiate mode isakmp policy keepalive VPN pre shared key self identity show crypto isakmp peer suggest key pre shared key Use the pre shared key command to configure the IKE pre shared key Use the no form of the command to delete th...

Page 1222: ...p policy keepalive VPN keepalive track self identity show crypto isakmp peer suggest key self identity Use the self identity command to set the identity of the current device Use the no form of this command to return the value to the default value which is the address of the device Syntax no self identity address fqdn fqdn str Note Note Specify the self identity in FQDN format when using aggressiv...

Page 1223: ...annel crypto isakmp peer initiate mode isakmp policy keepalive VPN keepalive track pre shared key show crypto isakmp peer suggest key suggest key Use the suggest key utility command to generate a random string which you can use as a pre shared key for IKE You must use the same key on both peers Syntax suggest key key length key type alphanumeric hexadecimal Parameter Description Possible Values De...

Page 1224: ...N keepalive track pre shared key self identity show controllers remote crypto isakmp peer group Use the crypto isakmp peer group command to enter the crypto ISAKMP peer group context and create or edit an ISAKMP peer group Use the no form of the command to delete a peer group Note Note A peer group must contain at least one peer in order for it to be ready Use the set peer command to add a peer to...

Page 1225: ...vpn avaya com G450 001 super crypto isakmp peer group vpn avaya com G450 001 config peer grp vpn avaya com Related Commands crypto ipsec transform set crypto map crypto isakmp peer crypto isakmp policy description ISAKMP peer group ip crypto group ip crypto list set peer peer group show crypto isakmp peer group description ISAKMP peer group Use the description command to enter a description for th...

Page 1226: ...p peer group set peer peer group Use the set peer command to add a peer to the peer group Use the no form of the command to remove a peer from the peer group Syntax no set peer ip address hostname index index Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value desc The description of the ISAKMP peer group Note If you wish to include spaces in the description you must enclose the string ...

Page 1227: ...p policy command to enter the crypto ISAKMP policy context and create or edit IKE Phase 1 parameters Syntax crypto isakmp policy id Parameters User Level read write hostname The remote peer hostname index A number specifying the relative position of the peer within the peer group If this optional parameter is not used the current peer is added at the end of the peer group list and is assigned an i...

Page 1228: ...n ISAKMP policy encryption group hash ip crypto list ip crypto group lifetime show crypto isakmp policy authentication Use the authentication command to set the authentication of ISAKMP policy to pre shared secret Syntax authentication pre share Parameters User Level read write Context crypto isakmp policy Example To set the authentication of ISAKMP policy to pre shared secret G450 001 config isak...

Page 1229: ... no description desc Parameters User Level read write Context crypto isakmp policy Example To specify the ISAKMP policy description as isakmp policy 1 G450 001 config isakmp 1 description isakmp policy 1 Related Commands authentication crypto isakmp policy encryption group hash lifetime show crypto isakmp policy Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value desc The description of the ISAKMP...

Page 1230: ...rithm for an ISAKMP policy as Triple DES G450 001 config isakmp 1 encryption 3des Related Commands authentication crypto isakmp policy description ISAKMP policy group hash lifetime show crypto isakmp policy Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value encryption The encryption algorithm to be used des Data Encryption Standard 56 bits 3des Triple DES 168 bits aes Advanced Encryption Standard...

Page 1231: ...e Diffie Hellman group for an ISAKMP policy to 1 G450 001 config isakmp 1 group 1 Related Commands authentication crypto isakmp policy description ISAKMP policy encryption hash lifetime show crypto isakmp policy hash Use the hash command to set the hash method for an ISAKMP policy Use the no form of the command to return the hash method to the default sha Syntax no hash hash method Parameter Descr...

Page 1232: ...ime show crypto isakmp policy lifetime Use the lifetime command to set the lifetime of the ISAKMP SA in seconds Use the no form of the command to return the lifetime to the default value Note Note You cannot change the lifetime settings of an ISAKMP policy referenced by an ISAKMP peer that is linked to a crypto map Syntax no lifetime seconds Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value hash...

Page 1233: ...y encryption group hash show crypto isakmp policy crypto isakmp suggest key Use the crypto isakmp suggest key command to generate a random string which you can use as a pre shared key for IKE You must use the same key on both peers Syntax crypto isakmp suggest key key length key type alphanumeric hexadecimal Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value seconds The number of seconds defining...

Page 1234: ...kmp policy keepalive VPN keepalive track pre shared key self identity show crypto isakmp peer suggest key crypto map Use the crypto map command to enter crypto map context and create or edit a crypto map Use the no form of the command to delete a specific crypto map Note Note You cannot delete a crypto map that is being used by an active crypto list Parameter Description Possible Values Default Va...

Page 1235: ...er group show crypto map continuous channel Use the continuous channel command in a crypto ISAKMP peer context to enable continuous channel IKE which keeps the IKE phase1 session always up and running even if there is no traffic Use the no form of this command to disable continuous channel IKE default setting Use the continuous channel command in a crypto map context to enable continuous channel I...

Page 1236: ...shared key self identity show crypto isakmp peer suggest key Related Commands VPN crypto map crypto map description crypto map set transform set set dscp set peer crypto map set peer group show crypto map description crypto map Use the description command to enter a description for the crypto map Use the no form of the command to clear a description for the crypto map Syntax no description desc Pa...

Page 1237: ... map set dscp Use the set dscp command to set the DSCP value in the tunneled packet Use the no form of this command to take the DSCP value from the original header default setting Syntax no set dscp dscp value Parameters User Level read write Context crypto map Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value dscp value The static DSCP value in the DS field of the tunneled packet The default se...

Page 1238: ... map Use the set peer command to attach a peer to a crypto map Use the no form of the command to remove the peer from the crypto map Note Note You can only change the peer of a crypto map when the map is inactive Note Note The set peer and set peer group commands are mutually exclusive You can attach to a given crypto map either a peer or a peer group not both Syntax set peer ip address hostname n...

Page 1239: ...remove the peer group from the crypto map Note Note You can only change the peer group of a crypto map when the map is inactive Note Note The set peer and set peer group commands are mutually exclusive You must attach to a given crypto map either a peer or a peer group not both Syntax set peer group peer group name no set peer group Parameters User Level read write Context crypto map Examples To a...

Page 1240: ...om the crypto map Note Note You cannot remove a transform set from a crypto map that is being used by an active crypto list You must first de activate the crypto list using the no form of the ip crypto group command See ip crypto group on page 1241 Syntax no set transform set name Parameters User Level read write Context crypto map Example To configure transform set ts1 G450 001 config crypto 10 s...

Page 1241: ...if they are linked to an active crypto list To modify a parameter linked to an active crypto list you must first deactivate the list using the no ip crypto group command in the context of the interface on which the crypto list is activated Syntax no ip crypto group crypto list id Parameters User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 FR SUB L2 DS1 FR SUB L2 L3 DS1 PPP L2 DS1 PPP L2 L3 USP P...

Page 1242: ... form of the ip crypto group command Syntax no ip crypto list index Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To enter the crypto list 901 context G450 001 super ip crypto list 901 G450 001 Crypto 901 Related Commands crypto ipsec transform set crypto map crypto isakmp peer crypto isakmp peer group crypto isakmp policy description ip rule destination ip ip rule VPN ip crypto group l...

Page 1243: ...p rule 21 G450 001 Crypto 901 ip rule 21 Related Commands description ip rule destination ip ip crypto list local address protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list description ip rule Use the description command to enter a description for the ip rule in the ip crypto list Use the no form of the command to clear a description for the ip rule Syntax no description desc Parameter Description P...

Page 1244: ...ss protect crypto map source ip show ip crypto list destination ip Use the destination ip command to specify the destination IP address of packets to which the current rule applies Use the no form of the command to set the destination IP address to any Syntax destination ip host ip any ip wildcard no destination ip Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value desc The description of the ip ...

Page 1245: ...ket sniffing VPN next hop policy based routing show ip next hop list show isdn bri link Related Commands Policy composite operation dscp policy show dscp table icmp show composite operation show isdn bri link source ip tcp destination port tcp established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that specifies the current...

Page 1246: ... matches this rule bypasses IPSec processing and continues unprotected Note Note You cannot enable or disable crypto map protection when the crypto list is active You must first deactivate the list using the no ip crypto group command in the context of the interface on which the crypto list is activated Syntax protect crypto map crypto map id no protect Parameters User Level read write Context ip ...

Page 1247: ...arameters User Level read write Context ip pbr list ip rule ip qos list ip rule ip capture list ip rule ip access control list ip rule ip crypto list ip rule Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value host Keyword that indicates a specific host IP address ip_address The IP address of packets to which the rule is applied any Keyword that indicates any IP address ip_address wildcard The ran...

Page 1248: ...established tcp source port udp destination port udp source port Related Commands VPN description ip rule destination ip ip crypto list ip rule VPN local address protect crypto map show ip crypto list local address Use the local address command to set the local IP address for the IPSec tunnels derived from the crypto list Use the no form of the command to delete the local IP address Note Note You ...

Page 1249: ...to list crypto list rule or peer IP address are specified then all SAs are displayed sorted first by interface and then by crypto list rule index Note Note The IPSec SA statistics counters are reset when any of the following occurs The clear crypto sa counters command is used avipsMonitorRstCntrs is set in the MIB equivalent to the above The clear crypto sa all command is used The crypto list is a...

Page 1250: ...ess 135 64 102 109 Local identity 149 49 77 0 255 255 255 0 Remote identity 135 64 102 0 255 255 255 0 path mtu 1500 media mtu 1500 Current outbound spi 0xfdc7d80c Inbound packets Outbound packets Total 6412359 Total 3643507 Total OK 6412359 Total OK 3643507 Decrypt 6412359 Encrypt 3643507 Verify 6412359 Digest 3643507 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value crypto list id The crypto l...

Page 1251: ...s FastEthernet 10 2 0 Rule 10 Crypto map 1 Local address 134 1 157 2 Remote address 134 1 155 1 Local identity 8 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 Remote identity 149 49 43 0 255 255 255 0 path mtu 1500 media mtu 1500 Current outbound spi 0x0 Inbound packets Outbound packets Total 0 Total 1075 Total OK 0 Total OK 1044 Decrypt 0 Encrypt 1044 Verify 0 Digest 1044 Decaps 0 Encaps 1044 Decompompressed 0 Compressed 0 In...

Page 1252: ... SAs being displayed Local address The local address configured for the crypto list used for the local tunnel endpoint of all traffic protected by SAs pertaining to the crypto list The local address is either an interface name or an IP address depending on configuration Rule The ID of the crypto list rule that contains the SAs being displayed Crypto Map The ID of the crypto map that the rule point...

Page 1253: ...network by path MTU discovery error messages This does not include the IPSec encapsulation overhead Media mtu The media MTU kept for this SA as learned from the underlying interface This does not include the IPSec encapsulation overhead Currentoutbound spi The value of the currently active outbound SPI expressed in hexadecimal encoding If none exists 0x0 is displayed Name Description This paramete...

Page 1254: ... the total number of packets discarded due to some error This number is an aggregate of the more specific numbers below Invalid len the number of packets discarded after being received through this tunnel because the length is not aligned to the cipher block Replay failed the number of packets discarded after being received through this tunnel because of anti replay verification failure Sa expired...

Page 1255: ...ctets received before decompression for all packets including incompressible packets Decompression ratio a measure of the efficiency of the compression engine at the remote peer This is the ratio between the number of octets resulting after decompression and the number of octets received before decompression for compressible packets only Uncomp bytes the total number of bytes after decompression i...

Page 1256: ...tal length Other discards the number of packets dropped due to other reasons not covered by any of the above counters Overall compression ratio a measure of the total compression efficiency This is the ratio between the number of octets before compression and the number of octets resulting after compression for all packets including incompressible packets Compression ratio a measure of the compres...

Page 1257: ...d by the SA Each transform is listed in a separate row PFS Displays information about Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS usage when the SA is negotiated by IKE Phase 2 Possible values are No PFS is not used N PFS is used with Diffie Hellman group N Secs left The number of seconds left for this SA s expiration KB left The number of kilobytes left for this SA s expiration Mode The encapsulation mode tunnel...

Page 1258: ... Tunnel ts6 aes 192 sha hmac No No 3600 4608000 Tunnel ts7 3des sha hmac No No 3600 4608000 Tunnel tsDef 3des sha hmac No 2 3600 4608000 Tunnel tsVoip des sha hmac No No 3600 4608000 Tunnel Output fields Name Description Name the name of the transform set ESP Enc the type of encryption required for ESP traffic ESP Hash the type of HMAC Hash Message Authentication Code required for ESP traffic PCP ...

Page 1259: ...ation Syntax show crypto isakmp peer User Level read only Context general Example To display the crypto ISAKMP peer configuration G450 001 super show crypto isakmp peer Description Peer identity Self identity Auth Plc Md DPD Track Cnt K alv Id San Jose office 111 110 110 112 IPv4 Address psk 2 MM none No New Jersey vpn nj avaya com vpn ca avaya com psk 5 AM on de 5 No New York office vpn ny avaya ...

Page 1260: ...show ip crypto list show crypto isakmp peer group Use the show crypto isakmp peer group command to display crypto ISAKMP peer group configuration Syntax show crypto isakmp peer group User Level read only Context general Md The IKE mode of operation MM Main Mode AM Aggressive Mode DPD K alv The keepalive state none no keepAlive on de on demand priod periodic Track Id The ID of the object tracker wh...

Page 1261: ...crypto isakmp peer command Related Commands clear crypto isakmp clear crypto sa clear crypto sa counters crypto isakmp peer group show crypto ipsec sa show crypto ipsec transform set show crypto isakmp peer show crypto isakmp policy show crypto isakmp sa show crypto map show ip active lists show ip crypto list show crypto isakmp policy Use the show crypto isakmp policy command to display ISAKMP po...

Page 1262: ...pto list show crypto isakmp sa Use the show crypto isakmp sa command to display the ISAKMP SA database status Syntax show crypto isakmp sa User Level read only Context general Name Description Id The ID of the ISAKMP policy list whose parameters are being listed Description The description of the ISAKMP policy list Encr The encryption algorithm used des 3des aes aes 192 or aes 256 Hash The hashing...

Page 1263: ...ption C id Connection ID set using the crypto map command Local IP address of local peer Remote IP address of remote peer State The state of the ISAKMP SA Ready ready to pass ISAKMP information MM Neg Main Mode Negotiation AM Neg Aggressive Mode Negotiation No Srvc in Deactivate process Delete in Delete process Backoff in Back off period after remote peer presumed dead Encr The encryption algorith...

Page 1264: ...ntax show crypto map id Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To display all crypto map configurations G450 001 super show crypto map ID Description Remote Peer Group Transform set DSCP C cnl 5 Tel Aviv VPN 1 0 0 2 Tel Aviv Transform copy Yes 7 UK VPN vpn lnd uk avaya com UK Transform copy Yes 8 NY VPN group ny vpn group NY Transform copy Yes 10 Haifa VPN 2 1 1 2 Haifa Transform ...

Page 1265: ...information about a specific policy list or all lists Syntax show ip active lists list_index list_type Parameters User Level read only Name Description ID Crypto map ID set using the crypto map command Description Crypto map description Remote peer Group IP address or name of remote peer or name of Peer Group Transform set The name of the transform set DSCP The DSCP configuration C cnl Whether con...

Page 1266: ... Name The name of the interface on which the list is operating Dir The direction of traffic on which the list is operating Options are In the list is operating on incoming traffic Out the list is operating on outgoing traffic Type The type of list Options are ACL Access Control List Controls which packets are authorized to pass through the interface QoS QoS List Can change the value of the QoS fie...

Page 1267: ...a show crypto map show ip crypto list show ip crypto list Use the show ip crypto list command to display all or specific crypto list configurations Syntax show ip crypto list list number active list all detail Parameters User Level read only Context general interface Dialer L2 L2 L3 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value list number The ID of the crypto list for which to display confi...

Page 1268: ... 11 0 0 0 0 255 50 Any Src 100 1 0 0 0 0 255 255 protect 3 Dst 10 3 1 0 0 0 0 255 60 Any Src 100 1 0 0 0 0 255 255 protect 3 Dst 10 3 11 0 0 0 0 255 70 Any Src 100 1 0 0 0 0 255 255 protect 22 Dst 100 2 0 0 0 0 255 255 80 Any Src 100 1 0 0 0 0 255 255 protect 23 Dst 100 3 0 0 0 0 255 255 90 Any Src 100 1 1 0 0 0 0 255 protect 24 Dst 100 4 0 0 0 0 255 255 100 Any Src 100 1 11 0 0 0 0 255 protect 24...

Page 1269: ...Address The configured local address for the crypto list Can be either an IP address or an interface name Rules The table of ip rules as follows Index The index number of the ip rule Deflt indicates the default ip rule Protocol This field is reserved for future use IP The source or destination IP address of the rule For each rule the source IP is displayed first and the destination IP is displayed...

Page 1270: ... router on the current interface Use the no form of this command to delete a virtual router Syntax no ip vrrp vr_id address ip addr auth key string override addr owner preempt primary primary addr priority pri value timer value Description Crypto map description Remote peer Group IP address or name of remote peer or name of Peer Group Transform set The name of the transform set to which this crypt...

Page 1271: ...address Use the ip vrrp address command to assign an IP address to the virtual router Use the no form of this command to remove an IP address from a virtual router Syntax no ip vrrp vr_id address ip_address Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value vr_id The virtual router ID 1 255 ip addr The IP address to be associated with the virtual router on the VLAN string The authentication passw...

Page 1272: ...rrp show ip vrrp ip vrrp auth key Use the ip vrrp auth key command to set the virtual router simple password authentication for the virtual router ID Use the no form of this command to disable simple password authentication for the virtual router instance Syntax no ip vrrp vr_id auth key key_string Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value vr_id The virtual router ID number 1 ...

Page 1273: ...er Use the ip vrrp override addr owner command to accept packets addressed to the IP address associated with the virtual router such as ICMP SNMP and Telnet if it is not the IP address owner and it is the master Use the no form of this command to discard these packets Syntax no ip vrrp vr_id override addr owner Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet L2 L3 L2 VLAN L2 L3 L2 ...

Page 1274: ...to disable preemption for the virtual router instance By default preemption is enabled Syntax no ip vrrp vr_id preempt Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet L2 L3 L2 VLAN L2 L3 L2 Example To specify that virtual router 1 preempts a lower priority master G450 001 if Vlan 2 ip vrrp 1 preempt Related Commands ip vrrp ip vrrp address ip vrrp auth key ip vrrp override addr own...

Page 1275: ...p_address Parameters User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet L2 L3 L2 VLAN L2 L3 L2 Example To specify the source IP address for virtual router 1 as 192 168 66 23 G450 001 if Vlan 2 ip vrrp 1 primary 192 168 66 23 Related Commands ip vrrp ip vrrp address ip vrrp auth key ip vrrp override addr owner ip vrrp preempt ip vrrp priority ip vrrp timer router vrrp show ip vrrp Parameter Descr...

Page 1276: ...cify the priority of virtual router 1 as 10 G450 001 if Vlan 2 ip vrrp 1 priority 10 Related Commands ip vrrp ip vrrp address ip vrrp auth key ip vrrp override addr owner ip vrrp preempt ip vrrp primary ip vrrp timer router vrrp show ip vrrp ip vrrp timer Use the ip vrrp timer command to set the virtual router advertisement timer value for the virtual router ID Use the no form of this command to r...

Page 1277: ... ip vrrp override addr owner ip vrrp preempt ip vrrp primary ip vrrp priority router vrrp show ip vrrp router vrrp Use the router vrrp command to enable VRRP routing globally Use the no form of this command to disable VRRP routing Note Note You cannot activate both VRRP and SRRP protocols at the same time Syntax no router vrrp User Level read write Context general Parameter Description Possible Va...

Page 1278: ...yntax show ip vrrp vlan router id vr_id detail Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To show VRRP information for all VLANs G450 001 super show ip vrrp VRRP is globally enabled VLAN VRID IP Address Pri Timer State Since 1 1 192 168 66 23 255 1 MASTER 00 00 00 1 2 192 168 66 24 100 1 BACKUP 00 00 00 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value vlan Filter by the specified V...

Page 1279: ...nts 0 of transmitted Advertisements 20 of received Advertisements with Security Violations 0 Virtual Router on VLAN 1 Router id 2 State BACKUP Priority 100 Advertisement Interval 1 Last State Change 00 00 00 Override Address Ownership Rule No Authentication Type None Authentication Key Master IP Address 0 0 0 0 Has 1 IP addresses IP addresses 192 168 66 24 Primary IP Address 192 168 66 23 Primary ...

Page 1280: ...s sending remote alarm Receiver has loss of signal Framing is SF Line Code is AMI Clock Source is Line Data in current interval 802 seconds elapsed 0 Line Code Violations 0 Path Code Violations 0 Slip Secs 0 Fr Loss Secs 0 Line Err Secs 0 Degraded Mins 0 Errored Secs 0 Bursty Err Secs 0 Severely Err Secs 802 Unavail Secs Total Data last 4 15 minute intervals 10 Line Code Violations 0 Path Code Vio...

Page 1281: ...ay frame relay fragmentation statistics and configuration on all PVCs all PVCs associated with an interface or a specific PVC Note Note When statistics for multiple PVCs are shown they are sorted first by interface type and number and then by DLCI Syntax show frame relay fragment interface interface_name dlci_number Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To show details on configu...

Page 1282: ...Statistics for interface Serial 1 Frame Relay DTE LMI TYPE ANSI Annex D Invalid Unnumbered info 0 Invalid Prot Disc 0 Invalid dummy Call Ref 0 Invalid Msg Type 0 Invalid Status Message 0 Invalid Lock Shift 0 Invalid Information ID 0 Invalid Report IE Len 0 Invalid Report Request 0 Invalid Keep IE Len 0 Num Status Enq Sent 0 Num Status msgs Rcvd 0 Num Update Status Rcvd 0 Num Status Timeouts 0 LMI ...

Page 1283: ...ion ID Number of received LMI messages with invalid information identifier Invalid Report IE Len Number of received LMI messages with invalid Report IE Length Invalid Report Request Number of received LMI messages with invalid Report Request Invalid Keep IE Len Number of received LMI messages with invalid Keep IE Length Num Status Enq Sent Number of LMI status inquiry messages sent Num Status Msgs...

Page 1284: ...nd DLCIs associated with the sub interfaces Syntax show frame relay map User Level read only Context general Example To display information about the Frame Relay sub interfaces G450 001 super show frame relay map Showing 2 frame relay map entries Interface State Interface Type DLCI DLCI Type DLCI State Serial 1 1 down point to point 17 broadcast deleted Serial 1 1 down point to point 18 broadcast ...

Page 1285: ...w frame relay pvc interface interface_name dlci_number Parameters User Level read only Context general Example To show details on configuration and statistics for all PVCs associated with interface Serial 1 1 G450 001 super show frame relay pvc interface Serial 1 1 Showing 1 PVCPVC Statistics for interface Serial 1 Frame Relay DTE DLCI 17 USAGE LOCAL PVC STATUS DELETED INTERFACE Serial 1 1 input p...

Page 1286: ...interface Serial 2 Frame Relay DTE Related Commands show controllers show frame relay fragment show frame relay lmi show frame relay traffic show interfaces show ip interface show map class frame relay show frame relay traffic Use the show frame relay traffic command to display frame relay protocol statistics including ARP requests and replies sent and received over Frame Relay interfaces Syntax s...

Page 1287: ...t errors output drops Syntax show interfaces interface_type interface_identifier Parameters Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value interface_type The type of interface DIaler FastEthernet Serial Vlan Loopback Console Tunnel USB interface_ identifier The interface number The format varies depending on the value of interface_type For FastEthernet module port For Serial module port chann...

Page 1288: ...ute output rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec 0 input drops 0 output drops 0 unknown protocols 3425 packets input 323518 bytes 3425 broadcasts received 0 giants 0 input errors 0 CRC 32 packets output 896 bytes 0 output errors 0 collisions FastEthernet 10 2 is up line protocol is down Physical address is 00 04 0d 29 c5 10 MTU 1500 bytes Bandwidth 10000 kbit Reliability 1 255 txLoad 255 255 rxLoad 255 25...

Page 1289: ...rface counters never 5 minute input rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec 5 minute output rate 0 bits sec 0 packets sec 0 input drops 0 output drops 0 unknown protocols 0 packets input 0 bytes 0 broadcasts received 0 giants 0 input errors 0 CRC 0 packets output 0 bytes 0 output errors 0 collisions Console asynchronous mode is terminal Terminal baud rate is 9600 Related Commands Frame relay encapsulation c...

Page 1290: ...on frame relay class dlci frame relay interface dlci frame relay lmi n391dte frame relay lmi n392dte frame relay lmi n393dte frame relay lmi type frame relay priority dlci group frame relay traffic shaping ip address map class frame relay bc out be out cir out fragment show frame relay map show frame relay pvc brief show interfaces show traffic shape GRE tunneling show traffic shape statistics Rel...

Page 1291: ...ace FastEthernet module port ip_interface Parameters User Level read write Context general Example To create a FastEthernet interface and enter its context G450 001 super interface FastEthernet 10 2 To create a Level 3 sub interface on the FastEthernet interface G450 001 super interface FastEthernet 10 2 1 Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value module The module number of the interfac...

Page 1292: ...g Use the autoneg command to set the port speed and duplex to auto negotiation mode for the external Fast Ethernet port Use the no form of this command to disable auto negotiation mode Syntax no autoneg User Level read write Context interface FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 Related Commands interface FastEthernet duplex keepalive track speed interface traffic shape rate duplex Use the duplex command to cont...

Page 1293: ...he remote peer or the interface is up Use the no form of this command to disable this mechanism default setting Note Note When configuring VPN you can use the keepalive track command instead of the keepalive command when the remote peer does not support DPD or when you want to monitor servers behind the VPN remote peer Note Note You cannot configure both keepalive track and ip address dhcp DHCP Cl...

Page 1294: ...ace with object tracker 2 G450 001 config if FastEthernet 10 2 keepalive track 2 Related Commands WAN Ethernet port configuration interface FastEthernet autoneg duplex speed interface traffic shape rate Related Commands VPN description ISAKMP peer continuous channel crypto isakmp peer initiate mode isakmp policy keepalive VPN pre shared key self identity show crypto isakmp peer suggest key speed i...

Page 1295: ... autoneg duplex keepalive track traffic shape rate traffic shape rate Use the traffic shape rate command to configure traffic shaping for outbound traffic on the current interface Syntax traffic shape rate bit_rate Parameters User Level read write Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value speed_rate The interface speed 10MB 100MB Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value bit_ra...

Page 1296: ...ir out fragment show map class frame relay show traffic shape show traffic shape queue show traffic shape statistics WFVQ Weighted Fair VoIP Queueing fair queue limit Use the fair queue limit command to specify the maximum number of packets that can be queued in the weighted fair queue The allowable upper limit depends on the bandwidth configured for the interface Note Note The command fair queue ...

Page 1297: ...d to enable Weighted Fair VoIP Queueing WFVQ on the current interface WFVQ provides more fair service for data packets and improves response time for interactive data applications such as Telnet WFVQ is the default queueing mode for all Serial interfaces and all FastEthernet interfaces for which traffic shaping is enabled To disable WFVQ you must enable another queueing mode using either the voip ...

Page 1298: ...rity queue show queue show queueing voip queue priority queue Use the priority queue command to enable priority queueing mode in a serial or FastEthernet interface By default priority queueing is off and WFVQ is enabled on all Serial interfaces and all FastEthernet interfaces for which traffic shaping is enabled If you disable priority queueing by using the no form of the priority queue command WF...

Page 1299: ... show queue Use the show queue command to display information about the real time status of output queues for the current interface Note Note This command is only applicable in fair voip queue mode Syntax show queue type identifier Parameters User Level read only Parameter Description Possible Values Default Value type The type of interface Fast Ethernet Serial identifier The identifier depends on...

Page 1300: ...for Serial port 3 1 2 G450 001 super show queue Serial 3 1 2 Related Commands WFVQ fair queue limit fair voip queue priority queue show queueing voip queue show queueing Use the show queueing command to display the priority queueing and WFVQ configuration for a specific interface type or interface or for all interfaces Syntax show queueing interface_type if_number Parameters User Level read Contex...

Page 1301: ...eing is enabled using the voip queue command Est Delay ms If VoIP queueing is enabled displays the maximum queue delay for which to estimate the high priority queue size necessary to meet the queueing delay for a specific VoIP codec By default this is estimated for the G 729 codec and is 20 ms Can be configured through the voip queue delay command If VoIP queueing is not enabled the Est Delay colu...

Page 1302: ...is enabled If you disable custom queueing by using the no form of the voip queue command WFVQ is re enabled Syntax no voip queue User Level read write Context interface Serial DS1 PPP L2 L3 DS1 PPP L2 DS1 FR L2 USP FR L2 USP PPP L2 USP PPP L2 L3 FastEthernet L2 L2 L3 when traffic shaping is configured Dialer L2 L2 L3 Example To enable VoIP queueing G450 001 if Serial 3 1 1 voip queue Related Comma...

Page 1303: ...WFVQ Weighted Fair VoIP Queueing Issue 1 January 2008 1303 Related Commands WFVQ fair queue limit fair voip queue priority queue show queue show queueing ...

Page 1304: ...CLI Commands WFVQ Weighted Fair VoIP Queueing 1304 Avaya G450 CLI Reference ...

Page 1305: ...test plugs 215 clear counters interface 247 clear crypto isakmp 1202 clear crypto sa 1203 clear crypto sa counters 1205 clear dial pattern 943 clear ds1 944 clear dynamic trap manager 354 clear extension 944 clear fac 945 clear fragment 409 clear frame relay counters 413 clear incoming routing 946 clear ip dhcp server statistics 295 clear ip dhcp client statistics 280 clear ip dhcp server binding ...

Page 1306: ...tup config tftp 233 copy startup config usb 234 copy syslog file ftp 1128 copy syslog file scp 1129 copy syslog file tftp 1130 copy syslog file usb 1130 copy tftp auth file 181 copy tftp EW_archive 397 copy tftp license file 523 copy tftp module 398 copy tftp phone image 488 copy tftp phone script 489 copy tftp startup config 235 copy tftp SW_imageA 399 copy tftp SW_imageB 400 copy usb announcemen...

Page 1307: ... group 423 frame relay traffic shaping 424 1146 framing 364 frequency 598 G group 1231 H hash 1231 hostname 335 1117 I icc vlan 455 1183 icmp 655 689 735 769 icmp in echo limit 592 idle character 1170 ignore dcd 1171 incoming routing 981 initiate mode 1217 interface console 463 571 interface dialer 324 464 interface FastEthernet 818 1291 interface fastethernet 465 interface loopback 466 interface ...

Page 1308: ...3 ip route 886 ip routing 888 ip rtp compression connections 504 ip rtp header compression 505 ip rtp max period 506 ip rtp max time 507 ip rtp non tcp mode 508 ip rtp port range 509 ip simulate 712 759 ip snmp 1065 ip ssh 1118 ip tcp compression connections 510 1174 ip tcp header compression 1175 ip telnet 1135 ip telnet client 1136 ip telnet services 1137 ip tftp server 1140 ip tftp server file ...

Page 1309: ...lient wait for ipcp 830 pre classification 753 pre shared key 1221 priority queue 831 1298 protect crypto map 1246 Q queue limit 832 R redistribute OSPF 628 881 redistribute RIP 867 882 release dhcp 286 release voip dsp 1199 remote 368 remove nfas interface 1014 remove port 1039 rename announcement file 164 renew dhcp 287 reset 210 reset voip dsp 1195 restore usb 851 1160 retstatus 211 rmon alarm ...

Page 1310: ...x length 955 set mediaserver 563 set mgc list 564 set min length 956 set mss notification rate 592 set name 934 973 1023 1054 set numbering format 1055 set password 1025 set peer crypto map 1238 set peer peer group 1226 set peer group 1239 set pfs 1211 set pim lockout 991 set port 1026 set port auto negotiation flowcontrol advertisement 375 set port classification 798 set port duplex 376 set port ...

Page 1311: ...n 337 show banner post login 337 show boot bank 407 show bri 994 show cam 202 show cam mac 203 show cam vlan 1189 show capture 671 show capture buffer hex 672 show cna testplug 221 show composite operation 692 707 723 738 754 show contact closure 246 show controllers 372 1280 show controllers remote 373 show copy status 238 show crypto ipsec sa 1249 show crypto ipsec transform set 1257 show crypto...

Page 1312: ... condition 555 show logging file content 556 show logging server condition 557 show logging session condition 558 show login authentication 191 show logout 212 show map class frame relay 1290 show max ip registrations 1004 show mediaserver 567 show mg list_config 261 show mgc 262 568 show mgc list 569 show mm 263 show module 264 show mss notification rate 593 show next hop 766 show pim lockout 100...

Page 1313: ...1011 sls 921 snmp trap link status 1091 snmp server community 1077 snmp server dynamic trap manager 355 snmp server enable notifications 1092 snmp server engineID 1078 snmp server group 1080 snmp server host 1093 snmp server informs 1096 snmp server remote user 1082 snmp server user 1083 snmp server view 1085 source address 601 source ip 660 695 742 780 1247 speed interface 1294 speed PPP 580 star...

Page 1314: ...1314 Avaya G450 CLI Reference Alphabetical Index of Commands W wait interval 603 Z zeroize 257 ...

Page 1315: ...thentication 188 575 585 show auth file info 189 show download auth file status 190 show login authentication 191 show upload auth file status 191 username 193 1166 autoneg 152 Auxiliary files set web aux files url 194 show web aux files url 195 B Backing up the gateway to a USB device backup config usb 196 1157 show backup status 197 1162 Backup interfaces backup delay 198 backup interface 199 BO...

Page 1316: ... ip dhcp server binding 60 clear ip dhcp server statistics 60 clear ip domain statistics 64 clear ip route 117 clear ip rtp header compression 79 clear ip tcp header compression 79 142 clear ip tftp server statistics 77 139 clear ip traffic 54 clear logging file 83 clear mgc list 84 clear port mirror 108 clear port static vlan 143 clear radius authentication server 113 clear rmon statistics 116 cl...

Page 1317: ...script 78 copy usb startup config 53 copy usb SW_image 69 cos 101 crypto ipsec df bit 148 crypto ipsec minimal pmtu 149 crypto isakmp invalid spi recovery 145 crypto isakmp nat keepalive 146 crypto isakmp peer 146 crypto isakmp peer group 147 crypto isakmp policy 147 crypto isakmp suggest key 148 crypto ispec nat transparency udp encapsulation 145 crypto ispec transform set 145 crypto key generate...

Page 1318: ...ip distribution access default action 115 ip distribution access list 115 ip distribution access list cookie 115 ip distribution access list copy 115 ip distribution access list name 115 ip distribution access list owner 115 ip domain list 64 ip domain lookup 64 ip domain name server list 64 ip domain retry 64 ip domain timeout 64 ip icmp errors 74 ip license server 80 ip max arp entries 46 ip net...

Page 1319: ...next hop interface 105 next hop ip 106 next server 61 nslookup 64 nvram initialize 53 nzri encoding 142 object 89 option 61 owner 94 99 104 107 passive interfaces 91 ping 54 pmi 95 PPP authentication 87 ppp authentication 47 86 ppp chap hostname 110 ppp chap password 110 ppp chap refuse 110 PPP chap secret 87 ppp chap secret 86 ppp ipcp dns request 64 111 ppp pap refuse 111 ppp pap sent username 1...

Page 1320: ...t lldp tx hold multiplier 82 set lldp tx interval 82 set logging file 83 set logging server 83 set logging server access level 83 set logging server condition 83 set logging server facility 83 set logging session 83 set logout 51 set long timer 125 set match pattern 126 set max ip registrations 127 set max length 125 set mediaserver 84 set mgc list 84 set min length 125 set mss notification rate 8...

Page 1321: ...ression 142 ip tcp header compression brief 142 show bri 121 123 show dial pattern 125 show ds1 126 show incoming routing 126 show sig group 129 show station 129 show trunk group 132 show announcement file 45 show application memory 78 139 show attendant 127 show auth file info 47 show auth file status 47 show backup status 48 140 show banner login 63 show banner post login 63 show boot bank 69 sh...

Page 1322: ...able 118 show ip traffic 54 show ip vrrp 151 show ip codec set 128 show ip next hop list 107 show ip qos list 105 show ip rule 93 98 99 103 104 107 show isdn bri link 82 show isdn link summary 82 show isdn pri link 82 show keepalive icmp 75 show last pim update 128 show license status 81 show list 99 105 107 show lldp 82 show lldp config 82 show logging file condition 83 show logging file content ...

Page 1323: ...how username 141 show utilization 57 show vlan 143 show voip dsp 144 show voip parameters 144 show voltages 57 shutdown 52 77 86 87 111 sig group 128 sls 120 snmp trap link status 134 snmp server community 133 snmp server dynamic trap manager 65 snmp server enable notification 134 snmp server engineID 133 snmp server group 133 snmp server host 134 snmp server informs 134 snmp server remote user 13...

Page 1324: ...258 show faults 260 show mg list_config 261 show mgc 262 568 show mm 263 show module 264 show recovery 265 570 show restart log 266 show system 267 show temp 268 show timeout 269 show upload 259 270 show utilization 271 show voltages 271 test led 272 DHCP and BOOTP relay ip bootp dhcp network 273 ip bootp dhcp relay 274 ip bootp dhcp server 274 DHCP binding file copy dhcp binding ftp 275 copy dhcp...

Page 1325: ...namic cac 353 show dynamic cac 354 Dynamic trap manager clear dynamic trap manager 354 snmp server dynamic trap manager 355 E E1 T1 interfaces clear controller counters 357 controller 358 cablelength long 359 cablelength short 360 channel group 361 clock source 362 fdl 363 framing 364 linecode E1 365 linecode T1 366 remote 368 ds mode 369 interface serial 370 414 467 809 1168 ip address 371 425 47...

Page 1326: ...ath mtu discovery 448 tunnel source 449 tunnel ttl 450 show interfaces 432 451 815 1287 Guide latest version downloading 35 H Header compression see IPHC header compression Van Jacobson header compression HTTP server ip http 454 I ICC configuration icc vlan 455 1183 show icc vlan 455 ICMP errors ip icmp errors 456 show ip icmp 457 ICMP keepalive keepalive icmp 457 keepalive icmp failure retries 45...

Page 1327: ...w download license file status 525 show license status 526 show upload license file status 527 Link status show isdn bri link 528 show isdn link summary 529 show isdn pri link 530 LLDP set lldp re init delay 531 set lldp system control 532 set lldp tx delay 532 set lldp tx hold multiplier 533 set lldp tx interval 534 set port lldp 535 set port lldp tlv 536 show lldp 538 show lldp config 540 show p...

Page 1328: ...1169 ip ospf authentication 616 ip ospf authentication key 617 ip ospf cost 618 ip ospf dead interval 619 ip ospf hello interval 620 ip ospf message digest key 621 ip ospf network point to multipoint 622 ip ospf priority 622 ip ospf router id 623 router ospf 624 area 625 default metric OSPF 626 879 network OSPF 626 passive interface 627 redistribute 628 881 timers spf 629 show ip ospf 630 show ip ...

Page 1329: ...3 729 770 composite operation 650 684 719 726 730 destination ip 651 685 731 771 1244 dscp 687 721 733 fragment 654 688 734 774 icmp 655 689 735 769 ip protocol 657 691 736 775 show composite operation692 707 723 738 754 show dscp table 728 739 755 show ip rule 658 693 708 740 756 779 792 source ip 660 695 742 780 1247 tcp destination port 661 696 743 782 tcp source port 663 699 745 784 udp destin...

Page 1330: ...ar radius authentication server 843 set radius authentication 844 set radius authentication retry number 845 set radius authentication retry time 846 set radius authentication secret 846 set radius authentication server 847 set radius authentication udp port 848 show radius authentication 849 Recovery password set terminal recovery password 850 Redundancy see Port redundancy Restoring gateway conf...

Page 1331: ...ls 923 sls 921 bri 924 set bearer capability 925 964 set country protocol 926 968 set directory number a 928 set directory number b 929 set endpoint init 930 set interface 931 969 set interface companding 932 971 set layer1 stable 933 set name 934 973 1023 1054 set side 935 976 set spid a 937 set spid b 938 set tei assignment 939 show 940 clear attendant 942 clear bri 942 clear dial pattern 943 cl...

Page 1332: ... set send number 1058 set supervision 1059 set tac 1060 set trunk hunt 1061 show 1062 SNMP access configuration ip snmp 1065 set snmp community 1066 set snmp retries 1067 set snmp timeout 1068 show snmp 1069 1090 show snmp engineID 1070 show snmp group 1071 show snmp retries 1072 show snmp timeout 1073 show snmp user 1074 show snmp usertogroup 1075 show snmp view 1076 snmp server community 1077 sn...

Page 1333: ...le system size 493 1140 show application memory 494 1141 Traffic shaping interface serial 414 1142 map class frame relay 1144 bc out 1146 be out 1147 cir out 1148 fragment 1149 show map class frame relay 1150 show traffic shape 436 1151 show traffic shape queue 438 1153 show traffic shape statistics 440 1154 traffic shape rate 1156 traffic shape rate 153 U Upgrading firmware see Firmware managemen...

Page 1334: ...ransform set 1240 ip crypto group 1241 ip crypto list 1242 ip rule 1243 description ip rule 1243 destination ip 651 685 731 771 1244 protect crypto map 1246 source ip 660 695 742 780 1247 local address 1248 show crypto ipsec sa 1249 show crypto ipsec transform set 1257 show crypto isakmp peer 1259 show crypto isakmp peer group 1260 show crypto isakmp policy 1261 show crypto isakmp sa 1262 show cry...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for G450 Manager

NetLink 700-883-PRO42 User Manual preview
700-883-PRO42
Brand: NetLink Pages: 68
TANDBERG D1320203 User Manual preview
D1320203
Brand: TANDBERG Pages: 39
RTA 460ECMRS-NNA4 Product User Manual preview
460ECMRS-NNA4
Brand: RTA Pages: 68
ZyXEL Communications P-324 User Manual preview
P-324
Brand: ZyXEL Communications Pages: 352
Zte ZXHN H198A User Manual preview
ZXHN H198A
Brand: Zte Pages: 13
Cal Amp Phantom II Operating Manual preview
Phantom II
Brand: Cal Amp Pages: 164
intwine connect ICG-200 Series Quick Start Manual preview
ICG-200 Series
Brand: intwine connect Pages: 8
Advantech UTX-3117 User Manual preview
UTX-3117
Brand: Advantech Pages: 78
ATX UCrypt Operation Manual preview
UCrypt
Brand: ATX Pages: 84
AudioCodes MediaPack 1 Series Quick Setup Manual preview
MediaPack 1 Series
Brand: AudioCodes Pages: 10
AudioCodes MediaPack MP-112 User Manual preview
MediaPack MP-112
Brand: AudioCodes Pages: 622
San Telequip SC10MK2 User Manual preview
SC10MK2
Brand: San Telequip Pages: 20
Banner SureCross DX99 Replacement Instructions preview
SureCross DX99
Brand: Banner Pages: 2
Galaxy IPTV-DMG User & Installation Manual preview
IPTV-DMG
Brand: Galaxy Pages: 18
Bpt HAC/200 Instruction Manual preview
HAC/200
Brand: Bpt Pages: 25
Endress+Hauser Fieldgate SFG500 Operating Instructions Manual preview
Fieldgate SFG500
Brand: Endress+Hauser Pages: 52
Planet Networking & Communication MH-2001 User Manual preview
MH-2001
Brand: Planet Networking & Communication Pages: 12
Planet Networking & Communication CS-2000 Quick Installation Manual preview
CS-2000
Brand: Planet Networking & Communication Pages: 13

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands